Foreign Affairs (May & June 2020)

THE COMING UPHEAVAL IN CHINA
MAY/JUNE 2020
MAY/JUNE 2020 • VOLUME 99 • NUMBER 3 •
The Fire Next Time

How to Prevent a Climate Catastrophe
THE FIRE NEXT TIME
F O R E I G N A F F A I R S .C O M
www.CSSExamPoint.com
Volume 99, Number 3
THE FIRE NEXT TIME

The Climate Club 10
How to Fix a Failing Global Effort
William Nordhaus
The Paths to Net Zero 18

How Technology Can Save the Planet
Inês Azevedo, Michael R. Davidson, Jesse D. Jenkins, Valerie J. Karplus,
and David G. Victor
The Strategic Case for U.S. Climate Leadership 28

How Americans Can Win With a Pro-Market Solution
James A. Baker III, George P. Shultz, and Ted Halstead
A Foreign Policy for the Climate 39

How American Leadership Can Avert Catastrophe
John Podesta and Todd Stern
The Unlikely Environmentalists 47

How the Private Sector Can Combat Climate Change
Rebecca Henderson
Building a Resilient Planet 54

How to Adapt to Climate Change From the Bottom Up
C OV E R: B R IA N STAU F F E R
Kathy Baughman McLeod
The Climate Debt 60

What the West Owes the Rest
Mohamed Adow
May/June 2020
ESSAYS
The Comeback Nation 70
U.S. Economic Supremacy Has Repeatedly Proved Declinists Wrong
Ruchir Sharma
China’s Coming Upheaval 82

Competition, the Coronavirus, and the Weakness of Xi Jinping
Minxin Pei
What Kim Wants 96

The Hopes and Fears of North Korea’s Dictator
Jung H. Pak
The End of Grand Strategy 107

America Must Think Small
Daniel W. Drezner, Ronald R. Krebs, and Randall Schweller
Britain Adrift 118

The United Kingdom’s Search for a Post-Brexit Role
Lawrence D. Freedman
The Next Iranian Revolution 131

Why Washington Should Seek Regime Change in Tehran
Eric Edelman and Ray Takeyh
Making Cyberspace Safe for Democracy 146

The New Landscape of Information Competition
Laura Rosenberger
The Right Way to Fix the EU 160

Put Politics Before Economics
Matthias Matthijs
ON FOREIGNAFFAIRS.COM
Yanzhong Huang on Lisa Monaco on Timothy Naftali on
coronavirus conspiracy pandemics and impeachment and U.S.
theories. national security. foreign policy.
May/June 2020
A Sustainable
Future
H uman survival is predicated on our ability to create long-term

sustainability and mitigate the effects of climate change.
Experts predicted in 2018 that a major global city—Cape Town,

South Africa—was on the brink of running out of fresh water. While
heavy rains ultimately filled reservoirs and a crisis was averted,
Cape Town remains vulnerable.
Learn more:
Go.fiu.edu/climate From exploring water scarcity to developing models for a global
“green economy,” the Steven J. Green School of International &
Public Affairs works at the nexus of environmentalism, economic
development and sociopolitical discourse.
Just, Peaceful and

Creating a
Prosperous
World
REVIEWS & RESPONSES
A Few Good Men 172
Trump, the Generals, and the Corrosion of Civil-Military Relations
Max Boot
The Myanmar Mirage 179

Why the West Got Burma Wrong
Sebastian Strangio
Trials and Tribulations 186

A Response to “How Poverty Ends”
Jeffrey D. Sachs
The Two-State Devolution 190

Will Power Shifts in the Middle East Revive “Land for Peace”?
Tarek Osman; Michael S. Doran
Recent Books 194
“Foreign Affairs . . . will tolerate wide differences of opinion. Its articles will not represent any consensus
of beliefs. What is demanded of them is that they shall be competent and well informed, representing honest
opinions seriously held and convincingly expressed. . . . It does not accept responsibility for the views in any
articles, signed or unsigned, which appear in its pages. What it does accept is the responsibility for giving
them a chance to appear.”
Archibald Cary Coolidge, Founding Editor
Volume 1, Number 1 • September 1922
May/June 2020
May/June 2020 · Volume 99, Number 3
Published by the Council on Foreign Relations
GIDEON ROSE Editor, Peter G. Peterson Chair
DANIEL KURTZ-PHELAN Executive Editor
STUART REID, JUSTIN VOGT Managing Editors
LAURA SECOR Web Editor
TY M C CORMICK Deputy Web Editor
KANISHK THAROOR, KATHERINE ZOEPF Senior Editors
LAUREL JAROMBEK Social Media and Audience Development Editor
VICTOR BRECHENMACHER Staff Editor
ARI BERMAN, SERGIO INFANTE Assistant Editors
RICHARD BAKER Art Director
ANN TAPPERT Copy Chief
SARAH FOSTER Business Operations Director
Book Reviewers
RICHARD N. COOPER, RICHARD FEINBERG, LAWRENCE D. FREEDMAN, G. JOHN IKENBERRY, MARIA LIPMAN,
JESSICA T. MATHEWS, ANDREW MORAVCSIK, ANDREW J. NATHAN, NICOLAS VAN DE WALLE, JOHN WATERBURY
STEPHANIE SOLOMON Chief Revenue Officer

JONATHAN CHUNG Circulation Operations Director
RICKY FERRER Director of Product
NORA REVENAUGH Marketing Director
EDWARD WALSH Advertising Director
MICHAEL PASUIT Senior Manager, Advertising Accounts and Operations
ELENA TCHAINIKOVA Senior Manager, Events and Business Development
CARLOS A. MORALES Senior Manager, Digital Analytics and Audience Development
GRACE FINLAYSON, FAIZA CHOWDHURY Marketing Operations Coordinators
ANASTASIA FISCHER Marketing Coordinator
HALEY ARNDT Customer Retention Coordinator
ALEXA SOLORIO Production and Business Coordinator
GABRIELA VIEIRA Marketing Promotions Associate
ERIC SPECTOR Deputy Director, Digital Development
ANGEL TRAJKOV Manager of Web Development
TIM WASSON Front End Web Developer
KAREN MANDEL Quality Assurance Manager
LISA SHIELDS, IVA ZORIC, MEGAN GILLILAND Media Relations
Board of Advisers
JAMI MISCIK Chair
JESSE H. AUSUBEL, PETER E. BASS, JOHN B. BELLINGER, DAVID BRADLEY, KENNETH CHENAULT, SUSAN CHIRA,
JESSICA P. EINHORN, FRANCIS FUKUYAMA, THOMAS H. GLOCER, ADI IGNATIUS, JEH CHARLES JOHNSON,
CHARLES R. KAYE, WILLIAM H. M C RAVEN, MICHAEL J. MEESE, COLIN POWELL, CECILIA ELENA ROUSE,
KEVIN P. RYAN, MARGARET G. WARNER, NEAL S. WOLIN, DANIEL H. YERGIN
SUBSCRIP TION SERVICES: Foreign Affairs

ForeignAffairs.com/services 58 E. 68th Street, New York, NY 10065
T ELEPHONE: ADVERT IS IN G: Call Edward Walsh at 212-434-9527 or visit
800-829-5539 U.S./Canada www.foreignaffairs.com/advertising
845-267-2017 All other countries WEB SIT E : ForeignAffairs.com
EMAIL: [email protected] N EWSLET T ER S: ForeignAffairs.com/newsletters
MAIL: P.O. Box 324, Congers, NY 10920 FAC EBOOK : Facebook.com/ForeignAffairs
REPRODUCTION: The contents of Foreign Affairs are copyrighted. No part of the magazine may be reproduced, hosted
or distributed in any form or by any means without prior written permission from Foreign Affairs. To obtain permission, visit
ForeignAffairs.com/permissions
Foreign Affairs is a member of the Alliance for Audited Media and the Association of Magazine Media.
GST Number 127686483RT
Canada Post Customer #4015177 Publication #40035310
CONTRIBUTORS
WILLIAM NORDHAUS is a pioneer in the economics of
climate change. A Sterling professor of economics at Yale
University, where he has taught since 1967, Nordhaus
was the first to develop the concept of a carbon tax, an idea
that has since become central to several dozen countries’
strategies for reducing emissions. For his work integrat-
ing climate change into long-term macroeconomic
analysis, he shared the 2018 Nobel Prize in Economics
with Paul Romer. In “The Climate Club” (page 10),
Nordhaus explains why the global fight against climate
change is failing—and lays out a vision of how to make
international climate agreements work.
MOHAMED ADOW has spent almost two decades fighting

climate change across Africa. As a member of the relief
agency Christian Aid from 2008 to 2019, he consulted for
African governments on international climate agreements,
disaster risk reduction, and drought management. Today,
he continues that work as the founding director of the
think tank Power Shift Africa. In “The Climate Debt”
(page 60), Adow argues that when it comes to climate
change, the West owes the rest.
Ever since RUCHIR SHARMA graduated college in New

Delhi, at the age of 20, he has balanced a career in
finance with his work as an author and columnist,
writing several books and frequent articles on emerging
markets, global economic trends, and Indian politics,
among other topics. In “The Comeback Nation” (page 70),
Sharma, currently the head of emerging markets and
chief global strategist at Morgan Stanley, argues that
despite a widespread narrative of U.S. decline, the 2010s
were in fact a golden decade for the United States.
As a doctoral student at Columbia, JUNG PAK set out to

study U.S. history. Instead, she became a leading authority
on North Korea, spending almost ten years analyzing the
shadowy regime as a senior official at the CIA and the
National Intelligence Council—experience she draws on in
her new book, Becoming Kim Jong Un. In “What Kim
Wants” (page 96), Pak, now the SK-Korea Foundation chair
in Korea studies at Brookings, argues that Washington and
its allies should focus less on making the North Korean
dictator feel secure and more on changing his risk calculus.
THE FIRE NEXT TIME
P
rofessionals warn and plan, ama- technologies could limit future tem-
teurs scoff and ignore them, and by perature increases, argues a team of
the time a crisis arrives, it’s too top researchers.
late to do more than react and suffer. Washington should see climate
Nothing about this story is novel; the change not only as an environmental
COVID-19 pandemic is only the latest in risk but also as a strategic opportunity,
a long series of unnecessary catastrophes. suggest two former Republican secre-
We can’t go back now and regain those taries of state, James Baker and George
precious early months during the winter, Shultz, with Ted Halstead, and capitalize
using them to aggressively test and on the early U.S. lead in green technol-
quarantine and contain the outbreak. We ogy. John Podesta and Todd Stern, who
can’t retrospectively conjure up a func- handled climate policy in the Obama
tioning global public health infrastructure, administration, offer a road map for
effective crisis-management systems, overhauling American foreign policy and
and leaders who put lives over pride. But institutions to rise to the occasion.
at least we can learn the lessons. Rebecca Henderson shows why
Climate change is also a crisis. It is business leaders are starting to drive a
unfolding more slowly than its pandemic green agenda rather than obstruct it.
cousin but will have even vaster conse- Kathy Baughman McLeod notes the cru-
quences. The world had a chance to tackle cial role of local and community
it early but blew that through decades leadership in fostering simple behavioral
of denial. Much future damage is baked in changes with powerful collective effects
already. Yet wise public policy can still (the environmental equivalents of hand
limit the scale of the eventual disaster—if washing). And Mohamed Adow points
everybody takes the challenge seriously out that any climate effort must include
across the board now, as our lead package major development assistance for poor
this issue explains. countries, since they are the most
International climate change agree- vulnerable to the crisis, the least respon-
ments need to be restructured to reduce sible for it, and the key to its solution.
incentives for free-riding, writes the We failed to stop the sickness this
Nobel Prize–winning economist William time. But we can do better with the fire
Nordhaus. And a strong global push to next time.
develop and adopt low-emission energy —Gideon Rose, Editor
The old design for
climate agreements should
be scrapped in favor of
a new one that can fix
its mistakes.
— William Nordhaus
The Climate Club A Foreign Policy for the Climate

William Nordhaus 10 John Podesta and Todd Stern 39
The Paths to Net Zero The Unlikely Environmentalists

Inês Azevedo, Michael R. Davidson, Rebecca Henderson 47
Jesse D. Jenkins, Valerie J. Karplus, and
David G. Victor 18 Building a Resilient Planet
Kathy Baughman McLeod 54
The Strategic Case for U.S. Climate
Leadership The Climate Debt
James A. Baker III, George P. Shultz, and Mohamed Adow 60
Ted Halstead 28
the outcomes of the deliberations.
The Climate Club COP25 followed COP24, which followed
THE FIRE NEXT TIME
COP23, which followed COP22, all the

way back to COP1—a series of multilat-
How to Fix a Failing Global eral negotiations that produced the failed
Effort Kyoto Protocol and the wobbly Paris
accord. At the end of this long string of
William Nordhaus conferences, the world in 2020 is no
further along than it was after COP1, in
C
limate change is the major 1995: there is no binding international
environmental challenge facing agreement on climate change.
nations today, and it is increas- When an athletic team loses 25 games
ingly viewed as one of the central issues in a row, it is time for a new coach. After
in international relations. Yet govern- a long string of failed climate meetings,
ments have used a flawed architecture in similarly, the old design for climate
their attempts to forge treaties to agreements should be scrapped in favor
counter it. The key agreements, the 1997 of a new one that can fix its mistakes.
Kyoto Protocol and the 2015 Paris
climate accord, have relied on voluntary THE PRISONER’S DILEMMA OF
arrangements, which induce free-riding CLIMATE CHANGE
that undermines any agreement. Concepts from game theory elucidate
States need to reconceptualize climate different kinds of international conflicts
agreements and replace the current and the potential for international agree-
flawed model with an alternative that has ments. A first and easy class of agree-
a different incentive structure—what I ments are those that are universally
would call the “Climate Club.” Nations beneficial and have strong incentives for
can overcome the syndrome of free- parties to participate. Examples include
riding in international climate agree- coordination agreements, such as the
ments if they adopt the club model and 1912 accord to coordinate the world
include penalties for nations that do not measurements of time and, more recently,
participate. Otherwise, the global effort the agreement to use “aviation English”
to curb climate change is sure to fail. for civil aviation, which coordinates
In December 2019, the 25th Confer- communications to prevent collisions
ence of the Parties (COP25) of the UN during air travel. A second class of
Framework Convention on Climate agreements, of medium difficulty, rely on
Change (UNFCCC) met in Madrid, Spain. reciprocity, a central example being
As most independent observers concluded, treaties on international trade.
there was a total disconnect between the A third class of international agree-
need for sharp emission reductions and ments confront hard problems—those
involving global public goods. These are
goods whose impacts are indivisibly
BRIAN CRONIN
WILLIAM NORDHAUS is Sterling Professor of

Economics at Yale University and a recipient of spread around the entire globe. Public
the 2018 Nobel Prize in Economics. This essay
draws on his Nobel lecture delivered in goods do not represent a new phenom-
December 2018. enon. But they are becoming more
10 F O R E I G N A F FA I R S
William Nordhaus
critical in today’s world because of rapid Further obstacles are the scale, difficulty,
technological change and the astounding and cost of slowing climate change.
decline in transportation and communi- But in addition to facing the intrinsic
cation costs. The quick spread of COVID-19 difficulty of solving the hard problem of
is a grim reminder of how global forces climate change, international climate
respect no boundaries and of the perils agreements have been based on a flawed
of ignoring global problems until they model of how they should be struc-
threaten to overwhelm countries that tured. The central flaw has been to
refuse to prepare and cooperate. overlook the incentive structure. Be-
Agreements on global public goods cause countries do not realistically
are hard because individual countries appreciate that the challenge of global
have an incentive to defect, producing warming presents a prisoner’s dilemma,
noncooperative, beggar-thy-neighbor they have negotiated agreements that
outcomes. In doing so, they are pursuing are voluntary and promote free-riding—
their national interests rather than and are thus sure to fail.
cooperating on plans that are globally
beneficial—and beneficial to the indi- MORE KNOWLEDGE, NO PROGRESS
vidual countries that participate. Many The risks of climate change were
of the thorniest global issues—interstate recognized in the UNFCCC, which was
armed conflict, nuclear proliferation, ratified in 1994. The UNFCCC declared
the law of the sea, and, increasingly, that the “ultimate objective” of climate
cyberwarfare—have the structure of a policy is “to achieve . . . stabilization of
prisoner’s dilemma. The prisoner’s greenhouse gas concentrations in the
dilemma occurs in a strategic situation in atmosphere at a level that would pre-
which the actors have incentives to make vent dangerous anthropogenic interfer-
themselves better off at the expense of ence with the climate system.”
other parties. The result is that all parties The first step in implementing the
are worse off. (The studies of Columbia’s UNFCCC was taken in the Kyoto Proto-
Scott Barrett on international environ- col in 1997. Kyoto’s most important
mental agreements lay out the theory and innovation was an international cap-and-
history in an exemplary way.) trade system for emissions. Each coun-
International climate treaties, which try’s greenhouse gas emissions were
attempt to address hard problems, fall limited under the protocol (the cap). But
into the third class, and they have countries could buy or sell their emission
largely failed to meet their objectives. rights to other countries depending on
There are many reasons for this failure. their circumstances (the trade). The idea
Since they are directed at a hard prob- was that the system would create a
lem, international climate agreements market in emissions, which would give
start with an incentive structure that has countries, companies, and governments
proved intrinsically difficult to make strong incentives to reduce their emis-
work. They have also been undermined sions at the lowest possible cost.
by myopic or venal leaders who have no The Kyoto Protocol was an ambi-
interest in long-term global issues and tious attempt to construct an interna-
refuse to take the problem seriously. tional architecture to harmonize the
The Climate Club
policies of different countries. Because world to limit warming to the two-de-

it was voluntary, however, the United gree target. Actual emissions have grown
States and Canada withdrew without by about two percent annually over the
consequences, and no new countries last two decades. Modeling studies
signed on. As a result, there was a sharp indicate that even if the Paris commit-
reduction in its coverage of emissions. ments are met, the global temperature will
It died a quiet death, mourned by few, almost certainly exceed the two-degree
on December 31, 2012—a club that no target later in the twenty-first century.
country cared to join. The bottom line is that climate policy
The Kyoto Protocol was followed by has not progressed over the last three
the Paris accord of 2015. This agree- decades. The dangers of global warming
ment was aimed at “holding the in- are much better understood, but nations
crease in the global average temperature have not adopted effective policies to
to well below 2°C above pre-industrial slow the coming peril.
levels.” The Paris agreement requires all
countries to make their best efforts FREE RIDERS
through “nationally determined contri- Why are agreements on global public
butions.” For example, China an- goods so elusive? After all, nations have
nounced that it would reduce its carbon succeeded in forging effective policies
intensity (that is, its carbon dioxide for national public goods, such as clean
emissions per unit of GDP), and other air, public health, and water quality.
countries announced absolute reductions Why have landmark agreements such as
in emissions. The United States, under the Kyoto Protocol and the Paris accord
the Trump administration, declared that failed to make a dent in emission trends?
it would withdraw from the agreement. The reason is free-riding, spurred by
Even before the United States the tendency for countries to pursue
withdrew, it was clear that the national their national interests. Free-riding occurs
targets in the Paris accord were incon- when a party receives the benefits of a
sistent with the two-degree temperature public good without contributing to the
target. The accord has two major costs. In the case of international
structural defects: it is uncoordinated, climate change policy, countries have
and it is voluntary. It is uncoordinated an incentive to rely on the emission
in the sense that its policies, if under- reductions of others without making costly
taken, would not limit climate change domestic reductions themselves.
to the target of two degrees. And it is Focusing on national welfare is appro-
voluntary because there are no penalties priate when impacts do not spill over
if countries withdraw or fail to meet national borders. In such cases, countries
their commitments. are well governed if they put their citi-
Studies of past trends, as well as the zens’ well-being first rather than promot-
likely ineffectiveness of the commit- ing narrow interests such as through
ments in the Paris accord, point to a protectionist tariffs or lax environmental
grim reality. Global emissions would regulations. However, when tackling
need to decline by about three percent global problems, nationalist or noncoop-
annually in the coming years for the erative policies that focus solely on the
May/June 2020 13
William Nordhaus
home country at the expense of other agreement, such as the Kyoto Protocol or
countries—beggar-thy-neighbor poli- the Paris accord. No single country has
cies—are counterproductive. an incentive to cut its emissions sharply.
Many global issues induce cooperation Suppose that when Country A spends
by their very nature. Like players on $100 on abatement, global damages
athletic teams, countries can accomplish decline by $200 but Country A might
more when acting together than when get only $20 worth of the benefits: its
going their separate ways. The most national cost-benefit analysis would lead
prominent examples of positive-sum it not to undertake the abatement. Hence,
cooperation are the treaties and alliances nations have a strong incentive not to
that have led to a sharp decline in battle participate in such agreements. If they do
deaths in recent years. Another important participate, there is a further incentive
case is the emergence of low-tariff to understate their emissions or to miss
regimes in most countries. By reducing ambitious objectives. The outcome is a
barriers to trade, all nations have seen an noncooperative free-riding equilibrium,
improvement in their living standards. in which few countries undertake
However, alongside the successes lie strong climate change policies—a situa-
a string of failures on the global stage. tion that closely resembles the current
Nations have failed to stop nuclear international policy environment.
proliferation, overfishing in the oceans, When it comes to climate change
littering in space, and transnational policies today, nations speak loudly but
cybercrime. Many of these failures carry no stick at all.
reflect the syndrome of free-riding.
When there are international efforts to MEMBERSHIP BENEFITS
resolve a global problem, some nations In light of the failure of past agreements,
inevitably contribute very little. For it is easy to conclude that international
example, NATO is committed to defend- cooperation on climate change is doomed
ing its members against attacks. The to fail. This is the wrong conclusion. Past
parties to the alliance agreed to share the climate treaties have failed because of
costs. In practice, however, the burden poor architecture. The key to an effective
sharing is not equal: the United States climate treaty is to change the architec-
accounted for 70 percent of the total ture, from a voluntary agreement to one
defense spending by NATO members in with strong incentives to participate.
2018. Many other NATO members spend Successful international agreements
only a tiny fraction of their GDPs on function as a kind of club of nations.
defense, Luxembourg being the extreme Although most people belong to clubs,
case, at just 0.5 percent. Countries that do they seldom consider their structure. A
not fully participate in a multiparty agree- club is a voluntary group deriving
ment on public goods get a free ride on mutual benefits from sharing the costs
the costly investments of other countries. of producing a shared good or service.
Free-riding is a major hurdle to The gains from a successful club are
addressing global externalities, and it lies sufficiently large that members will pay
at the heart of the failure to deal with dues and adhere to club rules to get the
climate change. Consider a voluntary benefits of membership.
The Climate Club
The principal conditions for a dioxide. That target price might apply
successful club include that there is a to 2020 and rise over time at, say, three
public-good-type resource that can be percent per year in real terms. (The
shared (whether the benefits from a World Bank estimates that the global
military alliance or the enjoyment of average carbon price today is about $2
low-cost goods from around the world); per ton of carbon dioxide.)
that the cooperative arrangement, Why would carbon prices be a better
including the costs or dues, is beneficial coordinating device than the quantity
for each of the members; that nonmem- of emissions? One important reason is
bers can be excluded or penalized at that an efficient path for limiting
relatively low cost to members; and that warming would involve equating the
the membership is stable in the sense incremental (marginal) costs of reduc-
that no one wants to leave. tions in all countries and all sectors.
Nations can overcome the syndrome This would be accomplished by having
of free-riding in international climate equal carbon prices everywhere. A
agreements if they adopt the club second and equally powerful reason
model rather than the Kyoto-Paris involves bargaining strategy, a point
model. How could the Climate Club emphasized in the writings of the
work? There are two key features of the economist Martin Weitzman. When
Climate Club that would distinguish it countries bargain about the target
from previous efforts. The first is that price, this simplifies the negotiations,
participating countries would agree to making them about a single number:
undertake harmonized emission reduc- dollars per ton. When the bargaining is
tions designed to meet a climate objec- about each country’s emission limit,
tive (such as a two-degree temperature this is a hopeless matter, because
limit). The second and critical differ- countries want low limits for others
ence is that nations that do not partici- and high limits for themselves. A
pate or do not meet their obligations bargain about emission limits is likely
would incur penalties. to end up with no limits at all.
Start with the rules for membership. A treaty focusing on an interna-
Early climate treaties involved quantita- tional target carbon price would not
tive restrictions, such as emission limits. mandate a particular national policy.
A more fruitful rule, in line with Countries could use carbon taxes
modern environmental thinking, would (which would easily solve the problem
focus on a carbon price, a price attached of setting the price) or a cap-and-trade
to emissions of carbon dioxide and mechanism (such as is used by the
other greenhouse gases. More precisely, European Union). Either can achieve the
countries would agree on an interna- minimum price, but different countries
tional target carbon price, which would might find one or the other approach
be the focal provision of the agreement. more suited to its institutions.
For example, countries might agree that The second and critical feature of
each will implement policies that the Climate Club would be a penalty
produce a minimum domestic carbon for nonparticipants. This is what gives
price of $50 per metric ton of carbon the club mechanism its structure of
May/June 2020 15
William Nordhaus
incentives and what distinguishes it from production structure but to provide

all current approaches to countering powerful incentives for countries to be
climate change: nonparticipants are part of the Climate Club.
penalized. Some form of sanction on
nonparticipants is required to induce SANCTIONING THE
countries to participate in and abide by NONPARTICIPANTS
agreements with local costs but diffuse There is a small academic literature
benefits. Without penalties, the agree- analyzing the effectiveness of clubs and
ment will dissolve into ineffectiveness, as comparing them to agreements without
have the Kyoto and Paris schemes. sanctions. The results suggest that a
Although many different penalties well-designed climate club requiring
might be considered, the simplest and strong carbon abatement and imposing
most effective would be tariffs on trade sanctions on nonparticipants
imports from nonparticipants into club would provide well-aligned incentives
member states. With penalty tariffs on for countries to join.
nonparticipants, the Climate Club would I will illustrate the point using the
create a situation in which countries results of a study I presented in my 2015
acting in their self-interest would choose Presidential Address to the American
to enter the club and undertake ambi- Economic Association and summarized
tious emission reductions because of the in my Nobel Prize lecture. (The former
structure of the payoffs. provided a full explanation of the model,
One brand of penalty could be a the results, the qualifications, and the
countervailing duty on the carbon content sensitivity analyses; the latter was a
of imports. However, this approach nontechnical discussion of just the key
would be both complicated and ineffec- results.) The study divided the world
tive as an incentive to join a club. The into 15 major regions. Each region has
main problem is that much carbon its own abatement costs and damages
dioxide is emitted in the production of from climate change. Because of the
nontraded goods, such as electricity. global nature of climate change, how-
Additionally, calculating accurately the ever, the abatement costs are local,
indirect carbon content of imports is whereas virtually all the benefits of a
exceedingly complicated. region’s emission reductions spill over to
A second and more promising other regions. Even for the largest
approach would be a uniform tariff on players (the United States and China),
all imports from nonclub countries into at least 85 percent of the benefits of
the club. Take as an example a penalty their emission reductions accrue abroad.
tariff of five percent. If nonparticipant The modeling of the study tested
Country A exported $100 billion worth alternative uniform tariff rates, from
of goods into the club countries, it zero to ten percent, and different
would be penalized with $5 billion of international target carbon prices, from
tariffs. The advantage of uniform tariffs $12.50 per ton to $100 per ton. It then
over countervailing duties is simply asked if there were stable coalitions of
simplicity. The point is not to fine-tune countries that wanted to join and
the tariffs to a nonparticipant country’s remain in the club. One case is a regime
The Climate Club
with a carbon price of $25 per ton and Additionally, nations have continued
a penalty tariff of three percent. With with the losing strategy (zero wins, 25
this regime, it is in the national interest losses) pursued by the UNFCCC’s
of every region to participate, and it is Conference of the Parties structure.
in the interest of no region to defect Global warming is a trillion-dollar
and free-ride. The coalition of all regions problem requiring a trillion-dollar
is stable because the losses from the tariff solution, and that demands a far more
(for nonparticipants) are larger than the robust incentive structure.
costs of abatement (for participants). There are many steps necessary to
The Kyoto Protocol and the Paris slow global warming effectively. One cen-
accord can be thought of as regimes with tral part of a productive strategy is to
zero penalty tariffs. Both history and ensure that actions are global and not just
modeling have shown that these induce national or local. The best hope for
minimal abatement. Put differently, effective coordination is a Climate Club—
the analysis predicts—alas, in a way a coalition of nations that commit to
that history has confirmed—that strong steps to reduce emissions and
voluntary international climate agree- mechanisms to penalize countries that do
ments will accomplish little; they will not participate. Although this is a radical
definitely not meet the ambitious proposal that breaks with the approach of
objectives of the Paris accord. past climate negotiations, no other
Such detailed modeling results blueprint on the public agenda holds the
should not be taken literally. Modeling promise of strong and coordinated
offers insights rather than single-digit international action.∂
accuracy. The basic lesson is that
current approaches are based on a
flawed concept of how to manage the
global commons. The voluntary ap-
proach needs to be replaced by a club
structure in which there are penalties
for nonparticipation—in effect, envi-
ronmental taxes on those who are
violating the global commons.
TOWARD EFFECTIVE POLICIES

The international community is a long
way from adopting a Climate Club or a
similar arrangement to slow the ominous
march of climate change. The obstacles
include ignorance, the distortions of
democracy by anti-environmental
interests, free-riding among those
looking to the interests of their country,
and shortsightedness among those who
discount the interests of the future.
May/June 2020 17
world without a responsible hegemon,
The Paths to Net any collective effort is difficult to
THE FIRE NEXT TIME
organize. And the profound uncertainty

Zero about what lies ahead makes it hard to
move decisively.
These political hurdles are formi-
How Technology Can Save dable. The good news is that technologi-
the Planet cal progress can make it much easier to
clear them by driving down the costs of
Inês Azevedo, Michael R. action. In the decades to come, innova-
Davidson, Jesse D. Jenkins, Valerie J. tion could make severe cuts in emissions,
also known as “deep decarbonization,”
Karplus, and David G. Victor achievable at reasonable costs. That will
mean reshaping about ten sectors in the
F
or 30 years, diplomats and policy- global economy—including electric
makers have called for decisive power, transportation, and parts of agri-
action on climate change—and for culture—by reinforcing positive change
30 years, the climate crisis has grown where it is already happening and invest-
worse. There are a multitude of reasons ing heavily wherever it isn’t.
for this failure. The benefits of climate In a few sectors, especially electric
action lie mostly in the future, they are power, a major transformation is already
diffuse and hard to pin down, and they underway, and low-emission technologies
will accrue above all to poor populations are quickly becoming more widespread, at
that do not have much of a voice in least in China, India, and most Western
politics, whether in those countries that countries. The right policy interventions
emit most of the world’s warming in wind, solar, and nuclear power, among
pollution or at the global level. The other technologies, could soon make
costs of climate action, on the other hand, countries’ power grids far less dependent
are evident here and now, and they fall on conventional fossil fuels and radically
on well-organized interest groups with reduce emissions in the process.
real political power. In a multipolar Technological progress in clean
electricity has already set off a virtuous
INÊS AZEVEDO is Associate Professor of
Energy Resources Engineering at Stanford
circle, with each new innovation creating
University. more political will to do even more.
MICHAEL R. DAVIDSON is Assistant Replicating this symbiosis of technology
Professor of Engineering and of Public Policy at and politics in other sectors is essential. In
the University of California, San Diego. most other high-emission industries,
JESSE D. JENKINS is Assistant Professor of however, deep decarbonization has been
Engineering at Princeton University.
much slower to arrive. In sectors such as
VALERIE J. KARPLUS is Assistant Professor transportation, steel, cement, and plastics,
of Global Economics and Management at MIT.
companies will continue to resist pro-
DAVID G. VICTOR is Professor of Innovation found change unless they are convinced
and Public Policy at the University of California,
San Diego, and a Nonresident Senior Fellow at that decarbonization represents not only
the Brookings Institution. costs and risks for investors but also an
The Paths to Net Zero
opportunity to increase value and as transportation and heating. Overall,

revenue. Only a handful have grasped transportation accounts for 27 percent of
the need for action and begun to test global energy use, and nearly all of it
zero-emission technologies at the appro- relies on oil. The car industry has had
priate scale. Unless governments and some success in changing this: the latest
businesses come together now to change electric vehicles rival high-end conven-
that—not simply with bold-sounding tional cars in performance and cost, and
international agreements and marginal electric cars now make up around eight
tweaks such as mild carbon taxes but also percent of new sales in California
with a comprehensive industrial policy— (although only 1.3 percent nationwide)
there will be little hope of reaching and nearly 56 percent in Norway, where
net-zero emissions before it’s too late. the government offers massive subsidies
to buyers. With improved batteries,
THE FUTURE IS ELECTRIC heavier-duty vehicles, including buses
From today’s vantage point, no single and trucks, could soon follow. In fact,
domain offers greater opportunities for China already fields a fleet of over
deep decarbonization than electric 420,000 electric buses. By contrast,
power. The use of electricity does not aviation—which makes up only two
increase or reduce emissions in itself; percent of global emissions but is growing
electricity delivers energy that may or rapidly and creates condensation trails in
may not be clean depending on how it the sky that double its warming effect—
was generated. An electric car, for presents a tougher challenge. A modern
instance, doesn’t do much good against battery can store only two percent of the
global warming if all the electricity energy contained in a comparable
comes from conventional coal plants. weight of jet fuel, meaning that any
Still, electrifying the economy—in electric airplane would need to carry an
other words, designing more processes extremely heavy load in batteries to
to run on electricity rather than the travel any reasonable distance. Even in
direct combustion of fuels—is essential. the best-case scenario, commercial
This is because, compared with trying electric aviation at significant scale is
to reduce emissions in millions of places likely decades away, at least for long-haul
where they might occur, it is far easier flights. Long-distance shipping also
and more efficient to reduce emissions faces challenges so daunting that
at a modest number of power plants electrification is unlikely to be the best
before distributing the clean electricity route. And in each of these areas,
by wire. Today, Western economies electrification is all the more difficult
convert about 30 percent of their energy because it requires not only changing
into electric power. If they want to get the conveyances but also building new
serious about decarbonization, that charging infrastructures.
fraction will need to double or more. Besides transportation, the most
Getting there will require progress on important electrification frontier is
two fronts. The first is the electrifica- heating—not just in buildings but as part
tion of tasks that use vast amounts of of industrial production, too. All told,
energy but still rely on fossil fuels, such heating consumes about half the raw
May/June 2020 19
Inês Azevedo, Michael R. Davidson, Jesse D. Jenkins, Valerie J. Karplus, and David G. Victor
energy that people and firms around the and renewables making up the difference.
world use. Of that fraction, some 50 In theory, fossil fuels could still
percent goes into industrial processes that become much cleaner, even nearly
require very high temperatures, such as emission free. This could be possible with
the production of cement and steel and the help of so-called carbon capture and
the refining of oil (including for plastics). storage (CCS) technologies, which capture
These sectors will continue to rely on the carbon dioxide emissions created by
on-site fossil fuel combustion for the industrial processes and pump it safely
foreseeable future, since electricity cannot underground. In practice, investors have
match the temperature and flexibility of remained wary of this approach, but in
direct fuel combustion. Yet in other areas, both the United States and some Euro-
such as lower-temperature industrial pean countries, recently introduced
processes and space heating for buildings, subsidies are expected to unleash a wave
electrification is more practical. Heat of new CCS projects in the years ahead.
pumps are a case in point: whereas One CCS scheme, currently being tested
conventional heaters work by heating up by a group of engineering and energy
indoor air, heat pumps act like reversible firms, completely rethinks the design of
air conditioners, moving heat (or, if power plants, efficiently generating
necessary, cold) indoors or outdoors—a electricity from natural gas while
far more efficient approach. capturing nearly all the carbon dioxide
Electrification, of course, will not on produced in the process at little extra
its own reduce emissions by much unless cost. In regions where natural gas is
the power grid that generates and cheap and abundant, this technology
distributes the electricity gets cleaner, could be a game changer.
too. Ironically, some countries have made For now, improved fossil fuel technol-
modest progress on this front even as ogy has amounted to shallow decarbon-
they have doubled down on fossil fuels. ization: it has reduced emissions enough
China, for instance, has swapped out to slow the rate of climate change—in
aging coal plants with newer, more the United States, emissions from the
efficient ones, cutting emission rates in power sector have dropped by 29
the process. (The country’s most effi- percent since 2005 thanks mainly to
cient coal plants now emit less carbon the shale gas revolution and growth of
dioxide per unit of electricity than renewables—but not enough to stop it.
comparable U.S. plants.) The United To prevent the world from warming
States, for its part, has cut down on its further will require much more focus
emissions thanks to innovations in on technologies that have essentially
horizontal drilling and fracking that have zero emissions, such as wind, solar,
made it economically viable to extract hydroelectric, and nuclear power, in
shale gas. In 2005, when this technology addition to CCS, if it proves commer-
first became commercially relevant, coal cially scalable. According to the
accounted for half of all the electricity United Nations’ Intergovernmental
produced in the United States; today, Panel on Climate Change, these
coal’s share is down to one-quarter, with low-carbon technologies would need to
much cleaner and inexpensive natural gas generate 80 percent of the world’s
The answer, my friend? A wind farm near the Nufenen Pass, Switzerland, September 2016
electricity by 2050 (up from about output from wind and solar plants,
one-third today) in order to limit however, varies with the weather, the
warming to two degrees Celsius above season, and the daily rise of the sun. The
preindustrial levels. more a power grid relies on renewables,
Renewables, in particular, will play a then, the more often the supply will not
central role. Thanks to decreases in the match the demand. In the extreme, extra
cost of wind and solar power equip- power must be dumped—meaning that
ment—and thanks to a mature hydroelec- valuable capital and land were used
tric power industry—renewable energy inefficiently. To be less vulnerable to such
already accounts for over one-quarter of shocks, utility companies will need to
global electricity production. (Nuclear expand the size of their power grids, so
provides another ten percent.) In the that each can draw on a larger and more
United States, the cost of electricity from diverse array of energy sources. In order
large solar farms has tumbled by 90 to deal with excess supply from renew-
percent since 2009, and wind energy ables—a condition that will become much
prices have fallen by nearly 70 percent— more frequent as the share of renewables
D ENIS BALI BOUSE / REUTERS
and both continue to drop. rises—they must also create incentives

Given those plunging costs, the main for users to vary their demand for power
challenge is no longer to make renew- more actively and find ways to store
ables cheap; it is to integrate them into surplus electricity on a much larger scale.
the power grid without disruptions. To Today, nearly all bulk storage capacity
avoid blackouts, a power grid must align takes the form of hydroelectric pumps,
supply and demand at all times. Energy which store electricity by moving water
May/June 2020 21
uphill and recovering about 80 percent of which have more active nuclear power
the power when it flows back down. In programs—the costs are much lower
the years ahead, soaring demand for and public opposition is less pronounced.
electric vehicles will drive down the cost Moreover, whereas countries once
of lithium-ion batteries; those batteries designed and built their own reactors,
could become an affordable way to store today many simply import them. That
energy at the grid level, too. And as the model can create new risks—the sector’s
need for storage increases, even cheaper leading exporter today is Russia, a
methods may come on the market. country not renowned for its diligence
To better integrate renewables, regarding reactor safety or the security of
policymakers can also rely on the nuclear materials—but it also has the
strategic use of another zero-emission potential to make commercial nuclear
technology: nuclear energy. Although technology available to many countries
most efficient when running flat out 24 that could not develop and deploy it
hours a day, nuclear power plants can safely on their own. Abu Dhabi’s purchase
also operate flexibly to cover the supply of four gigantic South Korean–built
gaps from wind and solar power. Some reactors, the first of which is set to start
of France’s nuclear reactors, for in- operating next year, shows the promise of
stance, already cycle from about one- this model. The same approach could
quarter to full power and back again, work for other countries that currently
sometimes twice a day, to compensate satisfy their large energy needs with fossil
for fluctuations in the supply and fuels, such as Saudi Arabia.
demand of renewables. When it comes to the precise techno-
Independent of renewables, nuclear logical makeup of a future decarbonized
power already contributes massively to economy, expert opinions diverge.
cleaner grids. Every year, some 440 Engineers and economists, for the most
operational nuclear reactors account for part, imagine solutions that bundle
lower global carbon dioxide emissions several approaches, with both CCS and
of an estimated 1.2 billion metric tons. In nuclear power acting as important
the United States, research suggests complements to renewables. Political
that keeping most existing nuclear plants scientists, on the other hand, tend to
open would be far less expensive than see a bigger role for renewables—one of
many other policy options. In fact, most the few areas in energy policy that
countries would do well to expand their usually garners support from across the
nuclear power even further to cut back ideological spectrum, including in the
on their emissions. In the West, however, United States. Yet even this rather
major expansions are not on the horizon: popular solution can prove divisive.
public opposition is strong, and the cost Fierce debates rage over where to locate
of building new reactors is high, in part generators such as wind turbines,
because countries have built too few including among putative environmen-
reactors to benefit from the savings that talists who support the technology only
come with repetition and standardiza- if they don’t have to look at it. Public
tion. Yet in other parts of the world— opposition to new wind turbines in
especially China and South Korea, Norway—even in already industrialized
areas—and to offshore wind parks in does now in carrying energy from

the eastern United States are harbingers producers to users—and it offers crucial
of tough siting fights to come. The same advantages. It is easier to store, making
issue arises when it comes to power it ideal for power systems dependent on
lines: making the most of renewables ever-fluctuating supplies of renewable
requires longer, more numerous power energy. And it can be burned—without
lines that can move renewable power producing any new emissions—to
wherever it will be needed, but public generate the high levels of heat needed in
opposition can make such grid expan- heavy industry, meaning that it could
sions a bureaucratic nightmare. In replace on-site fossil fuel combustion in
California, for example, the most recent sectors that are hard to electrify. Hy-
big power line designed to move renew- drogen (either in its pure form or mixed
able power where it will be useful—in with other chemicals) could also serve as
that case, from the sunny desert to San liquid fuel to power cars, trucks, ships,
Diego—took a decade to build, even and airplanes. A zero-emission economy
though the technical engineering and could integrate the two carriers—electric-
construction portion of the project ity and hydrogen—using each depending
should have consumed no more than two on its suitability for different sectors.
years. China, by contrast, has blown past The technology needed to turn
the efforts of the United States and hydrogen into an energy carrier already
Europe, with dozens of ultrahigh-voltage exists in principle. One option is to
lines, most of them built in the last break up (or electrolyze) water into its
decade, crisscrossing the country. constituent elements, hydrogen and
oxygen. The hydrogen could then be
THE GREAT UNKNOWNS stored or transported through the natural
Political obstacles notwithstanding, gas pipeline networks that already
expanding the electrification of transpor- string across all advanced economies.
tation and heat and the production of Once it reached its user, it would be
low-carbon electricity offers the surest burned for heat or used as an input for
path to a clean economy to date. The a variety of chemical processes. So far,
latest analysis by the Intergovernmental this approach is too expensive to be
Panel on Climate Change, for instance, viable on a large scale, but growing
suggests that more pervasive use of clean investment, especially in Europe, is
electricity in the global economy would poised to drive down the cost rapidly.
cover more than half the cuts needed for Initial tests, including planned networks
deep decarbonization. Yet just how big a of hydrogen pipelines outside Stockholm
role electrification will ultimately play is (for making steel), Port Arthur in Texas
hard to predict—in part because its (for industrial chemistry), the British city
impact will depend on the future trajec- of Leeds (for residential heat), and the
tory of rival solutions that are only just Teesside area (for several applications,
beginning to emerge and whose potential including power generation) and numer-
is impossible to assess precisely. ous other ventures, will soon yield more
Hydrogen, in particular, could serve insights into how a real-world hydrogen
much the same function as electricity economy would fare.
CCS is somewhat of a wildcard, too. the soil, could store huge amounts of
Some industrial processes produce carbon dioxide as underground biomass
prodigious and highly concentrated for several decades or longer.
streams of carbon dioxide emissions that As the hard reality of climate change
should be relatively easy to isolate and has set in, some have begun to dream of
capture. The production of cement, technologies that could reverse past
which accounts for a whopping four emissions, such as “direct air capture”
percent of global carbon dioxide emis- machines, which would pull carbon
sions, is a good example. But firms dioxide from the atmosphere and store
operating in global commodity markets, it underground. Pilot projects suggest that
where missteps can be economically these options are very costly—in part
disastrous, are hesitant to invest in because it is thermodynamically difficult
fledgling systems such as CCS. To change to take a dilute gas from the atmosphere
that, state-supported real-world testing and compress it into the high concen-
is overdue. A nascent Norwegian project trations needed for underground stor-
to collect carbon dioxide from various age. But cost reductions are likely, and the
industrial sources in several northern more dire the climate crisis becomes,
European countries and inject it under- the more such emergency options must be
ground may provide some answers. taken seriously.
Another promising area for reducing
emissions is agriculture, a field in which GETTING TO ZERO
advances on the horizon could yield The ramifications of climate change are
large cuts. More precise control over the proving more disastrous than originally
diets of animals raised for food—which thought, just as politicians are realizing
will probably require more industrial that cutting emissions is harder than
farming and less free grazing—could lead anticipated. That leaves a large and
cows, sheep, and other livestock to emit growing gap between climate goals, such
less methane, a warming gas that, pound as the Paris agreement’s target of limiting
for pound, is 34 to 86 times as bad as warming to 1.5–2.0 degrees Celsius above
carbon dioxide. (It would also help if preindustrial levels, and the facts on the
people ate less meat.) Meanwhile, a host ground. The world has already warmed
of changes in crop cultivation—such as by about 1.1 degrees, and at least another
altering when rice fields are flooded to half a degree is probably inevitable, given
strategically determining which engi- the downstream effects of today’s emis-
neered crops should be used—could also sions, the inertia of the climate system,
lower emissions. and the inherent difficulty of reshaping
Agriculture’s biggest potential contri- industrial infrastructure.
bution, however, lies belowground. Plants To close the gap between aspirations
that engage in photosynthesis use carbon and reality, governments need to grasp
dioxide from the air to grow. The mass that they cannot rely solely on hard-to-
cultivation of crops that are specially bred enforce international agreements and
to grow larger roots—a concept being seductive market-based approaches,
tested on a small scale right now—along such as carbon pricing, that will work
with farming methods that avoid tilling only at the margins. The world needs
May/June 2020 25
new technology, and that means more challenges and administrative hurdles.
R & D—much more—and a lot of If these schemes focus on making critical
practical experience in testing and industries carbon free and provide lots
deploying new technologies and business of room for experimentation and
strategies at scale. To stimulate that learning, they could prove effectual. If
progress, governments need to embrace they become “Christmas-tree propos-
what is often called “industrial policy.” In als,” with ornaments for every industrial
each major emitting sector, authorities and social cause imaginable, then they
should create public-private partnerships may collapse under the weight of their
to invest in, test, and deploy possible cost and poor focus.
solutions. A bigger supply of new fundamental
The details will vary by sector, but ideas for decarbonization is essential. On
the common thread is that governments the first day of the 2015 Paris climate
must directly support fledgling tech- conference, a group of 24 governments,
nologies. That means tax credits, direct along with the EU and the billionaire
grants, and promises to procure pio- philanthropist Bill Gates, pledged to
neering green products even if they are double their spending on clean energy
more expensive than their conventional R & D. So far, the group’s self-reported
alternatives. These steps will ensure data show that it is at 55 percent of its
that new low-emission products in goal; independent and more credible
sectors such as cement, steel, electricity, assessments suggest that the actual
plastics, and zero-carbon liquid fuels increase is only half of that. Mission
can find lucrative markets. The need for Innovation, as the collective is known,
such government intervention is hard to has also set up working groups on
overstate. Producing steel without solutions such as CCS and hydrogen, but
emissions, for example, could initially those groups have little capacity to
be twice as expensive as producing it in develop and implement a collective
the traditional way—a penalty that no research agenda. What is needed instead
company operating in a global, com- are smaller, more focused groups of
petitive commodity market will accept high-powered backers. Powerful govern-
unless it has direct support in developing ments have a part to play, but not an
the necessary technology, reliable exclusive one, considering that some
markets through government procure- (such as the United States today) are
ment, and trade protections against unreliable and therefore less important
dirtier competitors. than subnational actors, such as Califor-
For now, no major government is nia, or even wealthy philanthropists.
taking these steps at a reasonable scale. Initiatives such as Mission Innova-
The much-touted Green New Deal in the tion are essential because markets for
United States is still weak on specifics, clean technology are global. Three
and the more concrete it becomes, the decades ago, when diplomatic efforts to
harder it may be to form a supportive combat climate change began, most
political coalition around it. Its counter- innovation in heavy industry, including
part, the European Green Deal, is in the energy sector, came from a small
further along yet also faces political number of Western countries. No
longer. When it comes to electric buses 1900, to completely replace horses on

and scooters, China is king, with India American roadways—and horses and
taking some baby steps. For electric cars, cars could use the same roads. History
U.S., Japanese, and European manufac- has shown that transformations affecting
turers are in the lead technologically, but entire infrastructures, as are needed
Chinese firms have larger volumes of today, take even longer.
sales. Innovation in ultrahigh-voltage Even immediate investment by a
power lines is coming particularly from cluster of motivated countries, organiza-
engineering firms based in Europe and tions, and billionaires, in other words,
Asia. The explosion in China of low- cannot transform the industrial system
cost production of solar photovoltaics overnight. Yelling louder will not
was initially geared to supply the highly change that. Setting bold goals can help,
subsidized German market. but new technological facts on the
Given this geographic breadth, nation- ground—sped along by active industrial
alist trade policies that limit cross-border policy and international cooperation—
exchange and investment could easily are what will transform the politics and
gum up the works. In particular, the make deep decarbonization a reality.
United States should reform its approach Change will be slower than advocates
to foreign investment in sensitive tech- and scientists would like. But it will
nologies. Instead of the current review accelerate if the leaders most willing to
policy—an opaque process managed by act on climate change stop moralizing
the Committee on Foreign Investment in and start seeing deep decarbonization as
the United States—regulators should a matter of industrial engineering.∂
follow the “small yard, high fence” rule
proposed by former U.S. Defense Secre-
tary Robert Gates: identify a short list of
technologies that are truly sensitive and
protect the United States’ advantage in
those areas while opening the doors to the
power of globalization for all others.
THE LONG HAUL

The great technological transformation
of the nineteenth century was to harness
the power of fossil fuels for industrial
growth. The twentieth century rode the
wave of innovation that followed and,
inadvertently, put the planet on track
for massive warming. The defining
industrial project of this century will be
to leave carbon behind. As governments
and firms embark on this enterprise,
they should prepare for the long haul. It
took cars some 30 years, starting in
May/June 2020 27
the chief worry is that global climate
The Strategic Case solutions could put the U.S. economy at
THE FIRE NEXT TIME
a competitive disadvantage with its

for U.S. Climate trading partners and reduce American
living standards. The second set is
Leadership geopolitical: some observers wonder
why the United States should reduce its
own greenhouse gas emissions if other
How Americans Can Win countries won’t do their part.
With a Pro-Market Solution But a well-designed U.S. climate
policy can replace national vulnerabilities
James A. Baker III, George P. with major strategic opportunities. We
Shultz, and Ted Halstead propose here an environmentally ambi-
tious, economically sound, and politically
feasible plan that situates the United
States at the forefront of a clean energy
I
n the United States, the case for future, enhances the competitiveness of
greater action on climate change is U.S. firms, and allows all Americans to
typically made on environmental benefit directly from emission reductions.
grounds. But there are equally compel- Such a plan would also speed up and
ling economic, geopolitical, and na- strengthen the United States’ economic
tional security rationales for the United recovery once the immediate health
States to lead the world on climate concerns from the novel coronavirus
policy. Even those who remain skeptical outbreak subside.
of the environmental urgency of the
problem should recognize the over- AMERICA’S CARBON ADVANTAGE
whelming strategic advantages of U.S. Consider first the relationship between
climate action at home and abroad. national climate policy and international
Those who oppose greater U.S. competitiveness. Contrary to the tradi-
engagement and ambition have legitimate tional perception that more action on
concerns. These concerns tend to fall climate change would undermine Ameri-
into two buckets. The first is economic: can competitiveness, the lack of a coher-
ent national climate policy now poses a
JAMES A. BAKER III is Honorary Chair of Rice
University’s Baker Institute for Public Policy and significant risk to U.S. firms. That is
served as U.S. Secretary of the Treasury from because the current rules of global trade
1985 to 1988 and U.S. Secretary of State from effectively subsidize carbon-intensive
1989 to 1992.
production overseas and prevent the
GEORGE P. SHULTZ is Thomas W. and Susan B.
Ford Distinguished Fellow at the Hoover
United States from reaping the economic
Institution and served as U.S. Secretary of the benefits of its competitive advantage in
Treasury from 1972 to 1974 and U.S. Secretary low-emission manufacturing.
of State from 1982 to 1989.
The chief competitors to U.S.-based
TED HALSTEAD is Chair and CEO of the firms in China, India, Russia, and other
Climate Leadership Council. He is a co-author
(with Michael Lind) of The Radical Center: The countries generally operate under lax
Future of American Politics. environmental standards and produce
The Strategic Case for U.S. Climate Leadership
goods in a more carbon-intensive manner. States cannot remain the world’s fore-
Yet they currently pay no penalty for most power if it is not also its leading
this. For example, China is now the energy innovator.
world’s largest steel manufacturer, even Another common misconception is
though its average production of steel that climate action in the United States
is more than twice as carbon intensive as is too expensive or risks undermining
the United States’. A similar pattern the U.S. economy. Thanks largely to the
emerges in a variety of industries: motor shale and fracking revolution pioneered
vehicles, chemicals, even solar panels in the United States, market prices for
and agricultural products. In each case, natural gas have fallen by 70 percent since
U.S.-based firms compete on an unlevel 2008, so the cleanest fossil fuel is now
playing field because the current rules of also the cheapest fossil fuel. During
the game put them at a competitive roughly the same period, the cost of solar
disadvantage. Rather than lower U.S. power dropped by nearly 90 percent, and
climate ambitions, a better response would the price of wind power dropped by 70
be to encourage U.S. trading partners to percent. By capitalizing on efficiency
raise their standards or penalize them for gains and replacing coal with natural gas
their polluting ways. and solar and wind energy, the United
Further misconceptions exist about States has cut its greenhouse gas emis-
technology. Republicans are right to sions by 12 percent since 2005, all while
focus on clean energy innovation as the maintaining a vibrant economy.
key to reducing carbon emissions. Yet Although the United States and its
some conservatives seem not to realize trading partners have a long way to go in
that the United States is falling behind reducing emissions, a fundamental para-
in the clean energy race. The innovation digm shift is occurring. Climate action
coming out of U.S. universities, na- and economic growth, far from being
tional labs, and businesses is impressive, mutually exclusive, are not only compat-
but too few of the results are being ible but also increasingly interdependent.
produced in the United States and too The U.S. economy has prospered in
little of it is making its way into com- recent decades because the U.S. public
mercial applications. and private sectors were the first to
Here, too, a comparison with China embrace the communications and infor-
is revealing. China is now the world’s mation technology revolutions. The
top producer, exporter, and user of transition to clean energy promises equally
wind turbines, solar panels, and batter- far-reaching economic advantages. Next-
ies—the essential building blocks of a generation renewables and nuclear energy
clean energy economy; the United could substantially drive down the per-
States is in fourth place, trailing Ger- unit cost of electricity, just as the digital
many and Japan. China also accounts revolution drove down costs in recent
for 60 percent of global electric vehicle decades. That is why China is investing so
sales, and the country has long-range heavily in these sectors. And that is why
plans in place to turn itself into the the United States could be putting its
global leader in developing the fuels global economic leadership position at risk
and cars of the future. The United if it continues to ignore this transformation.
May/June 2020 29
Many corporate leaders have already growing source of conflict among states.
come to this realization and are push- The current tension between Egypt and
ing for climate action, not just because Ethiopia over the Nile River foreshad-
their customers and shareholders are ows what might come. And the retreat
demanding it but also because of facts of Arctic sea ice could change the
on the ground that are affecting their balance of power among China, Russia,
bottom line. The potential domestic and the United States. A relatively
economic toll of a warming planet is ice-free Arctic would not only open vast
already difficult to ignore. Greater new mineral riches to China and
flooding, storms, wildfires, and droughts Russia; it would also alter world trade
harm sectors as varied as real estate and routes between Europe and East Asia.
agriculture. Today, taxpayer spending Competition in today’s multipolar
on federal disaster relief is almost ten world is characterized less by direct
times what it was three decades ago, military confrontation among great
after adjusting for inflation. Climate powers and more by economic and
change will exact an ever-greater toll diplomatic rivalry. Seen through this
on the U.S. economy over the next prism, the United States’ lack of a
several decades if emissions remain on long-term climate strategy harms its
their current course. ability to promote American interests
on a rapidly evolving world stage. The
RISKS TO THE NATIONAL INTEREST United States risks becoming a by-
The United States’ lack of a coherent stander, as a prior world order that was
climate strategy also threatens its overly dependent on Middle Eastern
national security and, most important, oil gives way to a new one dominated
its position and influence in the interna- by clean energy.
tional arena. The national security The winner of the emerging clean
implications of climate change are sub- energy race will determine the eco-
stantial. New research published in nomic and geopolitical balance of
Nature Communications has estimated power for decades to come. The
that rising sea levels will put up to 340 United States faces steep competition
million people at risk of annual flooding in this field. Russia is one of the
or permanent inundation during the United States’ main challengers in
next 30 years, largely in Asian mega- energy; Moscow has flooded the world
cities. The World Bank, meanwhile, has with cheap oil and gas through new
found that increased flooding, as well as pipelines and has unveiled a new
food and water insecurity, in Latin generation of nuclear plants and fuel
America, sub-Saharan Africa, and South agreements with developing countries.
Asia alone could generate an additional 51 Each such investment creates closer
million to 118 million internal “climate geopolitical relationships. Meanwhile,
migrants” by 2050. This could profoundly China and India are making major
destabilize countries around the world, investments in renewable energy
particularly those with poor governance. technologies (as well as coal-fired
As water scarcity gets worse, control electricity). China, already a leading
over this vital resource will become a manufacturer of solar and wind tech-
With great emission comes great responsibility: at a steel mill in Hefei, China, March 2006
nology, seeks to dominate the coming export their more carbon-intensive goods
transformation in energy storage and to the United States in what amounts
delivery, as well. to “carbon dumping.”
At the same time, a lack of economic The European Union poses a different
incentives to reduce carbon emissions kind of challenge. For the past 15 years,
in China, India, and other developing the EU has limited emissions through a
countries has resulted in an uneven trading system that allows companies to
playing field that forces carbon-efficient emit greenhouse gases based on the
U.S. and European companies to number of allowances they have purchased
compete directly with rivals that have within a limited, or capped, marketplace.
far weaker environmental standards. It is now dramatically expanding its
The lower energy-production costs in climate-related regulations and planning
developing countries lure global firms to tax energy-intensive imports.
away from the United States and The United States and the European
Europe. China is adding to the compe- Union should be working together to
tition by promoting carbon-intensive defend their collective advantage over more
STRING ER CHINA / REUTERS
industrialization in other emerging carbon-intensive competitors. Unfortu-

economies, often powered by new coal nately, the regulatory burden Europe
plants built through its Belt and Road already imposes on U.S. firms will soon
Initiative. Such investments risk saddling increase as the EU adopts tougher
poorer countries with rising carbon measures to combat climate change, sharp-
emissions. As if that were not enough, ening transatlantic rivalries and reducing
China and other emerging economies the opportunities for collaboration.
May/June 2020 31
If Washington wants to avoid accept- with regulations and subsidies for many
ing new rules imposed by other countries, years, with mixed results at best.
it should step up and set its own. Economists have long maintained that
Specifically, the United States needs to carbon pricing, which involves placing a
become the global front-runner in clean fee on emissions to reduce them and to
energy technologies and forge a U.S.-led drive investment into cleaner technolo-
climate alliance to advance its national gies, is the fastest and most cost-effective
interest. The country has everything to way to cut emissions.
gain from positioning itself, as it so often Several of the candidates for the
has, at the head of the table. Democratic presidential primary voiced
support for some form of carbon
CLIMATE POLICY BY DEFAULT pricing. Yet they also proposed costly
An American-led global energy policy regulations and massive government
must be grounded in a coherent and expenditures that would hurt businesses
cost-effective domestic climate policy. By and the economy. Through both their
default rather than by design, however, rhetoric and their policies, high-profile
the United States has a national climate figures in the Democratic Party have
policy that leaves a lot to be desired and gone out of their way to demonize the
is clearly not getting the job done. companies that provide most of the
It consists of an array of federal United States’ energy and that are
climate regulations left over from among the largest investors in clean
previous administrations, many of them technology ventures.
being unwound by the current one; a Republican members of Congress,
variety of federal tax credits and meanwhile, have started to signal that
subsidies for both conventional and the era of climate denialism is over.
low-emission energy sources; a patch- Representative Kevin McCarthy of
work of state-based climate regulations California, the House minority leader, has
and carbon-pricing regimes, which have warned that the GOP ignores the
proliferated in response to the re- climate issue at its own peril, and Mitch
trenchment of federal policy; and a McConnell of Kentucky, the Senate
constellation of clean energy commit- majority leader, recently emphasized
ments and investments made by large that the Republican Party needs climate
companies, some of them aided by solutions of its own. This represents a
earlier federal subsidies and research critical inflection point in the national
investments. These four elements of climate debate.
U.S. climate policy ultimately leave all Republicans still need to determine
the key stakeholders in the debate the cornerstone of their climate strategy.
dissatisfied—whether they be environ- With the regulatory approach off the
mentalists, businesses, or voters of table, the GOP is leaning toward promot-
various political orientations. ing clean energy innovation through tax
The U.S. government has three main credits and subsidies. So far, this has
options for reducing emissions: regula- mostly taken the form of incremental
tions, subsidies, and carbon pricing. proposals that do not add up to a
The United States has experimented coherent strategy.
Democrats and Republicans alike hopefully in the current Congress. This

should accept the fact that neither coalition includes 19 Fortune 100
regulations nor subsidies alone will get companies; three leading environmental
the job done and that compared with nongovernmental organizations; opinion
carbon pricing, these two instruments are leaders from across the political spectrum;
much more expensive means of reducing and in the energy sector alone, five of the
emissions, requiring higher overall taxes seven oil and gas supermajors, the largest
and deficits. In the end, it is better to rely
solar company in the United States, and
on the market rather than the govern- three of the nation’s leading utilities. Last
ment to determine winners and losers. year, our carbon dividends framework was
The time has come for both parties also endorsed by over 3,500 U.S. econo-
to embrace carbon pricing, which mists, including the past four chairs of the
economists and business leaders consis- Federal Reserve, 27 Nobel laureates, and
tently point to as the most business- 15 former chairs of the President’s Coun-
friendly and environmentally ambitious cil of Economic Advisers, including all
way forward. The Republican Party, in eight former Republican chairs.
particular, can play a major role in this The first pillar of this approach would
transformation. As the party Ameri- be an economy-wide and revenue-neutral
cans most associate with business carbon fee. Carbon pricing of this sort
innovation and free-market solutions, would produce faster and greater
the GOP is well positioned to set the emission reductions at a lower cost to
terms of a cost-effective and politically the economy than regulations or subsi-
viable climate policy breakthrough. dies. Studies show that reducing
greenhouse gas emissions by deploying
THE WAY FORWARD today’s most commonly used regula-
In February 2017, we outlined what came tions and subsidies can cost, on average,
to be known as “the Baker-Shultz Carbon between $100 and $600 per metric ton.
Dividends Plan.” Our starting premise These costs are largely hidden, contrib-
was that Democrats and Republicans must uting to the misallocation of capital.
work together with corporate America and By contrast, our transparent carbon fee
environmentalists to find a market-based, would start at $40 per ton and increase by
small-government solution capable of five percent per year above inflation.
overcoming the primary political obstacle According to modeling by Resources for
to carbon pricing, the risk of harming the Future, an American nonprofit that
American living standards. Our second researches resource use and allocation,
premise was that in order to protect if the plan were enacted in 2021, it would
American jobs and competitiveness, the cut U.S. carbon emissions in half by 2035
United States must give other leading from 2005 levels. If cumulative U.S.
emitters, such as China and India, a stark carbon emissions were not on track to
choice: do their fair share to reduce meet that objective after five years, then
emissions or face economic penalties. our annual carbon-fee escalator would
A broad coalition has since joined automatically increase from its base rate
together to turn this plan into a detailed of five percent per year to 7.5 percent per
blueprint for bipartisan introduction, year, and then to ten percent per year if
emissions were still not on track. The debates over how to pay for the
best modeling indicates that it is highly changes and over the size of the govern-
unlikely that this fee escalator would be ment. By contrast, this plan would
triggered, but it is nevertheless an encourage a smooth transition to a low-
essential component of our approach. carbon future by harnessing the power
The plan’s second pillar calls for of the market and incentivizing the
returning the revenue from carbon fees private sector to deploy its vast resources
directly to the American people in the for innovation and investment.
form of quarterly checks, or dividends. A
family of four would receive approxi- PRO-BUSINESS PROVISIONS
mately $2,000 per year in carbon divi- A third pillar of the plan would involve
dends in the first year, an amount that significantly simplifying or eliminating
would increase over time as the annual regulations, which should be particu-
carbon fee increased. According to a study larly appealing to Republicans. In the
produced by the Treasury Department in many cases in which the carbon fee
2017, 70 percent of U.S. families—includ- would provide a more cost-effective
ing the least well-off ones—would receive policy solution, the fee should replace
more, on average, in carbon dividends than current and future regulations, which
they would pay in increased energy prices. would no longer be necessary. For
Using carrots is a much more effective instance, it should supplant all current
way to build long-term support than and future federal carbon regulations
relying on sticks. These provisions would that apply to stationary sources of
align the economic interests of ordinary emissions, such as factories. Given that
Americans with climate progress. And roughly two-thirds of U.S. carbon
they would create a positive feedback emissions currently come from such
loop: the higher the carbon fee, the lower sources, this regulatory streamlining
the carbon emissions and the higher the would provide significant benefits to
dividend to all Americans. businesses and the economy. Yet this is
Moreover, this approach would not a blanket deregulatory agenda; for
empower individual Americans to address example, it would not affect regula-
climate change on their own terms. It is tions covering other greenhouse gases,
transparent and easy to understand, such as methane, or building and
leaving decisions over energy choices to appliance standards, for which a carbon
consumers and businesses. The fee would price is not as effective.
increase gradually, allowing people to The plan would ultimately give
adjust their habits. And it would incentiv- businesses the predictability and flexibil-
ize conservation rather than imposing it. ity they need to make long-term invest-
By contrast, regulations often take away ments in a low-carbon future. Regula-
people’s decision-making power, handing tory stability and a predictable price on
it to far-away bureaucratic agencies that carbon would spur clean technology
are often unresponsive to local concerns. innovation and investment by American
The dividend would also make the companies. Government research and
plan revenue neutral. Any climate plan development is, of course, important in
with a high price tag will set off partisan establishing a scientific foundation for
May/June 2020 35
technological innovation, and targeted A NEW CLIMATE ALLIANCE

subsidies can accelerate the pace. But a Climate change is the ultimate foreign
rising carbon fee is the most powerful policy challenge, because any viable
tool to unleash the innovative power of solution requires all major countries to
the private sector. By making it profit- act in concert. A domestic reduction of
able to reduce carbon emissions, such a U.S. carbon emissions will be of limited
fee would incentivize businesses across the value if other nations, such as China—
economy to take their discoveries and now the world’s top emitter—don’t do
use them to pioneer new clean industrial their part. The United States, accord-
methods and energy sources. Once a ingly, must complement a carbon
technology had proved its commercial dividends plan at home with an interna-
viability, the fee would propel its wide tional strategy that accounts for the
and rapid deployment. failures of global action so far.
The fourth and final pillar of this The most successful global environ-
plan is a carbon tariff designed to level mental treaty to date was the 1987
the international playing field by apply- Montreal Protocol on Substances That
ing the domestic carbon price to Deplete the Ozone Layer, which pro-
energy-intensive imports. This would tected the ozone layer by phasing out the
enable the United States to fully benefit production of chemicals responsible for
from and leverage its competitive its depletion. Two of us (Baker and
advantage in low-emission manufactur- Shultz) played significant roles in negoti-
ing over many emerging economies. As ating that agreement, which succeeded
with the carbon fee, revenues collected because it was balanced and bipartisan.
from the tariff would be returned to the As the ozone science developed
American people in the form of a through the 1980s, so did the technologi-
quarterly dividend. cal options to address it. That gave U.S.
Our carbon dividends solution President Ronald Reagan and contem-
doesn’t appeal just to businesses and poraries such as British Prime Minister
opinion leaders. When ordinary Ameri- Margaret Thatcher the confidence to
cans hear about this approach, they like negotiate a gradual but binding agree-
it, too. A recent survey by the research ment that would encourage the deploy-
firm Luntz Global found that 66 per- ment of a substitute class of chemicals.
cent of American voters would support The approach was unanimously ratified
the plan, as would an even larger share of by the U.S. Senate. Reagan called it a
voters under the age of 40 from both “monumental achievement.” At the time,
parties. The survey and research company some environmentalists criticized the
Morning Consult recently polled deal as too modest. But within just a few
Americans on all four pillars of the plan years, President George H. W. Bush was
separately and found that roughly two- able to further increase its ambition, again
thirds of voters support each one. And with broad bipartisan support.
both of the polls found that climate By contrast, 28 years of concerted
change is one of the rare national issues international efforts—starting in Rio de
on which Americans truly want a Janeiro in 1992—to negotiate an effec-
bipartisan solution. tive treaty to reduce global greenhouse
gas emissions have proved disappoint-
ing. In large part, this is due to the far
greater diplomatic challenge of con-
vincing the leading economies of the
world to alter their fundamental energy A podcast on
uses, with all the attendant geopolitical the impact of
big tech
and economic consequences.
The 1997 Kyoto Protocol was unsuc-
cessful, mostly because its binding
obligations applied only to developed on our
countries and not developing ones, such
democracy,
society and
as China and India; it was ultimately
rejected by the U.S. Senate. The 2015
economy.
Paris agreement fared better by getting
all parties to the same table. But its
voluntary pledge-and-review system
lacked an enforcement mechanism. In
2017, the United States decided to
withdraw from the agreement.
A new, more robust and realistic
diplomatic strategy is now needed to
address climate change. The United
States should use its dominant position
in the world economy, together with its
extensive network of international
alliances, to persuade other countries,
particularly China and India, to do
their fair share. The combination of a
domestic carbon fee and a carbon tariff
can be used to encourage Washington’s
closest trading partners to join a carbon
customs alliance. Such an alliance
would have a harmonized carbon price
among its members, paired with a
common trade policy applied to coun-
tries outside the alliance.
The United States’ natural partners Co-hosts Taylor Owen and David Skok sit down
with high-profile guests to have in-depth and
for an alliance of this sort are Canada, thought-provoking discussions about
the United Kingdom, and the EU, which technology’s impact on the world.
already have significant carbon-pricing
measures in place and have expressed a
clear interest in carbon tariffs. Each
may hesitate to go it alone in imposing cigionline.org/bt
its own individual carbon tariff due to
May/June 2020 37
the risk of igniting a trade war. But given to the world. As China emerges on the
the importance that U.S. allies now world stage, both China and the United
attach to climate change, there is good States would do well to focus on areas of
reason to believe that if the United States mutual benefit, even as both sides posi-
led the way, they would join. tion themselves for the future.
Together, the North American and The world faces a global challenge of
European economies make up nearly half uncertain and potentially enormous
of the world’s GDP, giving them consid- consequence that is within humanity’s
erable market influence over other innovative capability to solve. Yet not a
economies. That influence could grow single major power is implementing
even further if Japan, Mexico, South adequate solutions, because none has
Korea, and members of the Association found a viable political, economic, or
of Southeast Asian Nations joined the international formula. The carbon
alliance. The very threat of being dividends program we propose offers the
locked out of such a carbon customs best solution to resolve this impasse.
alliance might be enough to move the Domestically, it would enable environ-
largest emitters, including China and mentalists, businesses, and political
India, toward a similar regime. leaders to forge a lasting pact that leaves
An international climate alliance of the majority of American families
this size would do more than just shape economically better off. Internationally,
the rules of trade governing carbon- only a U.S.-led climate alliance can muster
intensive goods. It would also partly enough economic leverage to compel
determine which economies will domi- China, India, and other major economies
nate the energy industries of the future. to join, face carbon tariffs, or ultimately
Naturally, those economies inside the risk being shut out of the world’s
coalition would have the upper hand in largest market. The United States must
any international competition. It would lead the way.∂
be in China’s strategic interest to join,
rather than resist, a climate alliance
whose price of membership was harmo-
nizing its domestic carbon price with
that of its trading partners. China is
already experimenting with a domestic
carbon price, so this idea is hardly far-
fetched. Beijing, after all, would likely
understand that it would enjoy greater
energy security inside such an alliance
than it would outside it.
In the meantime, climate policy does
not need to become another source of
conflict between China and the United
States. In fact, the two great powers
could use the climate as a means of
cooperating to bring greater prosperity
seven million people, setting a new
A Foreign Policy
THE FIRE NEXT TIME

midyear high. The situation will only get
worse: in the next few decades, climate
for the Climate change threatens to cause shortages of
food and water, render coastlines that are
home to hundreds of millions of people
How American Leadership unsuitable for habitation, and unleash
Can Avert Catastrophe a stream of refugees that will dwarf the
flow during the recent European
John Podesta and Todd Stern migration crisis.
Tackling the climate emergency will
I
n September 2019, after a two-year require decisive action. In 2018, the UN’s
drought and some of the hottest days Intergovernmental Panel on Climate
on record, wildfires broke out across Change made it clear that to avoid
eastern Australia. The fires raged for significant risks to planetary health and
seven months and consumed 75,000 human well-being, the United States and
square miles. They displaced tens of other significant emitters must cut their
thousands of people and destroyed almost carbon emissions to “net zero” by 2050, a
3,000 homes. In Melbourne, the air daunting task, well beyond what most
quality was 30 percent worse than in thought necessary at the time of the 2015
famously toxic New Delhi. Researchers Paris agreement on climate change. Even
estimate that more than one billion if countries increase the amount of
animals died in the conflagration. And the carbon dioxide they can capture and
total economic damage is expected to sequester, they will still have to radically
exceed the previous $4.4 billion record set decarbonize their energy, transportation,
by the Black Saturday fires in 2009. and manufacturing systems in the next
The Australian fires were a particu- 30 years, while also transforming agricul-
larly harsh reminder of the effects of ture and arresting deforestation.
climate change, but they were hardly the The United States, in particular, will
only one to make the headlines recently. require both a full mobilization at home
Between 2010 and 2019, natural disasters and an unhesitating commitment to
cost the world approximately $2.98 leadership abroad. A president ready to
trillion, making the last decade the take on climate change must organize
costliest one on record. And in the first the government to meet this challenge
half of 2019, extreme weather displaced and work with Congress to enact a broad
program of investments and incentives
JOHN PODESTA is Founder and a Member of for the development and dissemination
the Board of Directors of the Center for
American Progress. He served as Chief of
of clean technology. Abroad, the United
Staff for U.S. President Bill Clinton and States must devise a climate-centered
Counselor to U.S. President Barack Obama, foreign policy that uses the country’s
overseeing climate and energy policy.
political capital and economic resources
TODD STERN is a Senior Fellow at the to drive the decarbonization of the global
Brookings Institution and served as Special
Envoy for Climate Change under U.S. economy. Several changes are needed—
President Barack Obama. starting at the White House and extend-
May/June 2020 39
ing to key bilateral relationships, interna- major threat assessments, but more
tional forums, and financial could be done to articulate the profound
institutions—to accelerate a global clean risks from climate change to U.S.
energy transformation and galvanize the interests abroad—risks that include
political will necessary to confront climate state failure, migration, and conflict.
change. The tools to spur clean techno- The United States should also
logical innovation, promote sustainable resume its historic leadership in climate
investment and job creation, and confront science and climate data collection. In
environmental injustices are within the past, it has made information from
political leaders’ grasp. Heads of state American satellites, sonars, and other
and government need only be willing remote-sensing technologies available
to employ them. to decision-makers around the world as
they planned for the impacts of climate
CHANGE BEGINS AT HOME change. But the priority given to
To reach net-zero emissions by 2050, climate science has withered under the
the United States’ executive branch will Trump administration.
have to undergo structural changes. The To achieve the country’s sustainabil-
next president should create a national ity goals, the United States should triple
climate council, overseen by an assistant its investment in climate science and data
to the president for climate policy. collection. And the country should once
Modeled after the National Security more give science pride of place in
Council and the National Economic decision-making, appoint scientists to key
Council, the National Climate Council advisory positions, and establish rigorous
would boast a specialized support staff scientific standards across agencies. New
capable of directing and delivering funds would also help the country quickly
quantifiable results across the federal rebuild the U.S. science workforce after
government. It would spearhead execu- losses during the Trump years, bringing
tive action and legislation and coordi- in new talent that can tackle the chal-
nate between actors at the state and lenges of the coming century.
local levels. And in conjunction with That said, officials need to be aware
top members of the National Security that a return by the United States to a
Council, the proposed council would position of leadership on climate change
develop and execute a diplomatic and would be greeted by some skepticism on
security strategy to propel rapid clean the part of the international community.
energy deployment, build resilience The other major players know that they
against climate-change-induced disas- need the United States, but they have
ters, and pressure reluctant actors to been burned twice: first when President
achieve the net-zero goal. What’s more, George W. Bush refused to sign the
the president should direct the Penta- Kyoto Protocol, in which only devel-
gon and the intelligence community to oped countries promised to reduce their
expand their treatment of the climate greenhouse gas emissions, and then
threat out to 2050 and beyond. To date, when President Donald Trump an-
both institutions have included useful nounced the United States’ withdrawal
comments on climate change in their from the Paris agreement. This under-
A Foreign Policy for the Climate
In the heat of the moment: fighting brush fires in Cathcart, Australia, January 2020
scores the pressing need, as the coun- contain climate change. The deal brings
try moves forward, for Republicans to countries together each year, urges
start joining Democrats in recognizing them to ramp up their action and build
the reality and urgency of climate resilience, takes stock of their progress
change so that Washington can move toward the 2015 goals, scrutinizes the
past the start-and-stop pattern of U.S. provision of financial assistance, and
climate engagement. A climate-centered provides a platform for joint engage-
foreign policy would go a long way ment. The agreement is also the
toward rebuilding trust. It would go symbolic embodiment of the world’s
even further if the United States, in commitment to combat climate change.
MAT T H EW AB B O T T / T H E N EW YO R K T I M ES / R E DU X
word and deed, chose to abandon gradu- Beyond rejoining, the United States
alism and embrace the net-zero goal; will need to prepare new emission targets
after all, if the country lacks the politi- that are both consistent with the net-zero
cal will to combat climate change at imperative and credible. In addition,
home, it will be unable to earn the bona the United States and its allies should
fides it needs to lead internationally. push all countries, especially the major
emitters, to submit their own strategies
THE PRODIGAL SON RETURNS for getting to net-zero emissions by
To convey its renewed commitment, the 2050, as called for in the Paris agreement.
United States should promptly an- The Paris agreement is not the only
nounce its intention to rejoin the Paris institution that the current administra-
agreement. The agreement is a crucial tion has been neglecting. In 2009, the
component of the global effort to United States launched the Major
May/June 2020 41
Economies Forum on Energy and vulnerable states from Africa and Asia,
Climate (MEF), a group of 17 economies most of whom are not big emitters. But
representing some 80 percent of global they are strong proponents of the
emissions that gathered at the ministe- net-zero goal and have the moral
rial level to facilitate the climate nego- standing to put salutary pressure on all
tiations. The next administration should the important players.
revive the MEF and recommend that its
members’ leaders meet every two years GREENBACKS FOR A GREEN EARTH
to review where the world’s largest Developing economies badly need
economies stand on climate change and investment in low-carbon energy sys-
what new forms of joint action they tems and in infrastructure that can
should undertake. (Government minis- withstand climate change. The United
ters should meet twice a year to prepare States, together with key allies in
for the meetings.) The focus of this new Europe and Asia, should bring together
MEF would be the challenge of global a coalition of international financial
decarbonization, and its first order of institutions, such as the World Bank and
business would be to secure agreement the International Monetary Fund, and
on the net-zero goal. The body could regional development banks—such as
also promote the development and the Asian Infrastructure Investment
dissemination of sustainable technology, Bank, which the United States should
become a venue for sharing policy ideas join—to encourage lending practices in
and best practices, and support the line with the net-zero goal and quickly
efforts of multinational businesses to set direct substantial investment toward
clean energy standards. Argentina, sustainable infrastructure and develop-
Saudi Arabia, and Turkey should be ment. In addition, the United States
invited to join in order to provide should build a coalition to press the major
additional representation for important coal-financing countries—China, Japan,
regions and so that the MEF and the and South Korea—to put a moratorium
G-20, which would then share the same on coal investments around the world,
membership, could coordinate the all the while ensuring that funds will be
timing of their meetings. available for clean alternatives.
The United States should also work Washington must also step up its own
with key European allies to reinvigorate climate assistance to poor countries. In
the High Ambition Coalition—which 2014, Obama pledged $3 billion over a
was the fiercest champion of bold four-year period to the new Green Cli-
mitigation measures at the Paris nego- mate Fund and secured $500 million from
tiations—so that the organization can Congress for each of the next two years.
advocate both within the Paris regime But the Trump administration cut this
and outside it for measures to achieve funding off. The next president should
net-zero emissions by 2050. The mem- prioritize getting the remaining $2 billion
bers of the High Ambition Coalition out the door and should follow the lead
include the United Kingdom and the of such countries as France, Germany,
EU, a group of progressive Latin Ameri- Norway, and the United Kingdom, which
can and Caribbean countries, and many doubled their 2014 pledges in 2019.
Your dream job
is a global
adventure away.
Global Leadership for the #1 master’s

Fourth Industrial Revolution. in management
Thunderbird School
Thunderbird’s top-ranked Masters of Global Management of Global Management
prepares leaders with the future-ready skills and hands-on – Times Higher Education and
experience that global organizations demand in this era of rapid The Wall Street Journal, 2019
technological transformation. Choose from 16 concentrations,
including Global Business, Global Digital Transformation,
#1 in the U.S.
Sustainability Solutions, Integrated Healthcare, and more.
Or, customize your own path to the top.
for innovation
ASU ahead of Stanford and MIT
– U.S. News & World Report,
Start today at thunderbird.asu.edu/mgm 5 years, 2016–2020
Of course, the existing money is not designed to push companies to disclose

yet being used properly. Huge amounts the risk that climate change poses to their
of funding are perversely protecting businesses so that markets can price that
fossil fuels at the very moment when risk. But its recommendations lack impact
the world needs to start breaking the because disclosures are voluntary. The
dirty habit. Direct subsidies amount to U.S. Securities and Exchange Commis-
well over $500 billion per year globally, sion and other financial regulators around
and total subsidies stood at over $5.2 the world should commit to adopting and
trillion in 2017. Washington should enforcing the TCFD’s protocols.
pressure other governments to elimi-
nate these subsidies, an effort Obama FRIENDS, NEW AND OLD
began in the G-20 in 2009. A climate-centered foreign policy would
The next president should also enact also shape the United States’ bilateral
carbon tariffs on imports from countries relations with both partners and rivals.
with inadequate climate policies. Such The United Kingdom and members of
“border adjustment mechanisms” were the EU have been leaders in the fight
part of the Waxman-Markey cap-and- against climate change for decades, and
trade bill, which was approved by the they would remain essential U.S. allies
House of Representatives in 2009 but in the pursuit of a net-zero world.
never voted on in the Senate. Ursula von Together with the United States, these
der Leyen, the president of the Euro- countries represent more than a third of
pean Commission, has called for carbon global GDP and an equal share of both
tariffs in the EU, as well. Washington China’s and India’s export markets. This
should embrace such tariffs and support kind of clout gives them the leverage to
other governments doing the same. influence Chinese and Indian climate
Additionally, the United States behavior. Other developed countries,
should push for an agreement to facili- such as Japan and New Zealand, have
tate trade in environmental goods— also been important U.S. partners in the
such as products that produce renewable past and would be again. Canada and
energy or improve energy efficiency— Mexico should also be close allies, both
an effort the World Trade Organization in driving strong climate action across
pursued during the Obama years but North America and in joining a global
never completed. And it should make coalition for low- or no-carbon economic
sure that all bilateral trade agreements transformation. The U.S. government
include environmental and labor stan- will need to collaborate with all these
dards as enforceable components. players on a number of fronts, including
The next administration should also synchronizing policy approaches to
capitalize on the work of the Task Force rapidly scale up the production and use
on Climate-Related Financial Disclo- of clean and efficient energy.
sures (TCFD), a body set up in 2015 by But the United States will also have
the Financial Stability Board, itself an to work with more challenging partners.
organ of the G-20, to help public and China, in particular, has such an enor-
private actors worldwide make informed mous carbon footprint (it accounts for
emission decisions. The task force is around 29 percent of global carbon
A Foreign Policy for the Climate
emissions) and so much influence in the The United States will also have to
developing world that there is no way deal with India, the third-largest
to reach global climate goals without it. emitter, behind only China and the
During the Obama years, both the U.S. United States. The country’s use of
and the Chinese governments recognized renewable energy is increasing impres-
the potential for climate change to serve sively; New Delhi has worked effec-
as a positive pillar of the two countries’ tively—with support from the U.S.
often fractious bilateral relationship. government and the private sector—to
This culminated in a joint announcement develop green buildings and electric
in 2014 in which both governments vehicles, yet the country is still forging
pledged to curb their emissions, with ahead with plans to build ten new major
China agreeing for the first time to stop coal installations. The United States
its total emissions from growing by 2030. should propose to Indian Prime Minis-
Today, the challenge is even greater, ter Narendra Modi a larger-scale, more
given the tensions with China over trade, dynamic clean energy partnership than
regional security, and human rights. But ever before, focused on policy as well as
not only must the United States con- technological research, development,
tinue to work with China on climate and dissemination.
change; it must also put progress toward Brazil will also need to be the target
a net-zero world in 2050 at the very of American climate diplomacy. Under
center of the relationship. There will be President Jair Bolsonaro, the country
plenty of U.S.-Chinese competition in has gone from being a constructive
the future, given the two countries’ player on climate change, substantially
diverging interests, but the setting of reducing deforestation in the Amazon
priorities matters. The harsh reality is that River basin, to a first-order threat.
if the United States and China don’t get Bolsonaro is implementing policies that
climate change right, the fallout from that risk tipping the region into an ecologi-
failure will dwarf most other issues, cal death spiral that could cause the
including those stemming from U.S. com- release of hundreds of billions of tons
petition with China. of carbon dioxide into the atmosphere,
Early on, the next president should wipe out ten percent of global biodiver-
organize a meeting with Chinese sity, and destroy a forest system that is
President Xi Jinping to collaborate on essential to regulating the entire re-
climate change. At the meeting, both gion’s rainfall. The next U.S. president
leaders should attempt to establish will need to work urgently with Latin
parameters regarding the scale and speed American allies—including progressive
of decarbonization globally and in their friends such as Chile, Colombia, and
two countries. No adequate progress is Peru—to urge Bolsonaro to abandon
possible if the United States and China the catastrophic course he is steering
are working from fundamentally for the Amazon basin. There is no road
different assumptions about what needs to global well-being without Brazil.
to be done and when; but if they could Some countries will inevitably resist
come to a genuine meeting of the minds, change because they have so much at
it would move the world. stake in the global fossil fuel economy.
May/June 2020 45
The United States itself, on the strength to mention the United States’ enormous
of the fracking revolution, has become carbon footprint—make the country an
the largest oil and gas producer in the indispensable player in such discussions
world, so it, too, must plan for the and actions. Pull the United States out
decline of the fossil fuel sector with the of the equation, and the energy and
rise of clean energy. But the United focus dedicated to fighting climate
States has the advantage of a fully change dwindles from Beijing to New
diversified economy, whereas many Delhi to Brasília. In spite of the recent
fossil fuel producers do not. There is no lull, however, the United States’ policy
easy answer here, but Washington will toward climate change could be rapidly
need to work closely with its allies to transformed, especially with a new
help producing countries find a path president in the White House. We have
forward consistent with the necessary sketched out what the changes could
emission reductions. look like if climate were made the
Finally, climate change will prompt a central organizing principle of U.S.
large-scale movement of people that foreign policy. The public, for its part,
will threaten stability and democratic is increasingly eager to be led, as are
politics. Indeed, the migration crises in large swaths of the business community.
Europe and on the U.S.-Mexican The international community will
border will likely seem minor compared doubtless remain a bit wary of the sharp
with the global exoduses prompted by turns that U.S. politics can produce, but
rising temperatures. As severe climate other countries are hungry for the
change displaces more people, the United States to lead again. A new
international community will be forced president who sees the climate threat
to either change the legal definition of for what it is could make a game-
refugees to include climate migrants or changing difference. It is late in the
create a new category altogether. (The day, but not yet too late.∂
current definition is focused on political
persecution rather than environmental
degradation.) The United States’
ambassador to the UN should take up
this cause in the Security Council, and
the United States should collaborate
with its partners in the worst-affected
regions to explore the best ways to
support internal refugees and outline
the legal rights of those fleeing climate
change, along with practical plans for
helping them.
The United States’ relative absence
from climate mitigation and adaptation
efforts under the Trump administration
has been highly problematic. U.S.
resources, influence, and expertise—not
But the private sector has begun to
The Unlikely
THE FIRE NEXT TIME

step in to fill the vacuum. In January,
Larry Fink, the CEO of BlackRock, the
Environmentalists largest asset manager in the world,
declared that “climate risk is investment
risk” and announced that going forward
How the Private Sector Can BlackRock would ask every firm in its
Combat Climate Change portfolio to disclose its carbon emis-
sions. BlackRock has roughly $7 trillion
Rebecca Henderson under management and is one of the
largest shareholders in nearly every
publicly traded firm in the world. So
T
here’s a reason climate change is companies around the world paid
often described as a “wicked attention when Fink went on to say that
problem.” Fully decarbonizing BlackRock would consider voting against
the economy will require not only com- boards whose firms “do not make suffi-
pletely transforming the global energy cient progress” in addressing climate-
infrastructure, at a cost of many trillions related risks and would cease to invest
of dollars, but also retrofitting all of the altogether in some fossil fuel projects.
world’s buildings, remaking the planet’s Fink is not alone. Many of the
agricultural practices, and revolutionizing world’s largest asset owners are coming
transportation systems. It is difficult to to the conclusion that climate change is
see how this can be accomplished without the most important risk to the long-
some kind of global carbon tax or regula- term health of their portfolios. More
tory regime. But putting such a system in than a third of global invested capital—
place is proving to be enormously diffi- about $19 trillion—is controlled by the
cult. The 2015 Paris agreement on world’s 100 largest asset owners. Nearly
climate change was a good first step, but two-thirds of this money is in pension
many countries show little sign of funds; the remaining third is in sover-
meeting the commitments they made as eign wealth funds. These funds are now
part of that agreement, and the United so large that they are sometimes re-
States’ withdrawal from the process has ferred to as “universal owners” or “uni-
presented a significant barrier to further versal investors” since, in effect, they
progress. Given the slowing global hold the entire market. For that reason,
economy and the slide toward populism they cannot diversify away from the risk
and nationalism in much of the world, of climate change—a risk that Mark
the prospects for any kind of compre- Carney, who until earlier this year was
hensive global accord seem increasingly the governor of the Bank of England,
remote. So far, at least, the public sector suggested could result in an abrupt
is failing to confront the problem. financial collapse, potentially wiping out
as much as $20 trillion of assets. To avert
REBECCA HENDERSON is John and Natty that kind of calamity, major asset owners
McArthur University Professor at Harvard
University and the author of Reimagining are starting to push the companies in
Capitalism in a World on Fire. their portfolios to address climate change.
May/June 2020 47
Rebecca Henderson
This trend is not driven by altruism who collectively control nearly half of
or a deep commitment to the environ- the world’s invested capital. The group
ment: it’s a function of economic was founded in 2017 with the goal of
interests. For the world’s largest asset persuading the world’s 100 largest
owners, climate change is not an exter- private-sector carbon emitters to “cut
nality—it is a profound threat to their the financial risk associated with
long-term returns. It will, after all, be catastrophe” by putting in place board-
significantly harder to make money in a level processes to assess their climate-
world where most of the major ports related risks and oversee plans for
are underwater, harvests are failing on a dealing with them, pledging to clearly
routine basis, and hundreds of millions disclose those risks, and taking action
of people are on the move. to reduce greenhouse gas emissions
As more and more major asset across their value chains rapidly
owners come to this realization, it is enough to help meet the Paris agree-
creating increasingly strong incentives ment’s goal of limiting the increase in
for them to cooperate with one another the global average temperature to well
in support of large-scale decarboniza- below two degrees Celsius.
tion. Together, they are pressing the In December 2018, a group of
firms in their portfolios to set concrete investors belonging to Climate Action
targets for emission reductions and to 100+ published a letter in the Financial
make progress toward meeting those Times listing some specific steps they
targets, potentially solving the problem were demanding of companies in which
posed by firms’ unwillingness to cut they invest, including “the rapid elimi-
their emissions unless they can be nation of coal use by utilities in EU and
assured that their competitors will OECD [Organization for Economic
follow suit. Someone, however, will Cooperation and Development] coun-
need to monitor that progress and tries by no later than 2030.” Six months
sanction firms that lag behind—a role later, investors from the consortium
that would be best filled by government pushed the oil giant Shell to announce
regulators. The need for such public- short-term targets for limiting its
sector involvement will likely increase greenhouse gas emissions and persuaded
private-sector support for the policy BP to support a shareholder resolution
changes required to drastically reduce that binds the oil company to disclose
carbon emissions. In this way, private- the carbon intensity of its products, the
sector pressure may serve as the force methodology it uses to consider the
that finally breaks the political logjam climate impact of new investments, and
that has long blocked the public action its plans for setting and measuring
needed to solve the climate crisis. emission targets. More than half of the
40 oil and gas companies with which
MONEY TALKS the group has engaged have set long-
One of the most promising examples of term quantitative targets for reducing
what this might look like in practice is their emissions. And the group has
Climate Action 100+, a nonprofit helped persuade the shipping giant
affiliation of more than 300 investors Maersk and two of the world’s largest
The Unlikely Environmentalists
mining companies, ArcelorMittal and RISKY BUSINESS

Thyssenkrupp, to commit to becoming But embracing the innovation that is
carbon neutral by 2050. required to exploit new opportunities is
These kinds of commitments are often risky and expensive. The venture
sometimes dismissed as mere greenwash- capital industry lost at least $10 billion
ing: public relations stunts designed to between 2005 and 2011 investing in
buy time. And sometimes they are. But clean energy technology. An electric
they might also help catalyze an eco- utility that commits to phasing out coal
nomic transformation that could play a plants might reap the benefits of
major role in arresting climate change. declining solar and wind energy costs,
Of course, large asset holders are but it could also misjudge the market
not the only players who shape a and significantly increase its costs. An
company’s incentives: employees and automobile company that invests in
consumers do, as well, and they are developing electric vehicles might leap
increasingly insisting that firms go ahead of its competitors, but it could also
green—and rewarding them when risk losing out to more cautious rivals.
they do. For example, after the con- Universal investors can help miti-
sumer goods giant Unilever announced gate those risks by funneling capital to
that it planned to cut its carbon foot- firms that are willing to make the first
print in half and double its revenue at move. This can be transformational in
the same time—and then followed itself, since companies that decide to
through by transforming its opera- embrace new opportunities can often
tions, brand by brand—the firm joined persuade an entire industry to follow
Facebook, Google, and Microsoft on them. Walmart’s massive investments
LinkedIn’s list of the ten most desir- in energy saving and waste reduction,
able employers in the world. Sales of for example, have helped persuade
Unilever’s “sustainable living” many other companies to take similar
brands—which include Ben & Jerry’s, steps. Since 2010, the price of battery
Dove, and Vaseline and which Unilever storage has fallen by at least 73 percent,
claims “contribute to achieving the a change driven largely by the electric
company’s ambition of halving its vehicle company Tesla’s significant
environmental footprint”—are grow- investments in the technology, which
ing 69 percent faster than the rest of spurred the company’s competitors to
the business and providing 75 percent invest more than $90 billion in the
of the company’s growth. development of electric vehicles.
Shifting public attitudes about climate Major asset holders can also push
change and public policies intended to companies to commit to aggressive
combat it have also created clear business targets for decarbonizing their business
opportunities. Solar and wind energy models and insist that they report on
are both multibillion-dollar businesses. their progress. In this way, universal
The market for plant-based alternatives investors may be able to force every firm
to meat is exploding. And global recy- in an industry to act, solving the collec-
cling could generate close to $400 billion tive action problem inherent in tackling
in the next five years. climate change. Firms don’t naturally
May/June 2020 49
Rebecca Henderson
act collectively—for all kinds of reasons, they are often unstable and difficult to
including antitrust law. But when there enforce, since no mechanism exists
exists a clear business case for doing so through which to punish firms that drag
and cooperation can be credibly en- their feet or refuse to conform. Here,
forced, voluntary cooperation can be an universal investors might be able to
effective means of creating or preserving make a significant difference by acting
public goods. Nearly half of the world’s as enforcers. If BlackRock, for example,
inshore fisheries are managed through follows through on its threat to vote
some form of cooperative agreement. against the boards of companies that do
Most of the rules governing international not adequately disclose their climate
trade are designed and enforced by the emissions, every major firm in every
International Chamber of Commerce, a industry will be forced to report—in an
voluntary association founded in 1919. auditable, replicable way—the degree to
Some of the world’s largest firms are which it is meeting its commitments. And
increasingly exploring whether these if the world’s major investors then vote
kinds of voluntary agreements might be against the boards of those companies that
an effective way to reduce emissions. are falling behind, investors could catalyze
For example, after Unilever came under the transformation of entire industries.
pressure from activists to stop using
palm oil, the cultivation of which THE EARTH LOBBY
contributes to deforestation, Paul Polman, Arresting climate change will still require
who was then the company’s CEO, was government action, of course, and the
able to persuade many of his fellow changes afoot in finance and the corpo-
consumer goods CEOs that continuing to rate world could ease the path. As firms
purchase conventionally produced palm commit to reducing their carbon
oil presented a significant threat to their emissions, they are increasingly recog-
own brands. Partly as a result, more nizing that the most effective way to
than 60 percent of the world’s traded ensure that they are not undercut by
palm oil is now covered by sustainability lagging companies is to press for regula-
commitments. Similar agreements with tion. Together, they are creating a
respect to soy and beef have greatly constituency for effective climate policy.
slowed rates of deforestation in the In 2017, for example, when U.S.
Amazon River basin. And companies in President Donald Trump declared that
industries as diverse as airlines, food, he was going to withdraw the United
retail, apparel, travel, hospitality, construc- States from the Paris agreement, the
tion, health care, and high technology CEOs of more than 50 U.S. companies,
have begun to coordinate to reduce including Apple, Gap, Google, HP, and
carbon emissions across supply chains, Levi Strauss, published an open letter
so that no single firm is placed at a urging him to rethink the decision.
disadvantage by going green. When Trump stuck to his plan, Elon
Such arrangements produce a wealth Musk, the CEO of Tesla, and Bob Iger,
of knowledge about what effective then the CEO of Disney, resigned from
decarbonization might look like on the some of the president’s advisory coun-
ground. As one might expect, however, cils in protest. More than 2,000 compa-
The Unlikely Environmentalists
Green is good: Fink, center, with French President Emmanuel Macron, right, in Paris, July 2019
nies have joined a collaborative effort economics in the power sector—would
called “We Are Still In,” a group work- reduce emissions 19 percent below 2005
ing to ensure that the United States levels by 2025 and 25 percent below
meets its commitments under the agree- 2005 levels by 2030.” This would be a
ment despite the administration’s significant step toward the approxi-
withdrawal. The group includes not only mately 50 percent reduction in emissions
businesses but also states, cities, reli- that the UN’s Intergovernmental Panel
gious organizations, and universities. on Climate Change estimates is neces-
Together, they represent 68 percent of sary to avoid the most dangerous potential
U.S. GDP, 65 percent of the U.S. outcomes of climate change.
population, and the source of more than These efforts and others like them
half of all U.S. carbon emissions. Such also have the potential to change the
action independent of the federal govern- nature of the political conversation around
ment could make a big difference. climate change. In an increasingly parti-
According to America’s Pledge, a non- san world, firms occupy a unique position.
MICH EL EULER / AP
governmental organization that tracks According to the 2019 Edelman Trust

local progress toward emission reductions, Barometer, an annual survey measuring
the “full achievement of already on- credibility and trust, business is now the
the-books policies from state and local world’s most trusted institution, and 71
actors—paired with rapidly shifting percent of employees around the world
May/June 2020 51
Rebecca Henderson
agree that “it is critically important” for reinforcing reforms, transforming the
the CEOs of their companies “to re- economics of individual industries and
spond to challenging times.” A broad- creating a significant constituency for
based movement among the world’s political action. For decades, when it
biggest companies to tackle climate change came to addressing climate change,
could help legitimate the idea that large asset holders and big companies
climate change is a real danger, that acting acted more as obstacles than as cata-
to avert it could be a major driver of lysts. Those days may soon be over.∂
innovation and economic growth, and
that appropriate public policy could be
enormously helpful.
Such a movement could also put
increasing pressure on companies that
resist decarbonizing. One of the reasons
that climate regulation has stalled in the
United States is that a small minority
of firms have invested billions of dollars
in actively lobbying against it. If their
peers start to push for regulation and
highlight the dangers inherent in
continuing with business as usual, those
laggards will be compelled to change
their behavior. One day soon, flooding
the political process with money to
defend the burning of fossil fuels could
be seen as an unacceptable reputational
risk—or even as morally indefensible.
For many years, experts have as-
sumed that the fastest and most effi-
cient route to global decarbonization is
coordinated state action. But as the
world’s political institutions have come
under pressure, such action has become
increasingly elusive. Against this
background, the growing understanding
that climate change presents a profound
threat to the long-term returns of the
world’s largest asset owners provides
some reason for hope. As investors push
for change and the realization dawns in
more and more boardrooms that the
benefits of climate action will outweigh
the costs, it is possible that leading-
edge firms could trigger a cascade of
Everyone has different views.
Unite them.
Online M.A. in International Relations

Online M.A. in Diplomacy
Our nation is more connected than ever, but we’re still divided, struggling to
understand our differences and find commonalities. You can change that by
recognizing everyone’s unique traits and uniting them.
Help fill the world with active listeners who can find common ground, and build
long-lasting, valuable relationships around it. Norwich University’s Online
Master of Arts in International Relations and Master of Arts in Diplomacy
programs can expand your global perspective and your global impact.
Serving national interests since 1819

graduate.norwich.edu/NorwichFA
Norwich is an equal opportunity employer.
Reducing emissions is just half the
Building a battle: the other is adjusting to a
THE FIRE NEXT TIME
world already made vastly more hostile

Resilient Planet and inhospitable by climate change
and building up resilience to inevitable
further changes down the line.
How to Adapt to The good news is that when it comes
Climate Change From to adaptation and resilience, individual
the Bottom Up communities and cities across the
world can take the lead on their own,
irrespective of progress or gridlock at
Kathy Baughman McLeod the national and international levels.
Interventions can be small and simple—
sometimes as basic as painting roof-
T
he conventional wisdom holds tops white, for example, to reduce the
that climate change is a heat they absorb. The low cost and ease
problem for international of these measures belie their potential
organizations, big governments, and for making life safer and more bearable
global corporations to solve. Only in an era of climate disaster. In many
those major players can make a dent in cases, adaptation is not even a matter of
global greenhouse gas emissions, the improving infrastructure through
thinking goes, and only they can pool expensive protective measures. Instead,
the necessary resources. Given the it consists of maintaining the natural
monumental scale of the coming environment—the forests, coral reefs,
climate crisis, anything short of such and coastal wetlands that provide just as
high-level mobilization seems inconse- much protection against disaster as
quential, even futile. manmade measures do. Recognizing these
It is true that nothing short of a natural features for the assets they are
massive, globally coordinated push can and insuring them against future damage
reduce emissions enough to slow down offers a sure path to climate resilience,
climate change in the decades ahead. even as the larger fight against the drivers
That is why international organizations, of climate change continues unabated.
national governments, and companies
are spending some 95 percent of their COMMON CRISES
climate-related investment on carbon That climate change is already affecting
emission reductions. But those efforts lives in the present is hardly a secret,
will serve to prevent only the worst- but few appreciate the magnitude of its
case scenarios. The fact is that climate impact, even as climate-related disasters
change has already done a great deal of play out all over the world. Just in the
damage and that more harmful effects past year, swarms of locusts the size of
will be impossible to avert altogether. whole cities descended on Ethiopia,
powerful bush fires ravaged Australia,
KATHY BAUGHMAN M C LEOD is Director of
the Adrienne Arsht–Rockefeller Foundation and massive floods inundated Indone-
Resilience Center at the Atlantic Council. sia. Meanwhile, the West Antarctic Ice
Building a Resilient Planet
Sheet—which contains enough ice to hot days, according to a study published

raise sea levels by up to ten feet were it in the journal Nature Geoscience. Los
all to melt—is continuing its slow- Angeles already has a program in place to
motion collapse. And each day, tens of paint asphalt road surfaces a light gray,
thousands of people flee from natural and the Australian city of Melbourne is
disasters or wars, many of which have giving loans to locals who retrofit com-
been exacerbated by the impacts of mercial buildings for increased efficiency,
climate change. Even those who have including by painting their rooftops white.
not yet seen a hurricane or a fire sweep The hotter it gets, the better the
through their neighborhood have been white-roof solution works. In Brazil and
affected, albeit in subtler ways. Rising India and on the Arabian Peninsula,
temperatures, droughts, and floods have more reflective surfaces in cities could
disrupted their food supply chains; the lower average daytime temperatures by
quality of the air they breathe is declin- a live-saving four or five degrees
ing; and infectious and mosquito-borne Celsius during heat waves. A study by
diseases are spreading faster. the National Center for Atmospheric
These crises are unfolding today, and Research, in Boulder, Colorado, found
each calls for an immediate response, that if cities around the world added
even as the international community and lighter surface colors to 90 percent of
individual governments work on the their roofs, they could help reduce the
longer-term project of cutting emissions. rise in temperatures caused by urban
Fortunately, most of the adjustments heat islands around one-third.
needed to lessen their impact are not Rooftop gardens offer a related
difficult. Many adaptations do not require solution, particularly for cities in the
new technology. Nor do they have to pass developing world. In the summer of 2019,
through the political minefield of temperatures in the Indian megacity of
international climate action. Instead, Chennai topped 50 degrees Celsius, or
many simply require citizens to take the 122 degrees Fahrenheit, just as the city’s
initiative in their local communities. water reservoirs began to run dry, ex-
Some solutions are as easy as painting hausted after two years of below-average
rooftops white. The building materials rainfall. Temperatures in the city are
used in dense cities often trap heat (a expected to keep rising in the years
phenomenon known as “the urban heat ahead, as is the risk of drought, meaning
island effect”). The resulting extreme that last year’s conditions will be the
temperatures are a silent killer, often new normal. Rooftop gardens could
taking the lives of those already vulner- offer some reprieve: gardens can absorb
able, especially among the elderly. as much as 75 percent of the rainfall
Lowering the temperature by just a little they receive, and certain rooftop garden
can save lives. If most surfaces in cities— designs store drainage water, which can
especially rooftops, but roads and later be used to water the plants.
sidewalks, too—were a lighter shade and Green roofs absorb heat in the summer
therefore reflected more light, local and add insulation in the winter. For
average daytime temperatures could drop the residents below, they also provide
by up to two or three degrees Celsius on fresh and nutritious food and, in many
May/June 2020 55
cases, a source of income. Urban gardens Located in the Caribbean, the reef
already dot the city of Quito, Ecuador, stretches over 600 miles, making it
which launched an urban agriculture second in size only to Australia’s Great
program in 2002. Thousands of garden- Barrier Reef. For nearby shorelines,
ers—the majority of them women, from southeastern Mexico down to
some with only an elementary school Belize, Guatemala, and Honduras, the
education—now help support their reef acts as a massive natural barrier
families by growing and selling all-organic against storms and flooding. A healthy
produce. The gardens are an economic coral reef can absorb 97 percent of a
lifeline—and they help cool the city wave’s energy before it hits the shore, a
and clean its air. performance on par with, and often
better than, expensive manmade barri-
WHAT CANCÚN CAN TEACH US ers, such as breakwaters and seawalls. In
Resilience will look different depending the tourism-heavy coastal towns of the
on the local context. Some cities may state of Quintana Roo, in Mexico, home
lack the resources or the climatic condi- to the city of Cancún, the reef slows
tions necessary for easy bottom-up fixes. beach erosion and protects homes and
But most could avail themselves of one hotels from hurricanes.
solution that most conversations about Our modeling allowed us to quantify
climate change have overlooked: insurance. the value of that protection: when the
Insuring physical infrastructure— reef is intact, Quintana Roo avoids
homes, businesses, and so forth—against annual losses of some $1.8 million. In
damages caused by climate change is now recent years, however, the reef has come
common practice. The idea is to protect under threat from climate change,
human achievements and physical tourism, overfishing, and pollution.
property against the ravages of nature. But Among the consequences of a warming
that approach obscures nature’s own earth are fiercer storms and stronger
protective role. In many places around the waves, which slam into the reef too
world, the primary barrier against often and too powerfully for it to
sudden natural disasters and grinding recover, gradually exhausting its ability
environmental degradation is nature to protect the shoreline. As a result, the
itself: coral reefs, wetlands, forests, reef now requires human help after each
freshwater reservoirs, and rivers can all major storm to keep functioning.
serve that role. Insuring these natural Specially trained teams of locals, the
assets, in addition to the manmade Brigadores, remove debris, collect
infrastructure they protect, is a far more broken corals and reattach them to the
efficient way to ensure that communities reef, and add manmade support struc-
battered by climate change can cope. tures to help speed the reef’s recovery.
Beginning in 2015, I worked with a To safeguard the reef and its protec-
team of coral reef scientists and coastal tive value and fund the work of the
resilience experts from the Nature Con- Brigadores, we collaborated with the
servancy to design what would become state government, marine scientists, a
the first-ever insurance policy on a hotel owners’ association, and the global
natural asset, the Mesoamerican Reef. reinsurer Swiss Re. The result was a
Cool it: a heat-reduction pavement project in Los Angeles, California, June 2019
trust fund used to buy an insurance financial terms, as assets worth insuring.
policy for the reef. If a certain trigger The cost of doing so would be higher
point is reached in the designated than doing nothing and escaping disaster,
area—such as a certain wind speed or but vastly lower than being unprepared
J O N D U E D E / C I T Y O F L O S A N G E L E S B U R EAU O F S T R E E T S E RV I C E S
storm category—the policy quickly pays when disaster hits—and given current
out funds for a rapid response, so that predictions on climate change, it will hit.
the reef system can continue protecting Even if insurance companies stop
the vulnerable communities and econo- short of insuring actual natural features,
mies that depend on it. they can incentivize those who buy
The world is filled with ecosystems their policies to maintain those assets.
that perform a similar role. Wetlands, The approach is tried and tested: it
urban forests, rivers, and lagoons are, like transformed cities around the world in
reefs, habitats that provide shelter and the late nineteenth and early twentieth
protection to a myriad of species, includ- centuries. At the time, most urban
ing humans. These natural resources can environments were massive fire hazards,
break the waves of a storm, clean contami- built mostly of wood, with little
nated water, and cool a city. They also thought to safety precautions. Fires
capture and store carbon, helping slow raged through some of the world’s most
the rate of climate change. Since they iconic cities: Chicago in 1871; Boston in
provide tangible benefits to people and 1872; San Francisco in 1906, after an
the economy, they can be viewed, in earthquake; and Tokyo in 1923, also
May/June 2020 57
after a major quake. When it was time factoring the role of natural assets, such
to rebuild, insurers were unwilling to as coastal wetlands, into its risk model-
take the same risks again and demanded ing. As the damage from climate-related
that cities upgrade their safety measures disasters mounts, more and more
and infrastructure to qualify for cover- insurers might demand that buyers
age. In response, cities started installing maintain the natural assets in their
fire hydrants and fire stations, building midst to qualify for coverage and
houses with fire escapes, and mandating preferential premiums.
that homes and offices feature fire Perhaps the greatest advantage of
alarms. Building codes became much insurance schemes is their potential for
more stringent (in many places, regula- protecting natural assets before disaster
tors banned wood), and the number of hits and not afterward, when most of
major fires and fire-related deaths those assets’ value is lost. For many
decreased dramatically. years, agricultural insurance has com-
Today, insurance companies could monly defined specific levels of damage
replicate that success by accounting for needed to trigger a policy. In a
nature’s protective benefits in their drought, for instance, the number of
coverage decisions. Risk Management dead livestock or the amount of a failed
Solutions, a leading risk modeler and crop must cross a certain threshold for
adviser to banks and insurance compa- payments to kick in. But when some
nies worldwide, has already begun amount of damage can be anticipated
PROFESSIONAL
DEVELOPMENT
IN RUSSIA
Since 2004, the Alfa Fellowship Program has provided over 200 emerging leaders from
the U.S., U.K., and Germany with the opportunity to gain professional experience in
business, media, law, policy, and other related areas through an 11-month, fully-funded
fellowship in Moscow.
Through the program, fellows:

• Work at prominent organizations in Moscow
• Learn about current affairs through meetings, seminars, and regional travel
• Build Russian language skills
Program benefits: monthly stipend, program-related travel costs, housing, insurance
Eligibility: relevant professional experience, evidence of leadership potential,
commitment to the region, outstanding academic achievement
Deadline to apply for the 2021-2022 program year: November 15, 2020
Additional details can be found at: culturalvistas.org/alfa
For more information, please contact: [email protected] or +1 212 497 3510
OJSC Alfa-Bank is incorporated, focused and based in Russia, and is not affiliated with U.S.-based Alfa Insurance.
in advance, as is the case in slow-moving member countries and has paid out
catastrophes such as droughts, there is $152 million since its inception in 2007.
no reason why insurers and farmers In recent years, states in Africa, the
should need to wait until the last Pacific, and Southeast Asia have followed
moment. In Kenya, a consortium of suit and started risk pools of their own.
insurers backed by the global reinsur- These arrangements could provide more
ance industry offers insurance to farm- than a safety net in the aftermath of a
ers vulnerable to drought and uses crisis—in theory, much like the Kenyan
satellite technology to measure the farmers’ insurance, they could make
vegetation available to livestock. When money available before a disaster, allowing
the system determines that the health of countries to take valuable precautionary
the vegetation has dropped below a hardening measures.
certain threshold, the farmers automati- None of these steps—from white
cally receive payments to their cell phones, rooftops to insurance for nature’s protec-
which they can use for feed, medicines, tive capital—can replace drastic emission
and water. This approach allows farmers to cuts. They can, however, reduce the
save their animals, avoid major financial impact of the damage already done and
and emotional loss, and sustain their protect communities in a world indel-
livelihoods. Since October 2019, the ibly marked by climate change. Perhaps
program has covered farmers’ “almost more important still, they can help
losses” with more than $7 million in dispel a sense of powerlessness particu-
payouts to 32,000 individuals. Similar lar to the era of slow-moving climate
programs could help cattle farmers in catastrophe—a feeling so widespread it
drought-prone countries and regions has its own name: “climate grief.” Local
across Africa and the Middle East and in steps toward climate adaptation, along
parts of northern and southwestern China. with higher-level financial protections
In some cases, insurance can make and resilience, can counter that despon-
entire countries less vulnerable to dency with proven and durable solu-
climate catastrophe. Natural disasters tions—and might, in the process, even
can seriously set back a country’s create the momentum for more unified
economy. To avoid being overwhelmed, and inspired global action.∂
some countries already pool their
climate-related risks—such as high
exposure to floods or hurricanes—allow-
ing them to receive more affordable
insurance coverage than they otherwise
would have. After the Bahamas was hit
by Hurricane Dorian in 2019, the very
first money it received to deal with the
destruction came from one such regional
risk pool, which serves 22 countries in
the Caribbean and Central America
with catastrophe insurance. The pool
provides $1 billion in risk coverage for
May/June 2020 59
are not very resilient to the changing
The Climate Debt climate. Sheep follow. Goats are much
THE FIRE NEXT TIME
hardier, which is why I keep some in my

flock back home. When they start
What the West Owes the Rest dying, you know it’s a serious drought.
But camels are so tough and so capable
Mohamed Adow of enduring through droughts that
their dead bodies are signs of a real
G
rowing up in a pastoral commu- disaster, of a terrible tragedy unfolding
nity in northern Kenya gave in the surrounding communities.
me a certain clarity about the The over five million pastoralists who
climate crisis, a clarity born not from live in northern Kenya face an increas-
abstract understandings but from visceral ingly desperate situation. The way of life
experience. In 2000, a drought killed that has supported them for centuries—
much of my father’s cattle herd and herding animals in the rangelands—
destroyed our neighbors’ livelihoods. I could soon evaporate thanks to climate
helped distribute parcels of food to change. Consecutive droughts in recent
starving people knowing that the supplies years have devastated livestock popula-
might keep them alive only until the next tions, forcing hundreds of thousands of
inevitable dry spell. In northern Kenya, herders to give up their traditional
droughts used to occur once every ten lifestyles and move, as unskilled workers,
years. But in the last few decades, their to sprawling towns. They are not alone.
frequency and severity have increased Climate change has imperiled or dis-
thanks to climate change. Droughts now rupted the lives of millions of people in
occur once every two to three years, and developing countries around the world.
they will likely become even more Herders in Kenya, farmers in Bang-
frequent, threatening nomadic pastoral- ladesh, and fishermen in the Mekong
ism as a viable way of life. River basin are not responsible for this
It was devastating to see herds built crisis; the rich countries are. Not only
over many years wiped out in one season. do those nations emit more carbon into
My neighbors had nurtured and cared for the atmosphere per capita than poor
these animals. They were vital for my countries do, but also their very wealth
community’s livelihood and prosperity— and stature rest on a century of emis-
and its future. Like many people in my sions and environmental degradation.
community, I don’t have a conventional And yet it is people in the developing
pension plan of stocks and shares; I have world who disproportionately suffer.
some goats and camels. When I have the For them, climate change is not a
resources, I add a camel to the flock. theoretical matter but the difference
It always breaks my heart to see the between having dinner or going hungry,
bodies of dead camels during a drought. having a home, however ramshackle, or
Cows are normally the first to go—they not having a roof over their heads at all.
BRIAN CRONIN
In Western capitals, meanwhile,

MOHAMED ADOW is Founder and Director of
Power Shift Africa, a think tank based in well-meaning officials are beginning to
Nairobi, Kenya. share the sense of urgency, holding
The Climate Debt
May/June 2020 61
Mohamed Adow
increasingly frequent summits and buffeted by typhoons that scientists

speaking of a “climate emergency.” But have attributed to the warming of the
none of this has translated into mean- Indian Ocean), or 35 Bangladeshis
ingful change: greenhouse gas emissions,(who are threatened by both rising sea
temperatures, and sea levels continue tolevels and increasingly erratic rain).
rise. Moreover, wealthy countries have That may be the starkest contrast, but
struggled to reckon with the fundamen- in emissions of greenhouse gases
tal injustice of climate change, the fact
by country, there remains a wide gulf
that those least responsible for its cause
between rich and poor.
now bear the brunt of its consequences. According to the latest UN statistics,
The most straightforward way that which date from 2017, the United States
developed nations can address that alone emits over 5.3 billion metric tons
inequity is through financial transfers of carbon dioxide per year—that’s 16.2
and technological support to developing metric tons per person. The European
nations. As part of negotiations under Union emits over 3.6 billion metric
the aegis of the UN Framework Conven- tons, around seven metric tons per person.
tion on Climate Change (UNFCCC), By contrast, the per capita emissions of
wealthy countries have agreed in prin- all lower- and middle-income countries
ciple to provide $100 billion a year by combined (including large, rapidly
2020 to assist their poor counterparts— developing ones, such as Brazil, China,
hardly enough to help developing nationsIndia, Nigeria, and South Africa) are
adjust to the effects of climate change,only 3.5 metric tons per year. Drilling
receive compensation for loss and damagedown further reveals even wider chasms.
as a result of extreme weather, and Although China has become the big-
transition to low-carbon economies. Evengest emitter in the world in absolute
that funding has not fully materialized,terms—at over ten billion metric tons—
and its lack of implementation suggests a
its per capita rate of 7.4 metric tons is still
continuing imbalance between the rich less than half the U.S. rate. India emits
and the rest. Rich countries are far more
2.3 billion metric tons a year—a sub-
interested in forcing poor countries to cut
stantial sum—but its per capita rate is
their own emissions than they are in only 1.7 metric tons. Beyond the Asian
helping protect them from the ravages ofgiants, the rest of the developing world
climate change. The economies of devel- emits even less. The one billion people
oping countries must indeed cut emissions
of sub-Saharan Africa, for instance,
and transition to low-carbon sources of emit around 823 million metric tons of
energy. But while that process plays out,
carbon dioxide per year, a per capita
many in the developing world will remainrate of 0.8 metric tons, about one-20th
vulnerable to a crisis they did not make.
that of the United States.
But these figures reflect merely one
A COMPOUNDING DEBT year of emissions. For well over a
The average American is responsible for century, countries in Europe and North
the emission of as much carbon dioxide America—as well as the likes of Australia
per year as are 581 Burundians, 51 and Japan—have been pumping carbon
Mozambicans (who last year were into the atmosphere. The former NASA
The Climate Debt
scientist James Hansen has estimated and 2000, emissions from poorer countries
that those countries were responsible caused $740 billion worth of damage to
for 77 percent of all carbon emissions wealthier countries, whereas emissions
between 1751 and 2006. The United from richer countries caused $2.3
States alone produced 28 percent of trillion worth of damage to poorer ones.
carbon dioxide emissions in that period. Beyond the direct economic damage,
Other estimates reveal similar dispari- climate change disproportionately slows
ties: according to the German database economic growth in poorer countries,
PRIMAP-hist, developed countries were further widening the gulf between them
responsible for 68 percent of carbon and wealthy countries. A 2019 study,
dioxide emissions between 1850 and 2016. also published by the National Academy
These disparities chart the rise of of Sciences, found that in most low-
developed countries at the expense of income countries, higher temperatures
others. The history of climate change is are more than 90 percent likely to have
one of compounding injustices. The curbed economic output. In sub-Saharan
wealth of the Western countries was Africa, climate change has reduced the
built on the riches and natural resources per capita GDPs of Burkina Faso, Niger,
extracted from their colonial empires, a and Sudan by more than 20 percent.
process that motivated—and in turn
was fueled by—the burning of coal, oil, THE BURDENS OF ADAPTATION
and gas and vast deforestation. The This great fossil-fuel-powered wealth
Industrial Revolution may have pro- disparity makes it harder for poorer
duced crowded, smoke-filled cities full nations to protect themselves from the
of people with chronic health problems, consequences of climate change. The
but over time, it ensured that future inequality materializes in some obvious
generations in industrialized economies ways: developing countries lack the
would grow up in relative privilege resources to build infrastructure to
compared with people elsewhere, who guard against deadly storms, rising sea
were often living under colonial rule. levels, and intense heat waves. But it
The consumption of fossil fuels lies at also strikes at the core of economic
the root of global inequality. production in much of the global
The end of World War II ushered in South. Many places still depend on
the period of decolonization, but the agriculture and ways of life wedded to
dynamics of the imperial age persisted. the rhythms of the climate. For exam-
In a 2008 report published by the ple, more than half of all people in
National Academy of Sciences, a team Africa rely on farming for all or part of
of economists and ecologists calculated their livelihoods. They are especially
just how much more greenhouse gas vulnerable to climate disruptions.
emissions from the developed world For poor countries, meeting the costs
harmed the developing world—in the of adaptation—measures that help
form of floods, storm activity, and other people adjust to the changing climate—
events associated with climate change— remains impossible. In parts of India,
than emissions from the developing world for instance, those measures might
hurt the developed world. Between 1961 include raising homes onto stilts to lift
May/June 2020 63
Mohamed Adow
them above floodwaters and relocating concept of “common but differentiated

whole communities farther inland, away responsibilities,” the understanding that
from flooded coasts. In Bangladesh, the countries that had spewed the most
saltwater intrusion has killed crops and emissions in the past needed to lead the
livestock, so farmers need to both acquire way in curbing emissions in the future.
varieties of saline-resistant seeds and The path to a solution seemed relatively
rear animals that can tolerate shifting simple back then. Scientists would
conditions, such as saltwater ducks. In identify the level of emissions that needed
Nicaragua, coffee growers have found that to be cut, the world’s developed coun-
higher temperatures and greater tries would divide the required cuts
rainfall have destroyed up to 40 percent among themselves, and climate change,
of their crop, so many have been forced the reasoning went, would slow and cease.
to turn to cacao instead. But for many years, wealthy coun-
In Africa, the demands of adaptation tries refused to fully admit to the scale
to climate change are particularly acute. of the problem, dragging their feet on
Despite accounting for only 15 percent agreeing to legally binding treaties. The
of the global population and just two 2009 UN Climate Change Conference,
percent of energy-related carbon in Copenhagen, which many observers
dioxide emissions, sub-Saharan African hoped would produce meaningful results,
countries currently shoulder nearly 50 collapsed after rich nations tried at the
percent of global adaptation costs, 11th hour to ram through a lopsided
according to the African Development deal without the participation of most
Bank. At an African Union summit in other countries. The failure of Copen-
February, South African President Cyril hagen has had lasting implications: had
Ramaphosa pointed out that despite the developed world begun the turn to
their scarce resources, African countries low-carbon economies a decade ago,
are spending between two and nine such a transition would have helped the
percent of their GDPs dealing with the rest of the world follow suit, saving
effects of extreme weather. “Adaptation untold lives and billions of dollars and
is a global responsibility,” he insisted, avoiding the current crisis.
calling for greater financial support from Following the breakdown of the
the developed countries that caused the Copenhagen summit, international
crisis in the first place. negotiations limped on, delayed both by
rich countries and by oil-exporting
BROKEN PROMISES countries such as Saudi Arabia. At the
Ramaphosa’s statement was not particu- 2011 climate summit in Durban, South
larly radical. When nations gathered to Africa, wealthy nations advanced a new
grapple with the threat of climate approach that insisted that all coun-
change at the Earth Summit in Rio de tries—not just the historical polluters
Janeiro in 1992, wealthy countries but also poor nations that had done very
themselves recognized that they were little to cause the crisis—had to submit
more liable than the rest of the world for plans to cut emissions. This shift allowed
global warming. The UNFCCC, which was wealthy countries to escape from the
agreed on at the summit, enshrined the binding rules of the previous regime,
established by the Kyoto Protocol in 1997,
which had sought to build an effective
PARDEE SCHOOL
multilateral, rules-based emission-
reduction system.
In return for signing on to this new Think Global.
global paradigm, developing countries
would receive over $100 billion a year Think Pardee.
starting in 2020 to help them take
measures to adapt to floods, fires, and
storms and to support their transitions
to low-carbon economies. That sum
represented a very modest contribution
from wealthy countries considering the
resources at their disposal: the United
Kingdom alone is planning to spend $137
billion to build a new high-speed rail line
from London to Manchester via Leeds.
In 2015, countries met again to coordi-
nate on combating climate change, this
PA
time in Paris, and the wealthy countries
RD
reaffirmed their commitment to provide EE
SC
HO
O
financial support to poor countries for LS
TU
DE
NT
adaptation and transitioning away from LEA
DING .
A STUDY GROUP
fossil fuels. But the cumulative emission-
reduction pledges that accompanied the
Paris agreement were far too weak to
Earn a
achieve the deal’s stated goals. specialization in
And $100 billion per year is nowhere INTERNATIONAL
close to what is required to cover the
costs of adapting to climate change and
COMMUNICATION
transitioning to greener economies in with an MA in
the developing world. Adaptation alone International Affairs.
would cost over $180 billion annually
today (and even more as time goes on).
If the developed world does not increase
its funding beyond the $100 billion per
year that has been promised, tempera-
tures are likely to rise by 2.7–3.5
degrees Celsius by 2100—well above bu.edu/PardeeSchool @BUPardeeSchool
the threshold of 1.5–2.0 degrees Celsius
agreed to in the Paris agreement. (And
even a two-degree rise is nothing to Frederick S. Pardee
gloat about: an increase of that amount School of Global Studies
would likely displace hundreds of
May/June 2020 65
Mohamed Adow
millions of people and spark heat waves, LET THEM MITIGATE?

droughts, coastal flooding, and storms.) Another major problem with the fund-
The Paris agreement does include ing on offer from rich countries is its
commitments to increase levels of funding emphasis. Most of the proposed funding
every five years, but it’s not clear if is focused on mitigation efforts: ensur-
wealthy countries will meet those ing that developing countries don’t burn
additional targets given that they have fossil fuels at accelerating rates by
yet to reach the 2020 goal. reforming their economies. The funding
Distressingly, it’s not even clear that for adaptation—helping poor nations
rich countries will meet the modest handle the effects of climate change—
goal of $100 billion per year. Already, amounts to just about 20 percent of all
they have missed multiple deadlines in the money governments have set aside.
gathering the initial tranche of money. That disparity reveals a depressing
After the election of President Donald truth: although rich countries want to
Trump in the United States and of stop poor countries from emitting
Prime Minister Scott Morrison in greenhouse gases, they have shown less
Australia, both countries reneged on interest in protecting those countries’
their commitments. Donors success- people and property.
fully replenished the Green Climate Moreover, a third category of fund-
Fund—the largest international fund ing is proving even harder to generate:
dedicated to helping developing coun- compensation for past damage. In many
tries adapt to and mitigate the effects parts of the world, it’s no longer pos-
of climate change—last year, with $9.7 sible to simply adapt to a new climate.
billion in pledges committed by 27 It’s not possible, for instance, to adapt if
countries, including 14 countries that rising sea levels have submerged your
doubled their previous contributions. entire island or if you have permanently
But let’s be clear: the money raised so lost your farmland to desertification.
far has not come from straightforward Because these losses are disproportion-
grants from state coffers. Instead, it ately the consequence of rich countries’
consists of a collection of loans, greenhouse gas emissions, those coun-
private-sector financing, and funds for tries are morally bound to help com-
long-standing projects in overseas aid pensate for them. This principle was
budgets. The motley nature of this formally accepted in 2013, when all the
funding has not inspired confidence in parties to the UNFCCC supported the
the developing world about the sincer- creation of the Warsaw International
ity of the wealthy countries’ commit- Mechanism for Loss and Damage
ments. By all estimates, the mandated Associated With Climate Change
$100 billion will not be assembled by Impacts, a forum to discuss the realities
the deadline of next November at the of loss due to climate change and ways
next major UN climate summit, in of addressing those losses. But it has no
Glasgow. If the money fails to material- legally binding provision to compel
ize, then poorer nations will have a wealthy countries to compensate poor
hard time trusting any of the diplo- ones. When poor countries press their
matic promises of the rich. wealthier counterparts on pushing the
The Climate Debt
matter forward, the rich world closes continue to funnel taxpayer money to
ranks, with even supposedly progressive fossil fuel industries. Last year, the
bodies, such as the EU, happy to stand International Monetary Fund esti-
shoulder to shoulder with the Trump mated that global subsidies for fossil
administration in preventing compensa- fuels amounted to as much as $5.2
tion for loss and damage from moving trillion in 2017, up from $4.7 trillion in
from theory to practice. At the Madrid 2015. If just a fraction of that money
climate summit last year, the United were diverted to climate change adap-
States, with Russia’s support, ruled out tation and mitigation, it could trans-
agreeing to and implementing a conform the fortunes of vulnerable coun-
crete plan to increase financing for loss tries. To make matters worse, when
and damage. Other rich countries, rich nations do invest in poor coun-
including Australia, Japan, and some tries, they end up spending billions of
member states of the EU, sheepishly dollars propping up fossil fuel indus-
followed suit, leaving vulnerable tries there. A 2018 report by the
countries without the help promised to research and advocacy organization Oil
them in 2013. Change International showed that
Since the signing of the Paris between 2014 and 2016, 60 percent of
agreement in 2015, a number of promi- international public aid for energy
nent world leaders have dismissed the projects in Africa was spent on fossil
importance of addressing the climate fuels—principally through investments
emergency—not just Trump and in oil and gas infrastructure—with only
Morrison but also Brazilian President 18 percent directed to renewable
Jair Bolsonaro and Russian President sources such as wind and solar energy.
Vladimir Putin. Other leaders known As China, the United States, and
for their green rhetoric have failed to countries in Europe increasingly turn
turn talk into serious action. Canadian to cleaner energy at home, they remain
Prime Minister Justin Trudeau prides content to condemn countries in Africa
himself on his green bona fides, but he and elsewhere to a fossil fuel future.
persists in allowing the exploitation of At a January summit on ties be-
his country’s oil-rich tar sands. As a tween the United Kingdom and African
result, a country with 0.5 percent of the countries, British Prime Minister Boris
world’s population may use up, through Johnson announced that his country
oil exports and their associated emis- would stop using aid money to fund
sions, 16 percent of the planet’s rapidly coal projects abroad, and an official
disappearing carbon budget, the government press release for the event
maximum amount of carbon dioxide highlighted increased funding for clean
that can enter the atmosphere before energy. But a few days later, it emerged
causing an increase in the global that 90 percent of the energy deals
temperature of 1.5 degrees Celsius. concluded at the summit were in fact
But even the public emphasis on for fossil fuels. Even as renewable
mitigation hides a more disquieting real- energy sources are becoming cheaper,
ity. Although wealthy countries urge easier to deploy, and more able than
mitigation in the developing world, they ever to help decarbonize the world’s
May/June 2020 67
Mohamed Adow
power supply, the developed world still Vietnam, renewable energy is already
strives to help its companies profit cheaper to use than coal. In the same
from unsustainable fossil fuels in the way that Africans have leapfrogged the
developing world. landline telephone and gone straight to
Of course, it’s also the case that mobile phones, with the right invest-
many developing countries are con- ment and support, the developing world
vinced that they need fossil fuels to can leapfrog fossil fuels.
modernize and raise their standards of But to realize the opportunities of a
living. Over 358 coal plants are under low-carbon economy, developing
construction around the world. For countries need an unprecedented
much of human history, economic increase in financing ahead of the 2020
growth was directly tied to energy use; climate summit in Glasgow. The
the more energy a country produced wealthy nations of the world, whose
and consumed, the more its economy stature and high standards of living rest
grew. For many poor countries awash on a history of pumping greenhouse
with problems, including insufficient gases into the atmosphere, must help
energy production, following the encourage the global shift to decarbon-
fossil-fuel-laden course that wealthy ized economies to limit the rise in the
nations took is the path of least resis- global temperature to 1.5 degrees
tance. Wealthy countries should drasti- Celsius, in accordance with the Paris
cally slash their emissions to allow agreement’s more ambitious goal.
what’s left of the carbon budget to go to Developing countries can help write
poorer countries. That imperative is the end of the story of the climate
also why funding for adaptation and for crisis. Their new approaches to gener-
loss and damage is so important. If ating growth can break the vicious cycle
wealthy countries won’t curb their emis- that has created the climate emergency.
sions rapidly enough, they are morally African nations are on the cusp of
obligated to at least help pay for the sweeping economic development over
consequences of their actions in vul- the next 50 years, and there is no need
nerable countries. for those economies to follow in the
footsteps of Europeans and North
THE GLOBAL SOUTH WRITES BACK Americans. The continent has more
Societies may finally be breaking the wind, sun, and geothermal energy than
link between energy and growth. In the anywhere else in the world. But to
past six years, the global economy has harness the resources available to them,
grown by 23 percent, but energy-related Africans and others in the developing
carbon emissions have grown by only world need the financial and techno-
three percent. The development of logical support from those who sick-
renewable energy means that growth and ened the climate in the first place.
prosperity are no longer found at the There is still time for the world to avoid
bottom of a coal mine or in a barrel of dropping off the cliff. To steer clear
crude. Researchers at the management will require establishing fairness in a
consultancy McKinsey & Company global system that has trampled the
have calculated, for instance, that in poor at every turn.∂
ESSAYS
The United States is

not in decline. It was
the comeback nation
of the 2010s.
— Ruchir Sharma
The Comeback Nation Britain Adrift
Ruchir Sharma 70 Lawrence D. Freedman 118
China’s Coming Upheaval The Next Iranian Revolution

BREN DAN MCD E RMI D / REUT E RS
Minxin Pei 82 Eric Edelman and Ray Takeyh 131
What Kim Wants Making Cyberspace Safe for

Jung H. Pak 96 Democracy
Laura Rosenberger 146
The End of Grand Strategy
Daniel W. Drezner, Ronald R. Krebs, The Right Way to Fix the EU
and Randall Schweller 107 Matthias Matthijs 160
The Comeback Nation
U.S. Economic Supremacy Has
Repeatedly Proved Declinists Wrong
Ruchir Sharma
A
s the 2020s dawn, it is hard to find any member of the U.S. for-
eign policy establishment who does not believe that the United
States is in decline and that the waning of its influence has ac-
celerated under a president who seems to revel in attacking U.S. allies
and enemies alike. The debate is not over the fact of American decline
but over how the United States should manage its diminishing status.
Declinists take as a given that the U.S. share of global economic
output has been decreasing for decades and that the United States
has either already lost its status as the world’s largest economy to
China or is fated to lose it within the next ten to 15 years. From
these assumptions flow recommendations for resizing U.S. foreign
policy to fit Washington’s shrinking power: accept the loss of pri-
macy, adapt to regional spheres of influence led by China and Rus-
sia, and work to avoid the wars that could erupt between a declining
empire such as the United States and a rising one such as China.
But what if the United States is not in economic decline? Some-
how, the prevailing pessimism survived a surge in American eco-
nomic and financial might over the last decade. During the 2010s,
the United States not only staged a comeback as an economic su-
perpower but reached new heights as a financial empire, driven by
its relatively young population, its open door to immigration, and
investment pouring into Silicon Valley. The country is now facing
new economic challenges as a result of the novel coronavirus. But
no country was prepared for the pandemic, and there is no reason
to believe the downturn will change the United States’ standing
among world economies.
RUCHIR SHARMA is Chief Global Strategist at Morgan Stanley Investment Management
and the author of The Ten Rules of Successful Nations.
The Comeback Nation
The American comeback was far from expected back in 2010. The
United States had just suffered its weakest decade of economic growth
since World War II and had hit bottom in the financial crisis of 2008,
which started with the meltdown of mortgage debts in the country
and quickly spread worldwide. Commentators said the United States
had lost all credibility as an economic model and predicted further
decline, particularly relative to China and other emerging economies.
Instead, the 2010s turned out to be a golden decade for the nation
where the crisis started, and not so good for the rest.
A GOLDEN DECADE
For the first time since at least the 1850s, when record keeping began,
the United States traversed a full decade without suffering a single
recession. Although many Americans were initially disappointed with
the pace of the recovery, the United States grew significantly faster
than other developed economies, and faster than many developing
economies, as well. Defying the many declinist forecasts—one major
global bank predicted in 2010 that China would overtake the United
States by 2020—the United States actually expanded its share of
global GDP during the 2010s, from 23 percent to 25 percent.
The 2020s have opened with the sudden shock of a global pan-
demic. Economists are downgrading their growth forecasts for coun-
tries all over the world, and the United States’ record-long economic
expansion is at risk of coming to an abrupt end. But there is little
evidence to suggest that the downturn will hit the United States dis-
proportionately hard. As of this writing, the U.S. stock market has
fallen less than most other stock markets, and investors have bid up
the U.S. dollar given its safe-haven status.
The United States now faces a more enduring obstacle: the cyclical
churn of the global economy. The United States has had golden dec-
ades before. It prospered in the go-go 1960s, then faded amid the
malaise of the 1970s. It boomed again with the rise of Silicon Valley in
the 1990s, only to go flat after the dot-com bust of 2000. The lesson
of history: the fact that the 2010s were great for the United States
makes it less likely that the 2020s will be.
These decadal cycles guide the rise and fall of all nations, not just
the United States. To make the case for chronic American decline,
analysts often choose a measure called “purchasing power parity,” or
PPP, which aims to compare the living standards that people can afford
May/June 2020 71
Ruchir Sharma
in their home countries. The problem with PPP is that it rests its con-
clusions on theoretical currency exchange rates, calculated by academ-
ics. A more accurate measure of economic might is nominal GDP in
U.S. dollars, based on real-life exchange rates in the global markets.
The United States emerged from World War II accounting for a
dominant share of global output—40 percent or more. Based on PPP,
calculations indicate that the United States’ share of the global econ-
omy has declined steadily since then, dropping below China’s in the
mid-2010s, and today stands at just 15 percent. Nominal GDP measure-
ments, on the other hand, show that the U.S. share fell to 25 percent
by 1980 but then fluctuated over the subsequent decades. By 2020, it
had bounced back to 25 percent—exactly where it stood in 1980.
In short, the United States’ share of global economic power has
essentially held steady for four decades. Over this period, the Euro-
pean Union saw its share fall from 35 percent to 21 percent. Japan’s
share slipped from ten percent to six percent, and Russia’s dropped
from three percent to two percent. Meanwhile, China’s share swelled
during that time from two percent to 16 percent. So it is true that as
China has risen, other major powers have declined. But the United
States is not one of them.
DOLLAR DOMINANCE
The United States also emerged from the 2010s stronger than ever
as a financial superpower, with the world’s most sought-after stock
and bond markets and its dominant currency. Lifted by the strong
performance of American technology companies, the U.S. stock
market rose by 250 percent in the 2010s, nearly four times the aver-
age gain in other national stock markets. The biggest underperform-
ers were in Europe and, particularly, in emerging markets, which
suffered their worst decade of returns since the 1930s. China’s stock
market rose by a mere 70 percent over the course of the decade—
relatively slow growth for an emerging market.
By 2019, the United States accounted for 56 percent of global
stock market capitalization, up from 42 percent in 2010. The value
of the U.S. stock market, relative to all others, was at a 100-year
high before the novel coronavirus hit and maintained this historic
lead in the subsequent initial market crash. The 2010s saw the rise
of a global “superstar economy,” in which huge corporations increas-
ingly dominated small ones, monopolizing market share and investment
The Comeback Nation
flows. And the biggest superstars were American. Today, seven of

the world’s ten largest companies by total stock market value are
American, up from three in 2010.
Global markets reflect the collective mind of millions of investors,
and market prices capture their estimate of the relative strength of the
world’s leading economies and compa-
nies. If the markets had one voice, it
would not be singing the chorus of
Having the indispensable
“American Decline.” currency gives the United
The U.S. dollar also finished the States tremendous
2010s on top of the world. When indi- geopolitical leverage.
viduals and companies borrow from
overseas, they increasingly borrow in
dollars, which account for 75 percent of these loans, up from 60 percent
before the crisis of 2008. Even though the crisis originated in the United
States, U.S. banks today dominate global finance to a greater degree
than they did ten years ago—in part because debt troubles have dogged
banks in China, Japan, and the European Union even more persistently.
Close to 90 percent of global financial transactions conducted
through banks use the dollar, even if the deal does not involve an
American party. When South Korea sells phones to Brazil, it gener-
ally asks to be paid in dollars, because sellers everywhere prefer to
hold the world’s favorite legal tender. The share of countries that
use the dollar as their anchor currency—the currency against which
they measure and stabilize the value of their own currencies—has
risen from around 30 percent in 1950 to about 60 percent today.
Those countries collectively account for some 60 percent of global
GDP. China is one of them.
And because the U.S. Federal Reserve controls the supply of dol-
lars, it is, now more than ever, the world’s central bank. When the Fed
moves interest rates, every other central bank (including the People’s
Bank of China) faces heavy pressure to move in the same direction, or
face destabilizing capital outflows. The dollar is also the currency that
other nations overwhelming prefer to hold in their treasury reserves.
This “reserve currency status” has been a perk of empire since Por-
tugal was the dominant world power, beginning in the mid-fifteenth
century. A country that enjoys steady global demand for its cur-
rency—often purchased in the form of government bonds—can bor-
row cheaply from abroad. That’s why Valéry Giscard d’Estaing, who
May/June 2020 73
Ruchir Sharma
was president of France from 1974 to 1981, once called the mighty
dollar the United States’ “exorbitant privilege.” It helps Americans
borrow money in order to buy cars and homes, and it allows Washing-
ton to run up deficits it could not otherwise afford.
Having the indispensable currency also gives the United States
tremendous geopolitical leverage. In 2018, when U.S. President
Donald Trump imposed financial sanctions on Iran after pulling the
United States out of the nuclear deal that his predecessor, along
with other major powers, had negotiated with the Islamic Republic,
reluctant European governments ultimately decided they had no
choice but to go along, because they could not risk losing access to
U.S. banks. When the United States and the European Union sanc-
tioned Russia for invading Ukraine in 2014, the Kremlin turned in-
ward and gave up on promoting economic growth in favor of saving
money so as to reduce its vulnerability to foreign creditors and sanc-
tions threats. For all its aggression on the world stage, Russia is
currently growing at half the pace of the United States and fading
as a global economic power.
Not surprisingly, rivals want a taste of the power that the dollar
gives the United States. But Europe’s reserve ambitions for the euro
have been hobbled by widespread doubts about a currency that is
only 20 years old and has been battered by repeated financial crises.
China had similar hopes for the renminbi and in the early 2010s
took steps to make its currency more readily convertible and easier
to trade. Then, in 2015, millions of Chinese rushed out of this open-
ing door. Faced with a stock market crash in Shanghai and a loom-
ing debt crisis, they began shipping renminbi to safe havens abroad,
in amounts equal to hundreds of billions of dollars a month. In re-
sponse, the authorities imposed capital controls that remain in place
today, putting China’s hopes of challenging the dollar’s supremacy
on hold indefinitely.
What the rest of the world wants in a reserve currency is a vast,
liquid market in which people are free to buy and sell without fear
that the government will suddenly change the rules. For now, they
see this safe haven only in the U.S. dollar, which, as a result, has so
far appreciated against most other currencies during the coronavirus
shock. Global elites may not trust the current U.S. president, but
they trust U.S. institutions, which is why the United States emerged
from the 2010s as a financial empire without rivals.
Ruchir Sharma
DON’T DESPAIR
The perception of American decline is reinforced by the many pun-
dits and politicians who say that recent decades have been great only
for corporations and the rich. They point to data showing that U.S.
wages have stagnated since the 1970s and that the United States is
the only rich country where life expectancy has declined in recent
years, owing to “deaths of despair”—from suicide, alcohol, and opi-
oid abuse. In the 2020 presidential primary season, one of the signa-
ture lines of the Democratic front-runner, former Vice President Joe
Biden, has been that the middle class is “getting killed.”
To be sure, many Americans continue to struggle, and there are
frightening concentrations of addiction and despair. But as wage
and income growth revived in the mid-2010s, so, broadly speaking,
did American spirits. During that period, according to the Univer-
sity of Michigan’s monthly surveys of American consumers, confi-
dence grew equally fast among consumers in the top, middle, and
bottom thirds of the income ladder.
Of course, the buoyant mood is cracking in the pandemic. But
when the United States reported its first coronavirus cases, in mid-
January, small-business confidence matched the all-time peaks since
surveys of small-business owners began, nearly five decades ago.
Consumer confidence was at a high reached only twice before, dur-
ing the economic booms of the 1960s and 1990s. The University of
Michigan surveys blend questions about current and future condi-
tions, asking Americans how well off they are compared to a year ago
and how well off they expect to be a year from now.
Ever since Gallup first began asking Americans whether they
were satisfied with the way their lives were going, back in 1979, the
vast majority have said yes. But in January, that share hit a record 90
percent. That same month, three out of five Americans polled said
they were better off now than they were four years ago, the largest
proportion since Gallup began asking this question during presi-
dential election years, back in 1992.
Although there are data showing that inflation-adjusted wages have
stagnated since the 1970s, as many commentators point out, it’s also
possible to show that wages have risen—or fallen—by choosing a dif-
ferent start date for comparison or a different measure of inflation.
The method and the story it tells are often chosen to support a po-
litical point of view. But this much is clear: weekly and hourly wage
The Comeback Nation
growth expanded in the 2010s. And broader measures of personal and

household income, including census data, show both long-term gains
and a noticeable jump in the 2010s.
Although inequality is growing, it is growing because income gains
have disproportionately benefited the richest Americans, not because
the middle class and the poor have seen no gains. According to the
U.S. Census Bureau, the median household income in 2018, adjusted
for inflation, was $63,000, an increase of around $15,000 from the
early 1970s and of $7,000 from 2013. Those gains likely continued
through 2019, a strong year for U.S. jobs, and may help explain why
signs of popular optimism were still spreading early this year.
Even believers in middle-class decline should not conflate it with
a broader American decline—because the same conversation about
the loss of middle-class jobs and wages is going on all over the world,
from India, to Japan, to the countries of the EU. And the middle
classes in those countries are all suffering for a similar reason, the
rise of cheaper and more competitive exports, first from China, lately
from rivals such as Bangladesh and Vietnam, which has threatened
middle-class manufacturing jobs elsewhere.
In a polarized age, Americans tend to see economic reality through
a partisan lens. The Democratic presidential candidates have dwelled
on themes of decline and stagnation, which, given the popular mood,
had promised to be a tough sell. Fear of the coronavirus will reshape
the 2020 election conversation, but again, there is no evidence yet
that the pandemic will depress the economy or economic confidence
in the United States more than in other major powers. The underly-
ing question now is, will the U.S. economy rule the 2020s the way it
ruled the 2010s, with or without the virus?
THE BIG RISK

Countries that dominate the global economy and markets in one
decade rarely dominate them in the next. The more they grow, the
more complacent their leaders get. They lose discipline, abandon
reforms, mire the country in debt and deficits, and push the econ-
omy off the rails. This decadal cycle has taken down every economic
star of the postwar era, including the United States twice before.
The U.S. economy was dominant in the 1960s but stumbled in the
next decade. In the 1970s, rising oil prices led some U.S. intelli-
gence analysts to predict that the Soviet Union was on track to be-
May/June 2020 77
Ruchir Sharma
come the world’s largest economy, but it collapsed economically in

the next decade. The 1980s were all about “the rise of Japan,” but
Japan fell when its market bubble burst in 1989. The 1990s, another
American decade, ended with the bust in Silicon Valley. The prob-
lem the United States now faces is that its current economic expan-
sion is almost 11 years old, the longest
There is no evidence yet since 1850, and every boom eventually
creates excesses that foreshadow its
that the pandemic will own destruction.
depress the economy in the For all the talk of American despair,
United States more than in the bigger risk is complacency in the
face of growing threats from debt, defi-
other major powers. cits, and demographics. Any economy’s
growth potential is a function of popu-
lation and productivity. The United States likes to think that its big
advantage is productivity, owing to relatively flexible regulations and
a culture of innovation fostered in elite universities and in Silicon Val-
ley. Indeed, U.S. productivity has gotten a boost from investment in
technology in recent years, but the more important U.S. advantage
has been a relatively high population growth rate: babies and immi-
grants, not Stanford and Google.
In the 1990s, productivity was growing significantly faster in the
United States than in Japan and Europe, but that lead began narrow-
ing in the subsequent decade. Meanwhile, the United States’ demo-
graphic advantage was growing. In Japan and the EU, the working-age
population started to shrink after the turn of the millennium. But it
kept growing in the United States. If the United States’ population
had been growing as slowly as Japan’s in recent decades, today the
U.S. share of the global economy would be 17 percent, not 25 percent.
This advantage, however, is now threatened by politics. During the
postwar period, around two-thirds of U.S. population growth was
driven by the country’s relatively high birthrate. The rest was driven
by its relatively open door to immigrants. That door has begun to
close under Trump. Since 2016, the number of legal immigrants en-
tering the United States has fallen at an average pace of 43,000 a year.
At the same time, U.S. policymakers have grown complacent about
debt and deficits. The United States was growing faster than the rest
of the developed world under President Barack Obama, and it wid-
ened its lead as Trump pushed through cuts in taxes and regulations.
The Comeback Nation
But cutting taxes without reducing spending has raised the U.S. budget
deficit, which is closing in on five percent of GDP, the highest it has
ever been except in the aftermath of a recession or a war. Major voices
in both parties are now making the case that deficits no longer pose a
threat to growth—Republicans in order to defend low taxes, Demo-
crats to defend higher public spending.
Following the 2008 financial crisis, the United States moved more
decisively than other rich nations to reduce its debt, but it has been
backsliding in recent years, encouraged by endless new rounds of
easy money offered by the Federal Reserve in order to keep the eco-
nomic recovery alive. The big change since 2008: the largest and
riskiest debts are now concentrated in the corporate bond market,
not bank loans to homeowners.
Today, 16 percent of American public companies are “zombies,”
meaning they earn too little to cover the interest payments on their
debt and stay alive only by issuing new debt. The Fed’s record-low
interest rates were intended to stimulate investment in productive
companies, but much of that money has gone to support zombies or
has flowed into the stock market, which is now more than 80 percent
larger than the U.S. economy, well above the highs reached during the
market manias of the 1920s and late 1990s. The popping of those
bubbles led in the first instance to the Great Depression and in the
second to a recession. If the coronavirus shock leads to a full-blown
financial crisis, troubled corporations will default on their debt pay-
ments not only in the United States but worldwide. China, Japan, and
Europe are also riddled with zombies.
Eventually, rising debt could threaten the U.S. financial empire. In
1985, the United States owed the rest of the world $104 billion, an
amount equal to a negligible 2.5 percent of GDP. Since then, those li-
abilities have risen to nearly $10 trillion, 50 percent of GDP, a thresh-
old that has often pushed nations into a currency crisis. Empires lose
their reserve currency status when foreign nations lose confidence
that the imperial power can pay its bills.
Before the United States, five countries had held reserve cur-
rency status: Portugal, Spain, the Netherlands, France, and the
United Kingdom. On average, each lasted 94 years in the leading
role. Today, the dollar’s run as a reserve currency is 100 years old.
One reason it is likely to endure even a pandemic-induced recession
is the absence of viable national rivals, but in the void, new contend-
May/June 2020 79
Ruchir Sharma
ers are emerging, including gold and cryptocurrencies. Facebook is

trying to launch a digital currency, Libra. Just because the dollar is
the indispensable currency today doesn’t mean it will be forever.
AMERICA IS NOT IN DECLINE

If the U.S. economy slips up in the 2020s, will it mean that the declin-
ists were right all along? Unlikely. Beyond the next five to ten years,
no forecast is better than a random guess, because too much can
change in the intervening years, as the cycles of economics, politics,
and technology turn. The long run is a myth.
In most tellings, the declinist narrative reaches its denouement when
the United States loses its place as the world’s largest economy to China.
Often, this story is couched in historical inevitability, evoking the vast-
ness of China’s population, the glories of its imperial past, even the fact
that sixteenth-century China accounted for 25 percent of the global
economy—as if distant past performance guaranteed future results.
Declinists often exaggerate how soon China could overtake the
United States by assuming that it can maintain overstated growth
rates indefinitely and never once suffer a financial crisis or a recession.
For the sake of argument, let’s pretend that these exercises in straight-
line extrapolation make sense. If into the future, China and the United
States maintained their officially reported 2019 nominal GDP growth
rates—around six percent and four percent, respectively—China
would not catch up to the United States until around 2050.
And since all developing economies slow down as they mature and
grow richer, China’s economy is likely to slow further than it already has
over the past decade. If its growth slowed by one percentage point,
China would not catch up until 2090, and even that pace would be tough
to sustain. South Korea and Taiwan, the two most successful develop-
ment stories in history, grew rapidly for five decades, then slowed
sharply. China has already been growing rapidly for four decades. More-
over, South Korea and Taiwan boomed during the postwar miracle years,
when economic growth was supercharged all over the world by the baby
boom and hyperglobalization. Now, the baby boom has gone bust. Trade
growth has stalled. Economic growth is slowing worldwide. And all
these headwinds are hitting China harder than the United States.
What is more, China’s debt now amounts to nearly 270 percent of
GDP (the comparable figure in the United States is 250 percent), and
it is much harder for a middle-income country such as China to grow
The Comeback Nation
with a debt that high. Zombies account for ten percent of corporate
debt in China, so unlike in 2008, when its debt was much lower, China
is now highly vulnerable to a global financial crisis. Moreover, the
United States is the battle-tested survivor of 12 recessions and a Great
Depression over the last century. China has not suffered a recession
since its economic boom began four
decades ago, and its leaders now re-
spond to any hint of a downturn by
Few Americans alive today
pumping more debt into the economy. are likely to be around to
The most important driver of any see the United States fall to
economy is the working-age popula- second place.
tion, which is still growing in the
United States but started shrinking in
China five years ago. Historically, countries with a shrinking work-
force have had virtually no chance of sustaining rapid economic
growth for even one decade. Yet declinists assume that China’s rise
can continue indefinitely. More likely, few Americans alive today
will be around to see the United States fall to second place.
Foreign affairs experts may be correct to argue that the United
States should modernize its global strategy, restore ties to tradi-
tional allies and critical trade partners, rejoin international agree-
ments, and help rebuild the institutional pillars of the postwar order.
But often, the argument is not that these moves would be wise; it is
that they are necessary to match U.S. policy with the reality of the
country’s declining economic clout.
That, however, is not the reality. The United States is not in de-
cline. It was the comeback nation of the 2010s. And if the experts
aren’t right about where the United States is coming from, they may
not be right about where it needs to go.∂
May/June 2020 81
China’s Coming Upheaval
Competition, the Coronavirus, and the
Weakness of Xi Jinping
Minxin Pei
O
ver the past few years, the United States’ approach to China
has taken a hard-line turn, with the balance between coop-
eration and competition in the U.S.-Chinese relationship
tilting sharply toward the latter. Most American policymakers and
commentators consider this confrontational new strategy a response
to China’s growing assertiveness, embodied especially in the contro-
versial figure of Chinese President Xi Jinping. But ultimately, this
ongoing tension—particularly with the added pressures of the new
coronavirus outbreak and an economic downturn—is likely to expose
the brittleness and insecurity that lie beneath the surface of Xi’s, and
Beijing’s, assertions of solidity and strength.
The United States has limited means of influencing China’s closed
political system, but the diplomatic, economic, and military pressure
that Washington can bring to bear on Beijing will put Xi and the Chi-
nese Communist Party (CCP) he leads under enormous strain. Indeed,
a prolonged period of strategic confrontation with the United States,
such as the one China is currently experiencing, will create conditions
that are conducive to dramatic changes.
As tension between the United States and China has grown, there has
been vociferous debate about the similarities and, perhaps more important,
the differences between U.S.-Chinese competition now and U.S.-Soviet
competition during the Cold War. Whatever the limitations of the anal-
ogy, Chinese leaders have put considerable thought into the lessons of the
Cold War and of the Soviet collapse. Ironically, Beijing may nevertheless be
repeating some of the most consequential mistakes of the Soviet regime.
MINXIN PEI is Tom and Margot Pritzker ’72 Professor of Government at Claremont
McKenna College. This article is part of a project of the Library of Congress’s John W. Kluge
Center, supported by the Carnegie Corporation of New York.
During the multidecade competition of the Cold War, the rigidity

of the Soviet regime and its leaders proved to be the United States’
most valuable asset. The Kremlin doubled down on failed strategies—
sticking with a moribund economic system, continuing a ruinous arms
race, and maintaining an unaffordable global empire—rather than ac-
cept the losses that thoroughgoing reforms might have entailed. Chi-
nese leaders are similarly constrained by the rigidities of their own
system and therefore limited in their ability to correct policy mis-
takes. In 2018, Xi decided to abolish presidential term limits, signal-
ing his intention to stay in power indefinitely. He has indulged in
heavy-handed purges, ousting prominent party officials under the
guise of an anticorruption drive. What is more, Xi has suppressed
protests in Hong Kong, arrested hundreds of human rights lawyers
and activists, and imposed the tightest media censorship of the post-
Mao era. His government has constructed “reeducation” camps in
Xinjiang, where it has incarcerated more than a million Uighurs, Ka-
zakhs, and other Muslim minorities. And it has centralized economic
and political decision-making, pouring government resources into
state-owned enterprises and honing its surveillance technologies. Yet
all together, these measures have made the CCP weaker: the growth of
state-owned enterprises distorts the economy, and surveillance fuels
resistance. The spread of the novel coronavirus has only deepened the
Chinese people’s dissatisfaction with their government.
The economic tensions and political critiques stemming from U.S.-
Chinese competition may ultimately prove to be the straws that broke
this camel’s back. If Xi continues on this trajectory, eroding the founda-
tions of China’s economic and political power and monopolizing re-
sponsibility and control, he will expose the CCP to cataclysmic change.
A PAPER TIGER
Since taking power in 2012, Xi has replaced collective leadership with
strongman rule. Before Xi, the regime consistently displayed a high
degree of ideological flexibility and political pragmatism. It avoided
errors by relying on a consensus-based decision-making process that
incorporated views from rival factions and accommodated their duel-
ing interests. The CCP also avoided conflicts abroad by staying out of
contentious disputes, such as those in the Middle East, and refraining
from activities that could encroach on the United States’ vital national
interests. At home, China’s ruling elites maintained peace by sharing
May/June 2020 83
Minxin Pei
the spoils of governance. Such a regime was by no means perfect.

Corruption was pervasive, and the government often delayed critical
decisions and missed valuable opportunities. But the regime that pre-
ceded Xi’s centralization had one distinct advantage: a built-in pro-
pensity for pragmatism and caution.
In the last seven years, that system has been dismantled and re-
placed by a qualitatively different regime—one marked by a high
degree of ideological rigidity, punitive policies toward ethnic minor-
ities and political dissenters at home, and an impulsive foreign policy
embodied by the Belt and Road Initiative (BRI), a trillion-dollar in-
frastructure program with dubious economic potential that has
aroused intense suspicion in the West. The centralization of power
under Xi has created new fragilities and has exposed the party to
greater risks. If the upside of strongman rule is the ability to make
difficult decisions quickly, the downside is that it greatly raises the
odds of making costly blunders. The consensus-based decision-
making of the earlier era might have been slow and inefficient, but it
prevented radical or risky ideas from becoming policy.
Under Xi, correcting policy mistakes has proved to be difficult, since
reversing decisions made personally by the strongman would undercut
his image of infallibility. (It is easier politically to reverse bad decisions
made under collective leadership, because a group, not an individual,
takes the blame.) Xi’s demand for loyalty has also stifled debate and
deterred dissent within the CCP. For these reasons, the party lacks the
flexibility needed to avoid and reverse future missteps in its confronta-
tion with the United States. The result is likely to be growing disunity
within the regime. Some party leaders will no doubt recognize the
risks and grow increasingly alarmed that Xi has needlessly endangered
the party’s standing. The damage to Xi’s authority caused by further
missteps would also embolden his rivals, especially Premier Li
Keqiang and the Politburo members Wang Yang and Hu Chunhua, all
of whom have close ties to former President Hu Jintao. Of course, it is
nearly impossible to remove a strongman in a one-party regime be-
cause of his tight control over the military and the security forces. But
creeping discord would at the very least feed Xi’s insecurity and para-
noia, further eroding his ability to chart a steady course.
A strongman who has suffered setbacks—as Mao Zedong did af-
ter the Great Leap Forward, a modernization program that central-
ized food production, leading to some 30 million deaths by famine
Survival skills: Xi visiting COVID-19 patients in Wuhan, China, March 2020
in the early 1960s—naturally fears that his rivals will seize the op-
portunity to conspire against him. To preempt such threats, the
strongman typically resorts to purges, which Mao did four years af-
ter the end of the Great Leap Forward by launching the Cultural
Revolution, a movement intended to eliminate “bourgeois elements”
in society and in the government. In the years ahead, Xi may come
to rely on purges more than he already does, further heightening
tensions and distrust among the ruling elites.
X I E H UA N C H I / X I N H UA / EY EV I N E / R E D U X
LEAN TIMES AHEAD

A key component of Washington’s strategic confrontation with Bei-
jing is economic “decoupling,” a significant reduction of the extensive
commercial ties that the United States and China have built over the
last four decades. Those advocating decoupling—such as U.S. Presi-
dent Donald Trump, who launched a trade war with China in 2018—
believe that by cutting China off from the United States’ vast market
and sophisticated technology, Washington can greatly reduce the po-
tential growth of China’s power. In spite of the truce in the trade war
May/June 2020 85
Minxin Pei
following the interim deal that Trump struck with Xi in January 2020,
U.S.-Chinese economic decoupling is almost certain to continue in
the coming years regardless of who is in the White House, because
reducing the United States’ economic dependence on China and con-
straining the growth of China’s power are now bipartisan aims.
Since the Chinese economy today is
As their standard of living less dependent on exports as an engine
stalls, middle-class Chinese of growth—exports in 2018 accounted
for 19.5 percent of GDP, down from
may turn against the party. 32.6 percent in 2008—decoupling may
not depress China’s economic growth
as much as its proponents have hoped. But it will certainly have a net
negative impact on the Chinese economy, one that may be amplified
by the country’s domestic economic slowdown, which is itself the
product of a ballooning debt, the exhaustion of investment-driven
growth, and a rapidly aging population. The slowdown may be fur-
ther exacerbated by Beijing’s attempt to shore up near-term growth
with unsustainable policies, such as increased bank lending and in-
vestment in wasteful infrastructure projects.
As the economy weakens, the CCP may have to contend with the
erosion of popular support resulting from a falling or stagnant stan-
dard of living. In the post-Mao era, the CCP has relied heavily on
economic overperformance to sustain its legitimacy. Indeed, the
generations born after the Cultural Revolution have experienced
steadily rising living standards. A prolonged period of mediocre
economic performance—say, a few years in which the growth rate
hovers around three or four percent, the historical mean for devel-
oping countries—could severely reduce the level of popular support
for the CCP, as ordinary Chinese grapple with rising unemployment
and an inadequate social safety net.
In such an adverse economic environment, signs of social unrest,
such as riots, mass protests, and strikes, will become more common.
The deepest threat to the regime’s stability will come from the Chi-
nese middle class. Well-educated and ambitious college graduates
will find it difficult to obtain desirable jobs in the coming years be-
cause of China’s anemic economic performance. As their standard of
living stalls, middle-class Chinese may turn against the party. This
won’t be obvious at first: the Chinese middle class has traditionally
shied away from politics. But even if members of the middle class
Ed.D. in
Organizational
Leadership
West LA | Online Hybrid
gsep.pepperdine.edu
Minxin Pei
do not participate in anti-regime protests, they may well express

their discontent indirectly, in demonstrations over such issues as
environmental protection, public health, education, and food safety.
The Chinese middle class could also vote with its feet by emigrat-
ing abroad in large numbers.
An economic slowdown would also
Xi will probably beat the disrupt the CCP’s patronage structure,
drums of Chinese the perks and favors that the govern-
nationalism to counter the ment provides to cronies and collabo-
United States. rators. In the recent past, a booming
economy provided the government
with abundant revenue—total reve-
nue in absolute terms tripled between 2008 and 2018—providing
the resources the CCP needed to secure the loyalty of midlevel ap-
paratchiks, senior provincial leaders, and the managers of state-
owned enterprises. As the Chinese economic miracle falters, the
party will find it harder to provide the privileges and material com-
forts that such officials have come to expect. Party elites will also
need to compete harder among themselves to get approval and
funding for their pet projects. Dissatisfaction among the elites may
spiral if Xi’s prized priorities, such as the BRI, continue to receive
preferential treatment and everyone else must economize.
Finally, in the event of a dramatic slowdown, the Chinese gov-
ernment will most likely find itself confronting greater resistance
in the country’s restive periphery, especially in Tibet and Xinjiang,
which contain China’s most vocal ethnic minorities, and in Hong
Kong, which was British territory until 1997 and retains a different
system of governance with far more civil liberties. To be sure, esca-
lating tensions in China’s periphery will not bring the CCP down.
But they can be costly distractions. Should the party resort to overly
harsh responses to assert its control, as is likely to be the case, the
country will incur international criticism and harsh new sanctions.
The escalation of human rights violations in China would also help
push Europe closer to the United States, thus facilitating the for-
mation of a broad anti-China coalition, which Beijing has been
desperately trying to prevent.
Although middle-class discontent, ethnic resistance, and pro-
democracy protests won’t force Xi out of power, such pervasive
malaise would undoubtedly further erode his authority and cast
doubts on his capacity to govern effectively. Economic weakness

and elite demoralization could then push Beijing over the edge,
leading the CCP toward calamity.
BEATING THE DRUMS OF NATIONALISM

In theory, the CCP should be capable of avoiding or mitigating the
damage from an economic slowdown. An effective strategy would in-
corporate some of the valuable lessons Xi’s predecessors learned from
the collapse of the Soviet Union. Moscow continued to provide sig-
nificant aid to Cuba, Vietnam, and several vassal states in Eastern
Europe well into the Soviet Union’s twilight years. The regime also
pursued a costly military intervention in Afghanistan and funded
proxies in Angola and Southeast Asia. To avoid those kinds of mis-
takes, Beijing should prioritize the conservation of its limited finan-
cial resources to sustain the open-ended great-power conflict. In
particular, China should retrench from its expansionist projects, above
all the BRI, and other foreign assistance programs, such as the grants
and concessional loans it has provided to Cambodia, Cuba, Venezuela,
and several developing countries in Africa. Beijing might incur con-
siderable short-term costs—namely, the loss of prestige and good-
will—but over the long term, China would avoid the perils of imperial
overreach and preserve enough funds to recapitalize its banking sys-
tem, which has been exhausted by excessive lending in the last decade.
Beijing should also build stronger ties with U.S. allies to prevent
Washington from recruiting them into a broad anti-China coalition. To
do so, the regime will have to offer enormous economic, diplomatic,
military, and political concessions, such as opening the Chinese market
to Japan, South Korea, and Europe; ensuring the protection of intellec-
tual property; making significant improvements in human rights; and
abandoning certain territorial claims. Xi’s government has already taken
steps to repair ties with Japan. But to truly court U.S. allies and avert a
slowdown, either Xi or his successors will need to go further, undertak-
ing market-oriented reforms to offset the economic losses caused by
decoupling. The large-scale privatization of state-owned enterprises is a
good place to start. These inefficient behemoths control nearly $30 tril-
lion in assets and consume roughly 80 percent of the country’s available
bank credit, but they contribute only between 23 and 28 percent of GDP.
The efficiency gains that would be unleashed by reining in the state’s
direct role in the economy would be more than enough to compensate
May/June 2020 89
Minxin Pei
for the loss of the U.S. market. The economist Nicholas Lardy has es-
timated that genuine economic reforms, in particular those targeting
state-owned enterprises, could boost China’s annual GDP growth by as
much as two percentage points in the coming decade.
Unfortunately, Xi is unlikely to embrace this strategy. After all,
it runs against his deeply held ideological views. Most of China’s
recent foreign and security policy initiatives bear his personal im-
print. Curtailing or abandoning them would be seen as an admis-
sion of failure. As a result, the CCP might be limited to tactical
adjustments: promoting public-private partnerships in the econ-
omy, deregulating certain sectors, or reducing government spend-
ing. Such steps would represent an improvement but would
probably neither raise sufficient revenue nor appeal strongly
enough to U.S. allies to decisively alter the course of the U.S.-
Chinese confrontation.
Instead, Xi will probably beat the drums of Chinese nationalism
to counter the United States. Ever since the 1989 Tiananmen
Square protests—which shook the party to its core and resulted in
a government crackdown on dissent—the CCP has ceaselessly ex-
ploited nationalist sentiment to shore up its legitimacy. In the
event of decoupling and an economic slowdown, the party will
likely ramp up those efforts. This should not be hard at first: most
Chinese are convinced that the United States started the current
conflict to thwart China’s rise. But ironically, fanning the flames of
nationalism could eventually make it harder for the party to switch
to a more flexible strategy, since taking a vigorous anti-American
stance will lock in conflict and constrain Beijing’s policy options.
The party would then have to turn to social control and political
repression. Thanks to its vast and effective security apparatus, the
party should have little difficulty suppressing internal challenges
to its authority. But repression would be costly. Faced with rising
unrest fueled by economic stagnation, the party would have to de-
vote substantial resources to stability, largely at the expense of
other priorities. Strict social control would also likely alienate
some elites, such as private entrepreneurs and high-profile aca-
demics and writers. Escalating repression could generate greater
resistance in China’s periphery—Tibet, Xinjiang, and Hong
Kong—and elicit international criticism, especially from the Euro-
pean countries that China needs to court.
Over the past century, the Walsh School of Foreign Service has
graduated some of the world’s most influential leaders. We’re ready
to help train the next generation of global citizens to continue this
tradition of service.
Join the SFS Legacy
S F S . G E O R G E T O W N .www.CSSExamPoint.com
EDU
Minxin Pei
AFTER THE DELUGE

The CCP is still far from dead. Short of China’s losing a direct mili-
tary conflict with the United States, the party can conceivably hang
on to power. That said, a regime beset by economic stagnation and
rising social unrest at home and great-power competition abroad is
inherently brittle. The CCP will probably unravel by fits and starts.
The rot would set in slowly but then spread quickly.
It is possible, but unlikely, that mounting dissatisfaction within the
regime could motivate senior members to organize a palace coup to re-
place Xi. The party, however, has adopted sophisticated coup-proofing
techniques: the General Office of the Central Committee monitors
communication among members of the committee, the only body that
could conceivably remove Xi. What is more, Xi’s loyalists dominate the
membership of the Politburo and the Central Committee, and the mili-
tary is firmly under his control. Under such circumstances, a conspiracy
against the top leader would be exceedingly difficult to pull off.
Another possible scenario is a crisis that creates a split among Chi-
na’s top elites, which in turn paralyzes the regime’s fearsome repressive
apparatus. Such an event could be precipitated by mass protests that
the security forces are unable to contain. As with the Tiananmen pro-
tests, divisions could emerge among top leaders over how to deal with
the protesters, thus allowing the movement to gain momentum and
attract broad-based support nationwide. But this scenario, although
tantalizing, is unlikely to materialize, since the party has invested heav-
ily in surveillance and information control and has developed effective
methods to suppress mass protests.
The scenario that would entail the greatest likelihood of radical
change is a succession struggle that would occur if Xi were to pass
away or resign owing to infirmity. Typically, the fight for power that
follows the end of strongman rule produces a weak interim leader:
consider Soviet Premier Georgy Malenkov, who followed Stalin, or
CCP Chair Hua Guofeng, who followed Mao. Such leaders are often
pushed out by a stronger contender with a transformative vision:
think Nikita Khrushchev in the Soviet Union and Deng Xiaoping in
China. Given this new leader’s need to assert his authority and offer
a different, more appealing agenda, it is unlikely that Xi’s hard au-
thoritarianism would survive the end of his rule.
That would leave the new leader with only two options. He could
return to the survival strategy that the party had before Xi by restoring
collective leadership and a risk-averse foreign policy. But he might

find this to be a hard sell, as the party and all its previous survival
strategies might have been discredited by this point. So he might
instead opt for more radical reforms to save the party. Although stop-
ping short of liberal democracy, he
would, in this case, roll back repres-
sion, relax social control, and acceler-
Typically, the fight that
ate economic reform, just as the Soviet follows the end of
Union did between 1985 and its col- strongman rule produces a
lapse in 1991. Such a course of action weak interim leader.
might be more attractive to a party
elite traumatized by two decades of
strongman rule; it might also resonate with Chinese youth yearning
for a new direction.
If reformers gained the upper hand and embarked on such a path,
the most critical issue would be whether they could avoid “the
Tocqueville paradox,” named after the political theorist Alexis de
Tocqueville, who observed that the reforms that a weakened dicta-
torship pursues have a tendency to trigger a revolution that eventu-
ally topples the reformist dictatorship itself.
Moderate reforms might be more effective in China than they
were in the Soviet Union, however, because a new Chinese leader
would not have to deal with a collapsing external empire, as the last
Soviet leader, Mikhail Gorbachev, did in Eastern Europe. Nor would
a new leader face national disintegration, as the Soviet Union did in
the late 1980s and early 1990s, when all 15 Soviet republics bolted
from the center, because non-Chinese ethnic minorities make up less
than ten percent of China’s population. They may cause serious prob-
lems in Tibet and Xinjiang, but otherwise, ethnic minorities pose no
real threat to China’s territorial integrity.
Whatever the outcome after Xi’s political exit, the CCP will likely
undergo dramatic changes. In the best-case scenario, the party may
succeed in transforming itself into a “kinder, gentler” regime, one
that endorses economic and political reforms and seeks a geopoliti-
cal reconciliation with the United States. By the end, the CCP could
be unrecognizable. In the worst-case scenario, deep institutional rot,
inept leadership, and the mobilization of anti-regime movements
could very well cause a hard landing. Should that happen, it would
be one of history’s greatest ironies. Despite the lessons the CCP has
May/June 2020 93
Minxin Pei
learned from the Soviet implosion and the steps it has taken since
1991 to avoid the same fate, the end of one-party rule in China
could follow an eerily similar script.
THE SICK MAN OF EAST ASIA

Such a scenario will likely be dismissed as pure fantasy by those
who believe in the durability and resilience of CCP rule. But the
Chinese party-state’s botched initial response to the outbreak of the
novel coronavirus and the subsequent eruption of public outrage
should make them think again. The worst public health crisis in the
history of the People’s Republic of China has revealed a number of
significant weaknesses. The regime’s capacity to collect, process,
and act on critical information is much less impressive than most
would have anticipated. Considering the enormous investments in
disease control and prevention that China has made since the SARS
outbreak in 2002–3 and the implementation of laws on emergency
management in 2007, it has been staggering to see how thoroughly
the Chinese government initially mishandled the new coronavirus
epidemic. Local authorities in Wuhan—the epicenter of the out-
break—concealed critical information from the public even after
medical professionals sounded the alarm, just as Jiang Yanyong, a
veteran army doctor, did in 2003 about SARS. Although they re-
ceived reports from Wuhan about the spread of the virus in early
January, most members of the senior leadership did not take any
serious action for two weeks.
The crisis has also revealed the fragility of Xi’s strongman rule.
One likely reason that Beijing failed to take aggressive action to
contain the outbreak early on was that few crucial decisions can be
made without Xi’s direct approval, and he faces heavy demands on
his limited time and attention. A strongman who monopolizes decision-
making can also be politically vulnerable during such a crisis. A
series of decisions Xi made after the Wuhan lockdown began—such
as sending Li, the premier, to the epicenter of the virus instead of
going himself and remaining unseen in public for nearly two
weeks—undermined his image as a decisive leader at precisely the
moment the system seemed to be rudderless. He reasserted control
only weeks after the crisis began—by firing the party chiefs in
charge of the city and the province where the outbreak started and
imposing tight censorship rules on the press and social media.
But the brief window during which Chinese social media and
even the official press erupted in outrage revealed just how tenuous
the CCP’s control over information has become and highlighted the
latent power of Chinese civil society. For unknown reasons, China’s
censorship system performed poorly for about two weeks after the
lockdown in Wuhan was announced. During that period, people
were able to learn how the government had muzzled medical profes-
sionals who had tried to warn the public. Criticism of the govern-
ment reached a peak when Li Wenliang—a doctor who in late
December was among the first to warn Chinese authorities about
the danger of COVID-19, the disease caused by the novel coronavirus,
and who was subsequently interrogated and silenced by local po-
lice—died of the illness on February 7, showing that the CCP could
lose public support quickly in a crisis situation.
The events of the past few months have shown that CCP rule is far
more brittle than many believed. This bolsters the case for a U.S. strategy
of sustained pressure to induce political change. Washington should stay
the course; its chances of success are only getting better and better.∂
May/June 2020 95
What Kim Wants
The Hopes and Fears of North Korea’s
Dictator
Jung H. Pak
B
etween 2017 and 2019, relations between the United States and
North Korea made for great television. Perhaps this was by
design: U.S. President Donald Trump seemed to believe that
any interactions between the two adversaries would be more success-
ful—or at least play more to his strengths—the more they resembled
an entertaining spectacle in which he took center stage. For his part,
the North Korean leader Kim Jong Un took advantage of Trump’s ap-
parent desire for drama, which put Kim and his country at the center
of world events. But a spectacle might have been inevitable, given the
two leaders’ shared penchant for aggressiveness and unpredictability.
The first season of the resulting show was marked by confronta-
tion: Kim’s belligerent rhetoric and nuclear and missile tests in 2017,
Trump’s threats (“fire and fury”), and insults the two men hurled at
each other (Trump dubbed Kim “Little Rocket Man,” and Kim dis-
missed Trump as a “mentally deranged U.S. dotard”). In the second
season, the plot took a twist, as the main characters stepped back from
the brink and held two carefully choreographed summits. After the first
meeting, held in Singapore in June 2018, Trump was effusive. “Every-
body can now feel much safer than the day I took office,” he declared on
Twitter. “There is no longer a Nuclear Threat from North Korea.”
In fact, the summit had achieved little, and in the months that fol-
lowed, negotiations remained deadlocked. The lack of progress be-
came clear to all at a second summit, held in Hanoi in February 2019.
The meeting ended abruptly, without the parties issuing a joint state-
ment. A few months later, the two leaders appeared together once
JUNG H. PAK is SK-Korea Foundation Chair in Korea Studies at the Brookings Institution.
She is the author of Becoming Kim Jong Un: A Former CIA Officer’s Insights Into North
Korea’s Enigmatic Young Dictator (Ballantine Books, 2020), from which this essay is adapted.
What Kim Wants
more, this time in the demilitarized zone that separates North Korea
and South Korea. But it was little more than a photo op, aimed at
keeping up the appearance of progress.
The show now seems to have gone on an extended hiatus, and it’s not
clear whether there will ever be a third season or if it has already reached
an unsatisfying end. The Trump administration continues to insist on a
narrative of progress, which the White House narrowly defines as the
absence of nuclear and intercontinental ballistic missile testing on Kim’s
part. But in the meantime, the Kim regime has been enriching uranium,
expanding its long-range missile bases, developing new ballistic missiles,
and upgrading its nuclear-weapons-related facilities. The White House
credits its strategy of “maximum pressure”—the use of diplomatic, eco-
nomic, and military means to constrain North Korea’s ability to generate
funds for its nuclear weapons program—with bringing Kim to the nego-
tiating table. But the sanctions infrastructure has eroded. North Korea
has adapted evasion techniques. Its top trading partner, China, has loos-
ened its enforcement of sanctions, seeking regional stability over denu-
clearization. And the Trump administration itself relaxed elements of its
policy in order to maintain Kim’s interest in diplomacy. As maximum
pressure has morphed into maximum flexibility, Kim seems to have con-
cluded that provocation and passive-aggressive intransigence are enough
to secure his country’s relevance and independence and his own survival.
In short, the North Korean threat still very much exists, and the
Kim regime is determined to stay capable of putting the United States
and its allies at risk. If Trump’s gambit achieved anything, it was to
clarify that Washington and its allies should not seek to make Kim
feel more secure and emboldened by making concessions. Rather,
they should focus on altering Kim’s calculations in such a way that he
comes to see having nuclear weapons not as an indispensable asset but
as an unacceptable risk to his survival. Doing so requires understand-
ing what makes Kim tick and, perhaps more important, the incentives
that structure his decision-making. It also requires the United States
and its partners to remain clear about their chief objective: the com-
plete dismantling of North Korea’s nuclear weapons arsenal.
UNDERSTANDING KIM
Since inheriting his leadership role from his father, Kim Jong Il, in
2011, Kim Jong Un has taken ownership of the country’s nuclear pro-
gram. He sees his country’s military programs as symbols of prestige
May/June 2020 97
Jung H. Pak
and progress and has pegged to them his personal legacy and that of
the Kim family dynasty. Moreover, he has elevated and embedded
nuclear weapons in both the popular consciousness and the ideologi-
cal, physical, and cultural landscape, enshrining them in North Ko-
rea’s constitution and linking them to the country’s prosperity.
Pyongyang wields its nuclear weapons to deter a U.S. attack and to
conduct coercive diplomacy—including the use of limited violence—
to weaken Washington’s alliances with Tokyo and Seoul, retain inde-
pendence of action from Beijing, and maintain North Korea’s leverage
and strategic relevance amid wealthier and more powerful neighbors.
Kim has manufactured and exploited crises by taking provocative
steps, such as threatening to test a hydrogen bomb over the Pacific
Ocean, and he has cleverly used the perception of the regime’s unpre-
dictability and volatility to extract economic and political concessions.
U.S. officials sometimes speak of Kim as if he were an irrational
hothead determined to start a war with the United States. After Kim
tested a hydrogen bomb in September 2017, Nikki Haley, then the
U.S. ambassador to the United Nations, warned that the North Ko-
rean leader was “begging for war,” and James Mattis, then the U.S.
defense secretary, pledged “a massive military response” to any further
threats. Two months later, after Kim tested an intercontinental bal-
listic missile, U.S. Senator Lindsey Graham, Republican of South
Carolina, fumed that Washington would not “let this crazy man in
North Korea have the capability to hit the homeland.” Such language
was probably an effort to warn Pyongyang about the consequences of
its actions, to press Beijing to use its clout to rein in Kim, and to as-
sure allies. But it also revealed a belief that Kim is irrational and reck-
less, a notion that has stubbornly clung to discussions about him since
he took the reins in 2011. That belief conflates capabilities with inten-
tions and assumes a strategic intent—that Kim seeks a nuclear war
with the United States—that almost certainly does not exist.
Over the years, the U.S. intelligence community has firmly con-
cluded that Kim is rational and that his primary purposes for having
nuclear weapons are deterring rivals, maintaining his country’s inter-
national status, and securing his regime’s survival. Kim is most likely
to use his nuclear weapons against the United States or a U.S. ally
only if he assesses that an attack on his country is imminent. Kim’s
personal stamp on the program, the regime’s public celebration of its
various technical milestones, and the promotion of scientists and
What Kim Wants
Desk job: Kim watching a missile launch in Pyongyang, September 2017

technicians involved in it all suggest that nuclear weapons are a source
of great domestic pride and a vital part of Kim’s image as a responsible
head of state, which in recent years he has worked to burnish.
In his 2019 New Year’s address, Kim wore a suit and tie, as he has
since 2017, in place of the dark Mao-style jacket he opted for in earlier
years. For the first time, he delivered the address while seated com-
fortably in an overstuffed leather chair as opposed to standing stiffly
at a massive lectern. His appearance reinforced the speech’s tone and
message: Kim is a modern leader—calm, relatable, professional. Post-
ings on official social media accounts regularly show him smiling
alongside his stylish wife and attending summits with other global
leaders. The message is clear: Kim is not an immature oddball but
rather an old hand at negotiations, respected by his peers abroad.
Nevertheless, although Kim is just as rational as other leaders and
shares their desire to be seen as a player on the world stage, his incen-
tive structure and threat perceptions do not necessarily resemble
theirs. In the minds of well-meaning peace activists and academics
KCNA / REUT E RS
encouraged by Kim’s turn to diplomacy, North Korea has always

wanted a security guarantee from the United States, and its develop-
ment of nuclear weapons is a reaction to the perceived threat that
May/June 2020 99
Jung H. Pak
Washington poses to Pyongyang. Some scholars also insist that Kim

wants to be a great economic reformer; according to the historian
John Delury, Kim wants “North Korea to become a normal East Asian
economy” and seeks to “catch up with and integrate into the region.”
In this view, what North Korea re-
ally wants is peace and prosperity. In
Kim does not want a reality, the regime requires a hostile
“normal” security outside world to justify its diversion of
environment; he wants to scarce resources into military pro-
preserve his garrison state. grams, to be able to cast blame on oth-
ers for the problems in the country’s
economy, and to maintain the founda-
tional myth that the Kim family is the sole protector of North Korea’s
existence. The historian Sheila Miyoshi Jager has argued that since
1950, when North Korea invaded South Korea, the regime’s main stra-
tegic goal has been not peace but “the disruption of peace.” The goal
of its propaganda and massive indoctrination efforts is to continually
stoke fear of the United States.
Kim does not want a “normal” security environment; he wants to
preserve his garrison state. He trusts only himself to safeguard North
Korea’s security and his own survival: after all, even allies such as
China and Russia chose to normalize relations with South Korea and
have signed on to UN sanctions against North Korea. He puts little
faith in the democratic governments of his rivals. The United States
holds presidential elections every four years, and South Korea elects a
president who is limited to a single five-year term: Who knows whether
either government would stick to any deal it offered? Trump’s 2018
withdrawal from the Iran nuclear deal provided yet another piece of
evidence for Kim that Washington is a fickle and unreliable partner.
Kim doesn’t trust his own people, either, and fears the influx of
information from outside his propaganda machine that would ac-
company regional economic integration. That is why he has tight-
ened borders and instituted draconian punishments for those who
attempt to defect, engage in unsanctioned market activities, or dare
to consume South Korean soap operas, films, books, or music. In ad-
dition to these defensive measures, Kim has created a closed-off in-
tranet that substitutes for the global Internet and has encouraged the
development of a consumer culture around domestically produced
luxury goods and services. For example, in recent years, the regime
PREPARE TO SERVE A GREATER CAUSE
MASTER OF ARTS IN INTERNATIONAL AFFAIRS AND LEADERSHIP
The M.A. in International Affairs and Leadership empowers graduates to be future

leaders in the global arena by establishing a dynamic and active learning environment
led by senior international affairs professionals from the public and private sector.
For more information, visit

mccaininstitute.org/maprogram
[email protected]
(202)601-4296 | (480)965-8563
Diplomacy Communications
Leadership
Health Equity Security
Sustainability Go Human Rights
anywhere
from
Miami
MASTER OF ARTS IN INTERNATIONAL ADMINISTRATION (MAIA)

>> 30 credit hours, NO GRE required >> Tuition assistance available
for qualifying students
>> Classes offered evenings, summers, and
online to accommodate your work schedule >> 1-year option for full-time students
[email protected] | 305-284-8783 | www.maia.miami.edu
Jung H. Pak
has introduced online shopping portals for smartphone users, offer-

ing high-end clothing, women’s accessories, cosmetics, and specialty
food items. And since he came to power, Kim has ramped up a mas-
sive building boom, constructing ski resorts, amusement parks, a new
airport, a dolphinarium, restaurants, and high-rise luxury apartment
buildings to showcase North Korea’s modernity.
TOUGH GUY
Despite having many reasons to feel insecure, Kim has grown more
confident since he took power. His faith in his ability to provoke at-
tention and then de-escalate and avoid punishment has been rein-
forced by his success in securing summits with Trump without giving
an inch on his nuclear weapons program. His reading of the events of
recent years is that in a crisis, his arsenal would deter Washington
from taking military action, Beijing and Moscow would not abandon
him, and the United States and China would rein in any aggressive
impulses on the part of Japan or South Korea and restrain those two
countries from developing their own nuclear weapons.
Armed with these assumptions, Kim will probably continue to
carry out limited acts of aggression, using cyberweapons and other
coercive tools to keep North Korea’s rivals off balance. Since the failed
Hanoi summit, Kim’s Plan B has taken shape: cast North Korea as the
aggrieved party and put pressure on Washington to budge. In an April
2019 speech to his country’s Supreme People’s Assembly, Kim touted
his strong personal relationship with Trump and the importance of
dialogue and negotiations but also declared that “the United States
will not be able to move us one iota nor get what it wants at all, even
if it sits with us a hundred times, a thousand times.” He warned of a
“bleak and very dangerous” situation if the United States does not
change its “hostile” policies toward North Korea.
He soon took steps to back up his tough talk. In July 2019, North
Korea’s state media reported that Kim had inspected a newly built
submarine that might be intended for launching ballistic missiles
and had instructed his officials to “steadily and reliably increase the
national defense.” Three months later, he presided over a series of
missile tests, including one involving a ballistic missile launched
from a sea-based platform. A couple of months later, in December,
Kim defiantly declared that “the world will witness a new strategic
weapon” and hinted at a return to nuclear tests. Kim’s efforts to diversify
What Kim Wants
his military’s arsenal, develop a second-strike nuclear capability, up-

grade his military’s conventional armaments and training, and im-
prove surveillance and reconnaissance suggest that he wants more
than the mere ability to deter rivals. They indicate that Kim may
have adopted a more expansive vision of how to use his nuclear and
missile programs: to advance offensive objectives, such as fostering
conditions conducive to the reunification of the Korean Peninsula on
terms favorable to his regime.
Still, Kim remains vulnerable. “North Korea’s fundamental liabili-
ties are systemic and enduring,” the North Korea expert Jonathan Pol-
lack has argued, and “the vision of a self-reliant country bears little
relation to North Korea’s actual needs.” The consequences of the re-
gime’s actions and the country’s isolation are taking a toll. Thanks to
sanctions, its pool of trading partners has shrunk to essentially one:
China, which accounts for more than 90 percent of North Korea’s
trade. In 2017, North Korea’s number two trading partner, India, ac-
counted for only slightly more than $7 million worth of imports and
exports, a decrease of ten percent from the prior year. Russia was in a
distant third place, with around $2 million worth, a 70 percent de-
crease from a year earlier. Also in 2017, trade between the two Koreas
plummeted to about $1 million, down from $333 million in 2016.
North Korea’s economy shrank by about five percent in 2018, reducing
it to a level comparable to that of 1997, when the country was in the
midst of a devastating famine. And reports that trickled out of the
country in early 2019 suggested that the regime was ceasing or sus-
pending activity and production at government-backed factories and
mines amid restrictions on flows of oil into the country. Meanwhile,
Kim is trying to squeeze more money out of the North Korean labor-
ers the regime sends to work overseas.
Kim needs to stimulate North Korea’s economic development,
since he is probably planning to be in power for the next few decades
and wants to pass down a stable, thriving, nuclear-armed North Korea
to one of his children. But amid rising expectations (especially among
young people, who are more individualistic and market-oriented than
their elders), the crippling effects of sanctions and isolation will make
it hard for Kim to deliver on his promises and rhetoric. Moreover, the
regime’s closing of North Korea’s borders to tourism and trade to stop
the spread of COVID-19 has dramatically reduced the country’s reve-
nue streams, just when it can least afford it.
May/June 2020 103
Jung H. Pak
EYES ON THE PRIZE

To ramp up the pressure, sharpen the choices that Kim has to make,
and alter his risk calculus, the United States and its regional allies
must undertake coordinated and consistent actions to convince him
that nuclear weapons make his survival less, rather than more, secure.
To do so, Washington and its allies—especially Tokyo and Seoul—
need to stay on the same page. Any real or perceived fissures or doubts
about U.S. credibility and commitments will play to Kim’s advantage,
allowing him to disrupt regional stability and pull off attacks that
would fall just below the threshold for retaliation.
First and foremost, the allies must reaffirm that a durable peace in
Northeast Asia requires a nuclear-free North Korea. In pursuit of that
objective, the United States, Japan, and South Korea should develop
a menu of options that they are prepared to jointly execute to mini-
mize the North Korean threat, giving Beijing the choice of either co-
operating or getting out of the way. The list could include covert
actions against North Korea and also overt steps, such as enhancing
joint military drills to prepare for a range of potential North Korean
provocations. Meanwhile, Japan and South Korea could strengthen
their own security by reaffirming and implementing their 2016 agree-
ment on military intelligence sharing, which in the past year has been
threatened by a trade dispute between the two countries.
The United States and its partners also need to tighten the sanc-
tions regime, which has eroded in the aftermath of the failed Trump-
Kim summits. The UN Panel of Experts, the group in charge of
monitoring the implementation of the sanctions, has been document-
ing serious violations and the clever tactics that North Korea uses to
evade the sanctions. According to the panel’s March 2019 report, Sin-
gaporean companies have knowingly shipped banned luxury items to
North Korea, and a Chinese businessman helped transfer a number of
Mercedes-Benz vehicles—possibly including the Mercedes-Maybach
S-class limousine that Kim flaunted at the Hanoi summit. The panel
has also reported that North Korea has violated sanctions by conduct-
ing unauthorized ship-to-ship transfers of petroleum; in August 2019,
the United States blacklisted a number of Chinese entities for facili-
tating such illegal transfers. Meanwhile, representatives of the Kim
regime’s financial institutions continue to travel freely and do busi-
ness in a number of countries, including China, Russia, Syria, and the
United Arab Emirates. The panel’s August 2019 report detailed how
What Kim Wants
the regime has become more sophisticated in its manipulation of

cyberspace, generating as much as $2 billion in ill-gotten gains by
launching attacks on foreign financial institutions and cryptocur-
rency exchanges. The regime has also made money through email
phishing scams and ransomware, with
which attackers hold hostage the data Washington should restore
of individuals or organizations until the
targets pay up. Such violations have the position of special envoy
helped keep the Kim regime stay afloat for human rights in North
and fund its nuclear weapons program. Korea, which the Trump
Washington should also augment
its diplomacy by starting a round of administration eliminated.
five-party talks with China, Japan, Rus-
sia, and South Korea. Such a group would signal a unity of purpose,
and it could agree on a list of benefits that Pyongyang should receive
if it decides to abandon its nuclear weapons program. The existence
of such a group would also help assuage Pyongyang’s concerns about
whether any deal it made would survive political changes in the
democratic countries involved.
Another pressure point that needs attention is the Kim regime’s
domestic repression. Washington should restore the position of spe-
cial envoy for human rights in North Korea, which the Trump ad-
ministration eliminated in 2017. The envoy should engage with
North Korean officials, defectors, and nongovernmental human
rights organizations to craft strategies for improving the lives of the
North Korean people and supporting the development of their po-
litical freedoms and civil rights. Such steps are necessary for any
potential deal, since in order to verify that the regime was taking
promised steps toward denuclearization, scientists, technicians, and
military officials would have to feel free to provide accurate data
without fear of reprisal from the regime.
Meanwhile, the United States should invest in programs that allow
outside information to penetrate North Korea, a process that helps
loosen the regime’s grip on its people and creates pressure from the
inside. As the scholar Jieun Baek wrote in these pages in 2017, “Pyong-
yang considers foreign information of any kind a threat and expends
great effort keeping it out. The regime’s primary fear is that exposure
to words, images, and sounds from the outside world could make
North Koreans disillusioned with the state of affairs in their own
May/June 2020 105
Jung H. Pak
country, which could lead them to desire—or even demand—change.”

Washington should feed North Korean citizens’ hunger for news, soap
operas, documentaries, and radio programs. Working with South Ko-
rea, the United States should help North Korean defectors develop
programming and partner with technology companies to pursue new
ways to produce and distribute such content.
There are no silver bullets, and these policies would have to be sus-
tained over time before they showed any demonstrable effect. They
would require disciplined U.S. leadership and a strong international
coalition; they would not be dramatic or made for television. Although
the United States should keep the door open for dialogue with North
Korea, there shouldn’t be any more glitzy spectacles that reduce the
pressure on Kim without requiring any real concessions on his part.
Until it is clear that Kim is willing to consider serious negotiations
over his nuclear weapons program and meaningful engagement with
the United States and his neighbors—and not just hollow summitry—
Washington should hold off on any grand gestures.∂
The End of Grand
Strategy
America Must Think Small
Daniel W. Drezner, Ronald R. Krebs, and
Randall Schweller
W
hatever else U.S. President Donald Trump has done in
the field of international relations, he can claim one signal
accomplishment: making grand strategy interesting again.
For decades, American foreign policy elites in both parties embraced
liberal internationalism, the idea that Washington should sustain and
expand a global order that promoted open markets, open polities, and
multilateral institutions. But Trump has repeatedly attacked the key
pillars of liberal internationalism, from questioning the value of NATO
to blowing up trade agreements to insulting allies. When, in July 2017,
his national security team met with him in a windowless Pentagon
meeting room known as “the Tank” to educate him about the virtues
of the liberal international order, Trump blasted them as “a bunch of
dopes and babies,” according to The Washington Post.
Trump’s disruptions have forced foreign policy analysts to question
first principles for the first time in decades. With bedrock assumptions
about liberal internationalism dislodged, the debate over U.S. grand
strategy has experienced a renaissance. New voices have entered the fray,
ranging from far-left progressives to populist nationalists on the right.
DANIEL W. DREZNER is Professor of International Politics at the Fletcher School of Law
and Diplomacy at Tufts University.
RONALD R. KREBS is Beverly and Richard Fink Professor in the Liberal Arts and Profes-
sor of Political Science at the University of Minnesota.
RANDALL SCHWELLER is Professor of Political Science and Director of the Program for
the Study of Realist Foreign Policy at Ohio State University.
They are contributors to the forthcoming Oxford Handbook of Grand Strategy, edited by
Thierry Balzacq and Ronald R. Krebs.
May/June 2020 107
Advocates of retrenchment and restraint have received a fuller hear-

ing, and unusual alliances have formed to advance common agendas.
Yet even as these debates have flowered, the very concept of grand
strategy has become a chimera. A grand strategy is a road map for
how to match means with ends. It works best on predictable terrain—
in a world where policymakers enjoy a clear understanding of the
distribution of power, a solid domestic consensus about national goals
and identity, and stable political and national security institutions. In
2020, none of that exists anymore.
The changing nature of power, along with its diffusion in the inter-
national system, has made it much more difficult for the United States
to shape its destiny. The rise of multiculturalism and the populist
backlash against it have eroded shared narratives and a common iden-
tity. Political polarization has hollowed out the country’s domestic
political institutions, meaning that each new administration takes
office bent on reversing whatever its predecessor did. Antiestablish-
ment fever has debased policy debate and loosened the checks on
executive power that generate consistency.
We write as three scholars who do not agree on much when it comes
to politics, policy, or ideology. We do agree, however, that these new
factors have rendered any exercise in crafting or pursuing a grand strat-
egy costly and potentially counterproductive. None will be effective,
and none will be long standing. Rather than quarrel over contending
strategic doctrines, academics, pundits, think tankers, and policymakers
should focus on more pragmatic forms of problem solving. From mili-
tary intervention to foreign aid, policy made on a case-by-case basis will
be at least as good, and likely better, than policy derived from grand
strategic commitments. To debate grand strategy is to indulge in
navel-gazing while the world burns. So it is time to operate without one.
POWER PROBLEMS
A successful grand strategy must be grounded in an accurate perception
of the global distribution of power. One that grossly exaggerates a foe or
underestimates a threat is not long for this world, because it will trigger
policy choices that backfire. Indeed, one reason so many have attacked
the United States’ strategy of liberal internationalism over the past dec-
ade is that they believe the strategy failed to appreciate the rise of China.
Power in global politics is no longer what it once was. The ability
of states to exercise power, the way they exercise power, the purposes
The best-laid plans: a U.S. soldier in Zhari District, Afghanistan, July 2010
to which they put power, and who holds power—all have fundamen-
tally changed. The result is an emerging world of nonpolarity and
disorder. And that is not a world where grand strategy works well.
Many things remain the same, of course. People still define their
identities largely in terms of nationality. Countries still seek control
over crucial resources and access to vital sea-lanes and clash over ter-
ritory and regional influence. They still want to maximize their wealth,
influence, security, prestige, and autonomy. But amassing territory is
no longer the prize it used to be. Today’s great powers seem deter-
mined to do two things more than anything else: get rich and avoid
catastrophic military contests. They understand that states move up
the ladder of international power and prestige by building knowledge-
based economies and by promoting technological innovation and con-
nectedness within global networks.
C H R I ST O P H BA NG E RT / L AI F / R E DU X
Meanwhile, power is becoming more about the ability to disrupt, block,

disable, veto, and destroy than it is about the ability to construct, enable,
repair, and build. Consider the “anti-access/area-denial” (A2/AD) capa-
bilities that China is pursuing—mainly cyberwarfare techniques and
antisatellite weapons—with the goal of raising the risks to U.S. forces
operating in the western Pacific. Iran is believed to be doing the same
thing in the Persian Gulf, using submarines, antiship missiles, and sophis-
ticated mines in an effort to make the area a no-go zone for the U.S. Navy.
May/June 2020 109
When power is used for constructive purposes, it is becoming increas-

ingly issue specific, unable to translate from one domain into another.
Military power rarely achieves national goals or fixes problems anymore;
interventions usually only make bad situations worse. The yawning out-
come gap between the first and the sec-
With traditional power ond Gulf wars makes this plain. Power
simply isn’t as fungible as it used to be.
no longer buying the No wonder, for example, that the Trump
influence it once did, global administration’s efforts to hinge security
cooperation will be in and intelligence cooperation on renego-
tiated trade deals have fallen flat.
short supply. Finally, the diffusion of power
throughout the international system is
creating a nonpolar world. Many point to the rise of China and other
competitors to say that the world is returning to multipolarity (or to
bipolarity within a more multipolar setting), but that view understates
the tectonic shift currently underway. International relations will no
longer be dominated by one, two, or even several great powers. Because
economic and military power no longer yield influence as reliably as
they once did, the top dogs have lost their bite. The weak and the mighty
suffer the same paralysis and enjoy the same freedom of action. More-
over, new actors, from local militias to nongovernmental organizations
to large corporations, each possessing and exerting various kinds of power,
increasingly compete with states. Relatively few states represented in
the UN can claim a monopoly on force within their territorial borders.
Violent nonstate actors are no longer minor players. Ethnic groups,
warlords, youth gangs, terrorists, militias, insurgents, and transnational
criminal organizations—all are redefining power across the globe.
These changes in power are producing a world marked by entropy.
A world populated by dozens of power centers will prove extremely
difficult to navigate and control. In the new global disorder, even
countries with massive economies and militaries may not be able to
get others to do what they want. It is essentially impossible for mod-
ern states, no matter how militarily and politically powerful, to influ-
ence violent groups that prosper in ungoverned spaces or online. Not
only do such actors offer no clear target to threaten or destroy, but
many are also motivated by nonnegotiable concerns, such as the estab-
lishment of a caliphate or their own separate state. Worse still, vio-
lence is for many a source of social cohesion.
“If you want the superpower of solving
better problems, read this book.”
— Eric Schmidt, former CEO, Google
Have you ever worked hard on something, only to find out you were focusing
on the wrong problem entirely? Most people have. In What’s Your Problem?,
author Thomas Wedell-Wedellsborg provides the help you need with a
three-step method—Frame, Reframe, Move Forward—so that you can solve
the right problems and tackle your biggest challenges.
FOR MORE VISIT STORE.HBR.ORG
AVAILABLE WHEREVER BOOKS ARE SOLD
With traditional power no longer buying the influence it once did,

global order and cooperation will be in short supply. International
relations will increasingly consist of messy ad hoc arrangements. The
danger comes not from fire—shooting wars among the great powers
or heated confrontations over human rights, intellectual property, or
currency manipulation. The danger comes instead from ice—frozen
conflicts over geopolitical, monetary, trade, or environmental issues.
Given the immense costs of warfare, great powers that cannot resolve
their disputes at the negotiating table no longer have the option—at
least if they are rational—of settling them on the battlefield. When
political arrangements do materialize, they will be short lived. Like
flocking birds or schooling fish, they promise to lose their shape, only
to form again after a delay.
Grand strategy is not well suited to an entropic world. Grand stra-
tegic thinking is linear. The world today is one of interaction and com-
plexity, wherein the most direct path between two points is not a
straight line. A disordered, cluttered, and fluid realm is precisely one
that does not recognize grand strategy’s supposed virtue: a practical,
durable, and consistent plan for the long term. To operate successfully
in such an environment, actors must constantly change their strategies.
A NATION DIVIDED
A sustainable grand strategy must also rest on a shared worldview
among key political constituencies. If each new government enters
office with a radically different understanding of global challenges
and opportunities, no strategy will last long. Each new government
will tear up its predecessor’s policies, shredding the very idea of a
grand strategy. Containment endured because every U.S. president
from Harry Truman to Ronald Reagan largely adhered to its underly-
ing vision of global affairs. Bill Clinton, George W. Bush, and Barack
Obama all embraced variations on liberal internationalism.
Such a consensus no longer exists. Over the last half century, across
the West, there has been rising skepticism of the virtues, and even the
reality, of nations—of “imagined communities,” in the words of the
political scientist Benedict Anderson, each unified by a shared narra-
tive. That skepticism arose from a good place: a growing awareness
that dominant narratives can be repressive, that they often reflect the
interests and experiences of the powerful and silence the voices of
communities on the margins. Beginning in the early 1970s, in the
Vietnam War’s dying days, multiculturalism began to hold sway, at

least in the United States. More than just a strategy to manage diver-
sity in a fair and inclusive way, the concept was grounded in mounting
doubt that societies should be rooted in some common identity.
Some effects of this cultural revolution, such as the explosion of
weeks and months designated to celebrate specific ethnic and racial
heritages, strike most Americans as innocuous and even good. But
one consequence is particularly problematic: Americans today lack
a common national narrative. For good reason, few speak any longer
of the assimilative “melting pot.” As the historian Jill Lepore la-
mented in these pages in 2019, historians stopped writing about the
nation decades ago. Listen to any Democratic debate this presiden-
tial campaign season, and you will see how uncomfortable Ameri-
can politicians on the liberal left have become with the rhetoric of
American nationalism.
Yet nationalism has proved an enduring force, as has people’s de-
sire for a shared narrative to make sense of their world. Cultural
conservatives in the United States have long mined this vein. They
have sought to define a cultural core, manifest in such books as The
Dictionary of Cultural Literacy, in which the academic E. D. Hirsch,
Jr., attempted to list the figures, events, and works that “every Amer-
ican needs to know.” They have waged war against bilingual educa-
tion, and they have led a decades-long campaign—successful to date
in over half of American states—to declare English the official lan-
guage. They have charged that the United States is coming apart at
the seams, blaming new immigrants for refusing to buy into the na-
tional creed. Liberals have vacillated on American exceptionalism, as
in 2009, when Obama declared, “I believe in American exceptional-
ism, just as I suspect that the Brits believe in British exceptionalism
and the Greeks believe in Greek exceptionalism.” Conservatives, by
contrast, have leaned into it. Unlike the Democrats, Trump is very
comfortable with nationalist language—although he deploys it in a
manner that excludes half the country.
Among the victims of a fractured national narrative has been grand
strategy. Grand strategy rests on a security narrative that sets out the
main protagonists of global politics, tells a story about what those ac-
tors have done and will do, and depicts the global backdrop against
which events will take place. Debates over contending grand strategies
are typically debates over one or more of these narrative elements.
May/June 2020 113
Those advocating deep engagement, for instance, believe that Ameri-

can and global security are indivisible, whereas those calling for re-
straint believe the opposite. In the absence of the rhetorical tropes
that a shared national narrative supplies, crafting a grand strategy that
can resonate with diverse constituen-
cies becomes impossible. It becomes
Among the victims of a harder to implement a particular strat-
fractured national egy across various policy areas and to
narrative has been grand sustain that strategy over time.
strategy. One manifestation of the narrative
divide in the United States is the stark
polarization that has come to define
American politics, and not just on hot-button domestic issues. Across
a wide array of foreign policy questions—climate change, counterter-
rorism, immigration, the Middle East, the use of force—Americans
are divided along party lines. That is no environment for a useful
debate about grand strategy. For one thing, it eviscerates the utility of
expert feedback. Political scientists have found that an expert consen-
sus can alter public attitudes about issues on which the public was not
already polarized, such as how to respond to China’s currency ma-
nipulation. When the public is already split along party lines, how-
ever, as it is on climate change, polarization renders an elite consensus
worse than useless. Expert opinions from nonpartisan sources simply
make partisans double down on their preexisting beliefs.
Political polarization also makes learning difficult. For grand strat-
egy to improve, there has to be agreement on what failed and why. In
a polarized political environment, the side that fears being held re-
sponsible will not accept the premise that its policy failed until long
after the fact. Republicans, for example, insisted that the Iraq war was
a triumph for years after it was obvious that the United States had lost
the peace. To support their leader, partisans have a persistent incen-
tive to bend the truth to fit their arguments, robbing the foreign pol-
icy discussion of the agreed-on facts that ordinarily frame debate.
Most important, polarization means that any party’s grand strategy
will last only as long as that party controls the executive branch. Be-
cause Congress and the courts have granted the president a near mo-
nopoly on the articulation of the national security narrative, a single
president can radically shift the country’s grand strategy. And so can
the next president from the other party.
THE PEOPLE VS. THE EXPERTS

Grand strategy requires a robust marketplace of ideas, backed by
sturdy institutions, to help policymakers correct course over time.
Even an enduring grand strategy must cope with changes in the stra-
tegic environment, and even well-considered strategies will result in
policy missteps that need to be reversed. The United States made its
share of foreign policy errors during the Cold War, but the push and
pull between the establishment and its critics and between the execu-
tive branch and Congress eventually reined in the worst excesses of
American activism and prevented the overembrace of restraint.
Over the last half century, once-stable structures of authority have
eroded, and the American public has grown increasingly skeptical of the
federal government, the press, and every other major public institution.
Americans’ distrust extends to the foreign policy establishment, and on
this, it is hard to blame them. U.S. foreign policy elites largely endorsed
the use of force in Afghanistan, Iraq, and Libya, and none of those in-
terventions could be called a success. As revealed in “The Afghanistan
Papers,” a collection of government documents published by The Wash-
ington Post late last year, for over a decade, civilian and military leaders
lied to the public about how the war in Afghanistan was going. The
2008 financial crisis and the Arab Spring caught foreign policy elites
unprepared. Clearly, some healthy skepticism of experts is warranted.
Too much skepticism, however, can be corrosive. Calling into doubt
the value of foreign policy expertise undermines a healthy market-
place of ideas on grand strategy. As the journalist Chris Hayes warned
in Twilight of the Elites, “If the experts as a whole are discredited, we
are faced with an inexhaustible supply of quackery.” Furthermore,
new entrants are advancing their arguments in part by bashing the
preexisting consensus on grand strategy. They are exploiting narra-
tives about failed foreign policies of the past to argue that they could
hardly do worse. As Trump told voters at a campaign rally in 2016,
“The experts are terrible. They say, ‘Donald Trump needs a foreign
policy adviser.’ . . . Would it be worse than what we’re doing now?”
The death of respect for expertise is just one element of the biggest
political story of the twenty-first century: the proliferation of right-
wing populist nationalism as part of mainstream politics across the
West. It is no flash in the pan, because its rise is rooted partly in eco-
nomic dislocation but equally, if not more, in the politics of cultural
reaction. And populism renders grand strategy moot.
May/June 2020 115
At the heart of all forms of populism lies a simple image of politics.

The populist leader asserts the existence of a morally pure people, set
in contrast to corrupt elites, and he claims that he alone knows the
people’s will. Populist politics therefore tilts authoritarian. In sweep-
ing away supposedly corrupt elites and institutions, the populist
leader weakens all forces standing in his way. Asserting his unmedi-
ated line to the people, the populist leader claims to represent them
better than any political process can. Critics becomes enemies, consti-
tutional constraints become obstacles to democracy, and the tyranny
of the majority becomes a virtue, not a vice.
Populism is not hospitable to grand strategy. First, populism accen-
tuates internal divisions. Polarizing by design, it narrows the sphere of
the supposedly authentic people so that, within the nation as a territo-
rial and legal entity, there can be no unity. Second, populist politicians
regularly mobilize the people in righteous anger against enemies.
When heated rhetoric is in the air, emotional responses to the crisis of
the day threaten to overtake rational strategy. Strategy becomes less
supple, as leaders have trouble pursuing conciliatory tactics in a climate
of affront and retribution. Finally, populism concentrates authority in
the charismatic leader. It disempowers bureaucrats and institutions
that can check fickle rulers and block extreme decisions. Policy in a
populist regime is thus a reflection of the leader—whether of his ideo-
logical commitments or his whims. If the populist leader does pursue
something akin to a grand strategy, it will not outlive his rule.
WE COME TO BURY GRAND STRATEGY

Grand strategy is dead. The radical uncertainty of nonpolar global
politics makes it less useful, even dangerous. Even if it were helpful
in organizing the United States’ response to global challenges today,
an increasingly divided domestic polity has made it harder to imple-
ment a coherent and consistent grand strategy. Popular distrust of
expertise has corroded sensible debate over historical lessons and pro-
spective strategies. Populism has eviscerated the institutional checks
and balances that keep strategy from swinging violently.
The nation’s strategic thinkers, however, remain in the early stages
of grieving for grand strategy. The raging debate over contending
strategic options suggests that many are still in denial. The ire di-
rected at the Trump administration for its lack of strategic thinking
implies that many are stuck on anger. We ourselves differ on whether
to mourn or to celebrate the demise of grand strategy, but we agree

that it is high time we moved on to the final stage of the grieving
process: acceptance.
Moving forward without grand strategy requires embracing two
principles: decentralization and incrementalism. Highly uncertain
conditions call for decentralized but mutually coordinated decision-
making networks. The corporate sector has learned that managers
must avoid the temptation to control every decision and instead fig-
ure out how to steer innovation, by shaping the environment within
which choices emerge. Smart corporations decentralize authority and
responsibility, encourage employees to address problems through
teamwork, and take an informal approach to assigning tasks and re-
sponsibilities. Governments should organize their foreign policy ma-
chinery in the same way. Appreciating regional knowledge and
trusting expert feedback is a better way to handle trouble spots and
emergent problems and to defuse crises before they metastasize.
Organizational change must go hand in hand with a cultural one:
toward prizing the virtues of bottom-up experimentation. Grand
strategy wagers that careful planning at the center produces the best
results. It presumes that the costs of being too flexible outweigh those
of being too rigid. But that is unwise when change can occur rapidly
and unpredictably. Incrementalism is the safer bet. It does not require
putting all your eggs in one basket. It cannot achieve victory in one
fell swoop, but it does avoid disastrous losses. It allows for swift adap-
tation to changing circumstances. In practice, it would mean devolv-
ing responsibility from Washington to theater commanders, special
envoys, and subject-matter experts. In other words, it means taking
the exact opposite tack of so many past administrations, which con-
centrated ever more decision-making in the White House.
Aspiring national security advisers should give up competing for
the title of the next George Kennan. Crafting a durable successor to
containment is neither important nor possible for the near future.
Improving U.S. foreign policy performance is. Given the recent rec-
ord of U.S. foreign policy, that goal doesn’t seem half bad.∂
May/June 2020 117
Britain Adrift
The United Kingdom’s Search for a Post-
Brexit Role
G
“ reat Britain has lost an empire and has not yet found a role.”
What might have appeared as an unexceptional observation
by former U.S. Secretary of State Dean Acheson, made dur-
ing a speech at West Point in December 1962, created an uproar in the
United Kingdom. London’s Daily Express spoke of a “stab in the back.”
British Prime Minister Harold Macmillan felt compelled to defend
his country’s honor, writing in an open letter, “Mr. Acheson has fallen
into an error which has been made by quite a lot of people in the
course of the last four hundred years, including Philip of Spain,
Louis XIV, Napoleon, the Kaiser and Hitler.”
Why did Acheson’s comment hurt so much? The loss of empire was
accepted as part of the inexorable logic of decolonization, but with an
empire had come a set of strategic interests that required active en-
gagement across the globe, and now those were gone. Although many
saw the United Kingdom’s main task as adjusting to this loss, rather
than finding a replacement for it, Acheson’s taunt suggested that a
new role must be found. And so a search was set in motion for some
truly distinctive role that only the British could provide, one that
would be essential to the satisfactory functioning of the whole inter-
national system. Identifying this elusive role came to represent the
holy grail of British foreign policy.
The search for a distinctive role continues to this day, now in much
more trying circumstances. The two relationships that have defined
British foreign policy for decades—with Europe and with the United
States—are clouded by uncertainty, as a result of the United King-
dom’s deliberate decision to leave the EU and U.S. President Donald
LAWRENCE D. FREEDMAN is Professor Emeritus of War Studies at King’s College London.
Britain Adrift
Trump’s disdain for NATO and free trade. In a country that has always
celebrated alliances and partnerships, the government of British
Prime Minister Boris Johnson is now stressing independence as a vir-
tue in itself. But it has yet to answer the question of whether this in-
dependence will enable the United Kingdom to be less involved with
the world’s problems or more.
A SPECIAL FRIEND
When Acheson made his speech, the most obvious role for the United
Kingdom was as the United States’ junior partner. As two maritime
powers that both valued free trade, they had swapped positions in the
international hierarchy earlier in the century as the American economy
took off. In August 1941, seeking to encourage the United States to join
the war against Nazi Germany, British Prime Minister Winston
Churchill met with U.S. President Franklin Roosevelt to lay out a shared
vision for the postwar world, resulting in the Atlantic Charter. After the
war, the two countries sought to turn that vision into a reality, setting up
new institutions to manage international security, encourage open trade,
and deal with the Soviet threat. London appeared to be settling into its
role as a close supporter of and wise counselor to the United States, then
seen as brash and inexperienced but boasting the almighty dollar and
enormous military power. Without this “special relationship,” as it came
to be known, the United Kingdom’s strategic weight might well have
contracted almost as quickly as its imperial holdings.
The United Kingdom wished not only to influence how American
power was applied but also to get help in sustaining its own power.
Any thoughts of going it alone on the world stage evaporated with its
ill-fated Middle Eastern adventure of 1956, when a joint expedition
with France, in collusion with Israel, to reverse Egyptian President
Gamal Abdel Nasser’s nationalization of the Suez Canal was stopped
in its tracks by the Eisenhower administration. The French concluded
from this episode that they must strive for even more independence
from the United States. The British drew the opposite conclusion.
Macmillan sought to get even closer, reasoning that by doing so, the
United Kingdom would be more, rather than less, influential.
There was also a more practical matter. The United Kingdom had
developed its own nuclear weapons after 1945 not only because it
wanted to assert its independence but also because the United States
had broken off wartime cooperation. Macmillan worked hard to get
May/June 2020 119
nuclear cooperation back on track during the 1950s, now aiming for
interdependence as much as independence, and he succeeded in get-
ting the United States to agree to sell the United Kingdom Skybolt
missiles, which would allow its bombers to launch weapons away
from Soviet air defenses. Then, just before Acheson’s speech, the
Pentagon announced that it was canceling the Skybolt program.
The United Kingdom’s special relationship with the United States
now looked shaky, along with its nuclear deterrent. But the immedi-
ate crisis in transatlantic relations quickly passed: the White House
distanced itself from Acheson’s words, and at a summit later that
month in Nassau, the Bahamas, U.S. President John F. Kennedy
came to an agreement with Macmillan that the United Kingdom
could acquire Polaris submarine-launched missiles, which turned
out to be a much better deal.
Close cooperation in the nuclear and intelligence fields remained at
the heart of the special relationship, but what truly sustained it was a
succession of shared projects that reflected a common strategic per-
spective. After working together to win World War II and set up the
postwar institutions, they joined hands in conducting and ending
the Cold War. The British often failed in their attempts to influence
the Americans, and the two countries did not agree on everything—
even during the golden years of British Prime Minister Margaret
Thatcher and U.S. President Ronald Reagan. But the shared projects
provided a framework within which disagreements could be addressed.
After the collapse of the Soviet Union, the United Kingdom and the
United States embarked on a new set of joint undertakings: adapting
international institutions and practices to the new world order and pro-
moting liberal capitalism under the guise of globalization. Then came
9/11, after which British Prime Minister Tony Blair proclaimed that his
country would stand “shoulder to shoulder” with the United States in
the war on global terrorism. But these new ventures ran into trouble.
The 2008 global financial crisis undermined confidence in the economic
model the two countries were offering, and the disheartening interven-
tions in Afghanistan, Iraq, and Libya raised questions about their po-
litical judgment. On both sides of the Atlantic, people were growing
more skeptical about globalization and foreign interventions.
Further complicating the relationship, President Barack Obama
shifted the United States’ focus to the Asia-Pacific region, a process
that has continued under Trump. If the new big project is containing
Britain Adrift
Special relationship: Johnson and Trump in Biarritz, France, August 2019
China, it is one in which the interests of the two countries do not

wholly coincide and to which the United Kingdom could make only a
limited contribution. Trump, moreover, lacks his predecessors’ com-
mitment to NATO and free trade. The problem, therefore, is not that
the two countries no longer have a special relationship—the many ties
of language, culture, and history survive—but that they no longer
share a grand strategic project to work on. No wonder the British
foreign policy establishment is at a loss about what to do next.
EUROPEAN DREAMS
This is not the first time London has wondered about the future of its
relationship with Washington. The difference now is that it is doing so
after having abandoned Europe. After working with the European
powers to persuade the United States to commit to European security
I-IMAG ES / EYEVIN E / RE DUX
and form NATO in 1949, the United Kingdom failed to sign on to the
European Economic Community in 1957. Belatedly, Macmillan pushed
to join that group, a common market and customs union, to give a boost
to an economy that was lagging behind the rest of western Europe.
But his pursuit of the special relationship with the United States jeop-
ardized that effort. Weeks after the December 1962 missile deal with the
May/June 2020 121
United States in Nassau, French President Charles de Gaulle cited the

agreement as evidence of the United Kingdom’s innate Atlanticism as he
vetoed its application to join the European Economic Community. If
the British were let in, he claimed, “there would appear a colossal Atlan-
tic Community under American dependence and leadership, which
would soon completely swallow up the European Community.”
It took until 1973 before the United Kingdom was at last able to
join the group. By then, membership was not just about economics
but about foreign policy, too. U.S. President Richard Nixon’s 1971
decision to end the convertibility of the dollar to gold had under-
mined the Bretton Woods system of international financial exchange.
His withdrawal from Vietnam, meanwhile, renewed worry that the
United States would shirk its alliance commitments, and indeed,
Congress was angling to cut U.S. military deployments in Europe
by half. On top of that, the Watergate scandal seemed to be throwing
the American political system into chaos. London saw real advan-
tages in combining with the other major European powers to form a
powerful bloc that could act autonomously, free from the influence
of the United States. For a while, this seemed plausible, notably
when it came to the Middle East, where the Europeans took a less
pro-Israeli position than the United States did. By and large, how-
ever, differences in capabilities and priorities limited the extent to
which Europe spoke with one voice.
Where the EU, the successor to the European Economic Com-
munity, did prove strategically important was when it came to prog-
ress on democracy and the rule of law. Membership allowed
European countries escaping authoritarian regimes a way to confirm
their commitment to liberal values. In the 1980s, Greece, Portugal,
and Spain were all allowed to join after military rule in each country
ended, and beginning with a round of enlargement in 2004, the
same privilege was eventually afforded to eastern European coun-
tries emerging from communist rule.
The United Kingdom applauded and encouraged this expansion,
but the process changed the character of the organization. As the EU
grew, decision-making slowed. Even before the influx of new mem-
bers, common positions were becoming harder to find. In 1998, Blair
tried to make more of the EU’s defense and security potential when he
met with French President Jacques Chirac at the port of Saint-Malo.
In the declaration that resulted from their summit, the two leaders
NEW FROM UC PRESS
“It would be foolish not
to freak out over climate
change. But it would be sad
if that despair kept you from
working hard on this crisis,
not to mention enjoying life
on what is still a beautiful
planet. This book has some
wise strategies for finding a
useful balance.”
—Bill McKibben, author of Falter: Has the
Human Game Begun to Play Itself Out?
“Bold and beautiful, this

hands-on companion
is essential reading for
wrestling with the most
important issue
of our time.”
—Kari Marie Norgaard, author of Living in
Denial: Climate Change, Emotions, and
Everyday Life
Paperback, 216 pages, $16.95

“Essential reading for
anyone despairing over our
current climate emergency
Gen Z’s first “existential and future of turbulent
toolkit” for combating eco- change.”
guilt and burnout while —Leslie Davenport, author of Emotional
advocating for climate justice. Resiliency in the Era of Climate Change
www.ucpress.edu
called for “the capacity for autonomous action, backed up by credible

military forces.” Once again, the United Kingdom was hedging
against the possibility that the United States was withdrawing from
the world. Blair worried that the Clinton administration’s tentative
response to the breakup of the former Yugoslavia reflected a nascent
isolationism. The promises of Saint-Malo never materialized, in part
because of tedious arguments about
Brexit might affect British the appropriate division of labor be-
tween the EU and NATO, but also be-
foreign policy less than is cause of the 2003 U.S.-led invasion of
commonly supposed. Iraq, when Blair chose to join a war
that France and Germany opposed.
But the biggest divergence between the United Kingdom and its
European partners concerned the degree of integration. After German
reunification, France and Germany pushed for a far closer union, some-
thing that Thatcher and her wing of the Conservative Party deeply
opposed, fearing the loss of sovereignty it would entail. Her successor,
Prime Minister John Major, only barely managed to overcome the
“Euroskeptics” and push through Parliament the 1992 Maastricht
Treaty, by which the European Economic Community became the
more powerful European Union. He did so by securing a number of
opt-outs from the EU’s requirements regarding justice and labor and,
most important, from its economic and monetary union. Although
these exceptions made the EU more politically palatable in the United
Kingdom, they also led to a semidetached relationship with it—a dis-
tance that was confirmed when the otherwise pro-European govern-
ment of Blair decided to stick with the pound sterling over the euro.
During the Labour years of Blair and his successor, Gordon Brown,
immigration into the United Kingdom from new EU member states
surged, and Euroskepticism became an even more powerful force in
British politics. It was thus always likely that whenever the Conser-
vative Party returned to power, the relationship with the EU would
grow even more strained. When David Cameron, a Conservative,
became prime minister, in 2010, at first little changed, because he had
to work in a coalition government with the pro-European Liberal
Democrats. Yet after Cameron achieved an outright majority, in the
2015 election, he decided that the European issue had to be addressed
once and for all, and a referendum on whether the United Kingdom
should leave the EU was scheduled.
Britain Adrift
The Leave campaign argued that if the United Kingdom did not
get out, it was bound to get drawn into an ever-closer union, a pros-
pect that this camp claimed would even include a “European army”
to which the British would have to contribute troops. Meanwhile,
the Remain campaign warned of the economic costs of leaving the
customs union and the single market and pointed to the opt-outs
that British leaders had secured over the years. But extolling the
benefits of semidetachment was hardly a rousing endorsement of
membership. Few argued—as was argued in the 1970s—that the EU
represented a grand geopolitical project that could enhance British
influence. In fact, even if the referendum had gone the other way, the
United Kingdom would likely have become increasingly marginal-
ized in the EU, because it was not part of the main European project:
creating and sustaining the eurozone.
A NATION ADRIFT
Thus, even before the twin blows to the pillars of British foreign policy
in 2016—the Brexit referendum in June and the election of Trump in
November—those pillars were already weak. The United Kingdom was
neither part of the eurozone nor sharing a grand project with the United
States. It was already showing a declining interest in foreign affairs, as
evidenced by Cameron’s failure to get parliamentary support for strikes
against Syria in the summer of 2013 and then his absence during the
Ukraine diplomacy of 2014–15, leaving President François Hollande of
France and Chancellor Angela Merkel of Germany to take the initiative.
It took until the end of January 2020 for the United Kingdom to
actually withdraw from the EU, after over three years of protracted par-
liamentary wrangling that did little for the country’s standing abroad
and encouraged further introversion at home. Now, the United King-
dom must work out the details of its future relationship with the EU, a
process that will be dominated by questions of trade and thus drain
energy away from other areas of policymaking. There is no reason why
the current arrangements concerning security cannot continue, includ-
ing tracking criminals and terrorists and working together on minor
military operations. The problem is that difficulties in the wider nego-
tiations may make it harder to sustain these other forms of cooperation.
The government will also need to cope with the dislocation at home
resulting from the break with the EU, including revived demands for
Scottish independence and even pressure for Irish unification.
May/June 2020 125
Nonetheless, Brexit might affect British foreign policy less than is

commonly supposed. The United Kingdom will obviously have far
less influence over developments within the EU—including, for ex-
ample, rising authoritarianism in a number of member countries. But
precisely because the EU never lived up to the early hopes about its
foreign policy potential, the overall ef-
The United States and the fect will be limited. Europe’s interna-
United Kingdom no longer tional influence has always depended
as much on cooperation among indi-
share a grand strategic vidual European countries as on Euro-
project. pean institutions. Consider how close
London has stayed to Paris and Berlin
in the Trump era. Not only have the three governments worked to-
gether to try to preserve something of the Iran nuclear deal after
Trump’s withdrawal from it; they have also stuck with the Paris agree-
ment on climate change and opposed the United States’ recognition
of Jerusalem as the capital of Israel.
Paradoxically, although the United Kingdom is not part of the
drive toward ever-closer union in Europe, it does share at least one
big project with the continent: coping with the impact of the Trump
administration. Some observers contend that Trump’s enthusiasm
for Brexit and a new bilateral trade deal will push London closer to
Washington, but this has yet to happen. Although Johnson is keen
to push ahead with trade negotiations with Trump, he is well aware
of the potential pitfalls, not to mention the president’s unpopularity
among British voters. Trump, for his part, has cooled toward John-
son since the prime minister defied U.S. entreaties and allowed the
Chinese company Huawei to help develop the United Kingdom’s
5G wireless network.
It is the problems of Trump as much as those of Europe that will
dominate the major review of British foreign and defense policy
that Johnson announced after Brexit. The biggest challenge involves
NATO, whose purpose Trump has questioned and whose members he
has spurned. Unlike the EU, the alliance is something the United
Kingdom helped found, and the country has always seen it as its
main contribution to European security. Even with a friendlier U.S.
president, the American public will still question why European
countries that individually have GDPs far greater than that of Russia
need the United States to provide security in their neighborhood. If
Britain Adrift
the Americans are to be persuaded to continue in their current

role, European countries will need to step up—increasing their
defense spending and the efficiency with which it is applied and
enhancing their capacity to manage the regional crises to which
Washington is paying little attention.
Without going as far as French President Emmanuel Macron
in announcing the alliance’s “brain death,” Ben Wallace, the
United Kingdom’s defense secretary, has publicly doubted the re-
liability of the United States, saying in a January interview, “We
need to diversify our assets.” Providing European security with a
less attentive United States, or even a completely absent United
States, raises hard questions. Can NATO continue without Wash-
ington playing a leadership role? Continental Europeans support
the alliance in principle, but they are less enthusiastic about the
prospect of actually fighting to defend one of its members. When
the Pew Research Center asked people whether their country
should use force to defend a NATO ally against a hypothetical at-
tack from Russia, only 41 percent of French, 34 percent of Ger-
mans, and 25 percent of Italians surveyed said that it should.
What does that tell countries that are more exposed to Russia?
Then there is the question of how to replace the nuclear umbrella
provided by the United States. The United Kingdom has pledged
that its nuclear deterrent extends to all NATO members, but that
pledge depends on it supplementing the American deterrent. By
itself, or even with a corresponding French commitment, the
promise hardly seems credible.
Even if the United Kingdom sincerely wanted to stress a new
security relationship with Europe, making the shift would not be
straightforward. British intelligence and defense capabilities are
deeply intertwined with American ones, and it would not be easy
to disentangle them in short order. The most substantial recent
investments, including in Dreadnought-class ballistic missile sub-
marines, Queen Elizabeth–class aircraft carriers, and F-35 fighter
jets, all rely on U.S. technology and facilities. Furthermore, within
NATO, the United Kingdom has tended to focus on northern Eu-
rope. Although it has been involved in a number of air campaigns
in the Middle East and still has a military base in Cyprus, it has
offered only modest contributions to ground operations in North
Africa, where southern European countries have taken the lead.
May/June 2020 127
A LESS AMBITIOUS UNITED KINGDOM

It is against this unpromising backdrop that the British government is
reconsidering its foreign policy. In the past, British governments rel-
ished the challenges of multilateralism and took pride in their diplo-
matic prowess. In recent years, those attempting to identify the
country’s distinctive role have similarly pointed to its mastery of mul-
tilateralism—an ability to build bridges across the Atlantic and uphold
a rules-based order. But there are now fewer opportunities for multi-
lateralism as a natural consequence of a United States with little inter-
est in playing the liberal hegemon. The Trump administration’s distrust
of international organizations has diminished their effectiveness.
Brexit is also part of the trend away from multilateralism. The
British government has stepped up its rhetoric of independence as
it sorts out its new relationship with the EU, and in this, it is aided
by the United Kingdom’s fortunate location. The country enjoys
relative security as an island at the more tranquil end of the Eur-
asian landmass, with a decent economy, a moderate climate, and a
high standard of living. Because of this, the case for a quiet life, for
steering clear of trouble elsewhere, is not so unreasonable that it can
be dismissed out of hand.
Yet despite all the talk about sovereign decision-making encour-
aged by Brexit, in practice, the United Kingdom still has to work
with other countries. If getting favorable trade agreements is a pri-
ority, for example, then British negotiators will need to be solicitous
about the concerns of others. To get its exports accepted into the EU,
it will still need to be a rule-taker as much as its own rule-maker.
One can add that it will also have to be a crisis-taker. In the age of
climate change, cyberattacks, and pandemics, the United Kingdom
can be buffeted by events elsewhere. It will still be affected by the
stresses and strains in the EU, for example, if there is another finan-
cial crisis in the eurozone. The novel coronavirus has provided a
tough lesson in global interdependence.
The challenge for Johnson is to manage the tension between in-
dependence and interdependence. On the one hand, he wishes to
project an image of a confident country enjoying its newfound lib-
eration from an overbearing supranational organization. On the
other, he has denied that Brexit represents an inward-looking turn
and an embrace of nationalist populism, eschewing any talk of “Brit-
ain first” in favor of “global Britain.” The latter slogan is intended to
Britain Adrift
show that the United Kingdom is broadening its focus beyond its
backyard, looking for more sources of high-quality trade and immi-
gration rather than just putting up barriers. So somewhat incongru-
ously for a leader in the process of complicating trade relations with
his country’s most substantial economic partner, Johnson has spoken
of the United Kingdom as a force for
good in the world and as a “superhero As a helpful problem solver,
champion” of free trade.
But to get past the slogans, Johnson the United Kingdom still
will need to offer a realistic assessment has much to offer.
of the United Kingdom’s foreign pol-
icy options. The case for international engagement has to be made—
it cannot be taken for granted. The context has changed. The British
Empire represented a moment in international history that was pass-
ing at the time of Acheson’s 1962 gibe. The strategic imperatives that
the empire generated were getting harder and harder to meet. The
Cold War then created its own imperatives, which were easier to
meet. Now, the imperatives are less clear and more contested. One
consequence of the wars in Afghanistan and Iraq is that the British
public has little appetite for more military expeditions to help sort
out the quarrels and misfortunes of others; another is that it is un-
likely to be swayed by alarmists’ talk of future threats.
In an encouraging sign, the British government may have found
a formula that allows it to evade Acheson’s challenge. Although it
nodded in Acheson’s direction by framing the foreign policy review
as an attempt to “define the Government’s ambition for the UK’s
role in the world,” it also offered a more modest description of the
country as “a problem-solving and burden-sharing nation.” This
opens up the possibility of focusing on capabilities more than objec-
tives, suggesting a pragmatic, constructive approach to working with
others that avoids grandiosity and any suggestion of a grand strat-
egy. A capabilities-based review is about keeping options for a wider
range of contingencies, with a stress on flexibility and adaptability;
it is not about trying to gear everything toward specific strategic
imperatives that have yet to materialize.
As a helpful problem solver, the United Kingdom still has much
to offer. The country has a good record of adapting its national se-
curity tools to new circumstances. Its GCHQ (Government Commu-
nications Headquarters), for example, used to be associated solely
May/June 2020 129
with signals intelligence and code-breaking, but it now deals with

most of the challenges of the digital age, including cyberattacks,
electronic fraud, and child sexual abuse. The country has a long ex-
perience with counterterrorism. Its contributions to economic de-
velopment have been substantial and innovative. In November, in
Glasgow, it is set to host the next major international conference on
climate change. It remains a significant military power, with only
France in a comparable position in Europe.
The “role” Acheson had in mind was a position within an interna-
tional system that was ordered and stable, but that no longer exists.
Instead, the world is beset by anxiety, with much in flux internation-
ally. Power balances are shifting, and disruptive behavior is becoming
the norm. In this world, the United Kingdom has much to contrib-
ute, so long as it accepts the limits of independence and, above all,
abandons the quest for a unique, exceptional role.∂
The Next Iranian
Revolution
Why Washington Should Seek Regime
Change in Tehran
R
“ egime change” is a toxic phrase in Washington. It conjures up
images of the Iraq war, with the United States trapped in a
quagmire of its own making. That is why those who favor a
coercive U.S. approach to Iran are routinely charged with secretly
supporting regime change. In response, the accused almost always
deny it. They don’t want regime change, they insist: they just want the
Islamic Republic’s theocrats to change their behavior.
But no such transformation will ever take place, because the Ira-
nian regime remains a revolutionary movement that will never ac-
commodate the United States. That is why regime change is not a
radical or reckless idea but the most pragmatic and effective goal for
U.S. policy toward Iran—indeed, it is the only objective that has any
chance of meaningfully reducing the Iranian threat.
Backing regime change emphatically does not mean advocating a
military invasion of Iran, but it does mean pushing for the United
States to use every instrument at its disposal to undermine Iran’s cler-
ical state, including covert assistance to dissidents. The United States
cannot overthrow the Islamic Republic, but it can contribute to condi-
tions that would make such a demise possible. The regime is weaker
ERIC EDELMAN is Counselor at the Center for Strategic and Budgetary Assessments and
Senior Adviser at the Foundation for Defense of Democracies. He served as U.S. Undersec-
retary of Defense for Policy from 2005 to 2009.
RAY TAKEYH is Hasib J. Sabbagh Senior Fellow for Middle East Studies at the Council on
Foreign Relations and the author of the forthcoming book The Last Shah: Iran, America, and
the Fall of the Pahlavi Dynasty.
May/June 2020 131
than many Western analysts believe; a campaign of external pressure

and internal resistance could conceivably topple it. Recent years have
witnessed explosions of broad-based public opposition to the regime.
Iranians are hungry for better leadership. The question for Washing-
ton should be not whether to embrace regime change but how to help
the Iranian people achieve it.
WE ARE NEVER EVER GETTING TOGETHER

For the past 40 years, almost every U.S. president has tried to reach
some kind of accommodation with Iran. Ronald Reagan’s attempt led
him to the greatest scandal of his presidency, when he traded arms for
Americans held hostage in Lebanon by the Iranian-backed militia
Hezbollah. Bill Clinton unsuccessfully sought to develop a road map
for détente with Tehran. George W. Bush came into office displaying
moral contempt for the clerical autocracy, only to have his administra-
tion spend a considerable amount of time talking to Iran’s leaders about
the future of Afghanistan and Iraq. And then came Barack Obama,
whose desperation to make a deal with Tehran produced an agreement
that granted Iran sanctions relief and paved its path to the bomb.
In 2018, President Donald Trump pulled the United States out of
that deal and imposed crippling sanctions on Iran that went beyond any
that had come before. Trump has repeatedly denounced the regime,
and earlier this year, he ordered the killing of Qasem Soleimani, the
famed commander of the elite Quds Force, a unit of Iran’s Islamic Rev-
olutionary Guard Corps (IRGC). But for all this surface antagonism, the
internal logic of the Trump administration’s approach resembles that of
its predecessors: inflict pain on Iran in order to gain leverage in pro-
spective negotiations. Trump still wants to make a deal—and in fact, he
is the first U.S. president to propose meeting with Iranian leaders.
All these administrations have failed to understand that the Iranian
regime remains, at heart, a revolutionary organization. Once in power,
revolutionaries often yield to the temptations of moderation and
pragmatism. The requirements of actually running a government and
addressing domestic concerns eventually lead them to adapt to the
prevailing international order. But four decades after its birth, the
Islamic Republic continues to avoid that fate. Its elites still cling to
the revolution’s precepts even when they prove self-defeating. That is
because the revolution’s leader, Ayatollah Ruhollah Khomeini, did not
rely on secular principles; he made religion his governing creed. Kho-
The Next Iranian Revolution
Taking it to the streets: rioting in Tehran, November 2019

meini’s ideology rested on a politicized and radicalized version of Shi-
ite Islam, one that often contradicts long-standing traditions of the
faith. But for its most dedicated core of supporters, the Iranian theoc-
racy remains an important experiment for realizing God’s will on
earth. Led by Khomeini’s successor, Supreme Leader Ali Khamenei,
these true believers retain control of the most powerful branches of
Iran’s government and have successfully resisted the reformist efforts
of various presidents and parliaments.
For Khomeini and his disciples, the continued vitality of their rev-
olution mandated its relentless export. This was to be a revolution
without borders; its appeal would not be limited by cultural differ-
ences or diverging national sensibilities within the Muslim world.
Khamenei has faithfully carried out that mission, backing proxy mili-
tias throughout the Middle East with the goal of advancing Iranian-
WA N A / R E U T E R S
style Islamism and undermining the U.S.-backed regional security

order. In the mullahs’ preferred narrative, the imperialist United
States seeks to exploit the region’s resources for the aggrandizement
of the industrial West. Achieving that goal requires Washington to
May/June 2020 133
subjugate the Muslim world by backing corrupt Arab monarchies and

an illegitimate Zionist entity. The Iranian regime sees resisting that
American dominance as a divine imperative.
That is why the Islamic Republic will never evolve into a respon-
sible regional stakeholder. It will never permit genuine political con-
testation or allow an organized opposition to take shape. It will never
abandon its nuclear ambitions for the sake of commerce. And it will
never recognize any U.S. interests in the Middle East as legitimate.
The revolutionaries will never give up their revolution.
CARPE DIEM
Since there is no prospect of a sustainable accommodation with the
theocrats, the only U.S. policy that makes sense is to seek regime
change—that is, to do everything possible to weaken the government
and strengthen those inside Iran who oppose it. The aim should be to
help the large number of Iranians who want to restore the original
promise of the 1979 revolution that overthrew the shah—a movement
that drew support from a broad base of groups, including liberal and
pro-democratic ones, before it was hijacked by Khomeini and his Is-
lamist faction. The United States should be modest about its capa-
bilities and understand that it cannot always shape events. But given
the theocracy’s domestic vulnerabilities, Washington can still carve
out a considerable role in attenuating the regime’s power. The United
States cannot choose the precise mechanics of how the regime might
fall or the exact contours of what would replace it. But it can exercise
a good deal of influence on both.
Today, the Islamic Republic is at an impasse. The regime faces a
disaffected populace that is losing its sense of fear and becoming more
willing to confront the government’s security services on the streets.
No one is sure what a post-theocratic future would look like, but an
increasing number of Iranians seem willing to find out. And despite the
revolution’s spirit of intransigence, postrevolutionary Iran has not been
without its share of reformers. By the early 1990s, an eclectic group of
politicians, clerics, and intellectuals sought to reconcile faith and free-
dom. Recognizing that a rigid definition of religious governance would
threaten the entire system, the reformers wanted to create a new na-
tional compact that would preserve Iran’s Islamic traditions and also
uphold democratic values. The reform movement captured both the
presidency and the parliament in the late 1990s but was thwarted by
Khamenei and the hard-liners. Still, courageous movement leaders of

that era, such as Abdollah Nouri, Mostafa Tajzadeh, and Saeed Hajjar-
ian, continue to struggle within Iran for an accountable government.
Their views found potent expression during the so-called Green
Movement of 2009, which saw Iranians
demonstrating in support of reformist
figures running for president that year
Iranians are losing their
and demanding good governance and sense of fear and becoming
the restoration of Iran’s place in the in- more willing to confront
ternational community. When it be- the government’s security
came clear that the regime had rigged
the outcome in order to guarantee the services on the streets.
reelection of Mahmoud Ahmadinejad,
a conservative firebrand, the movement vastly expanded, capturing
the national imagination and bringing unprecedented numbers of peo-
ple into the streets. The regime had to resort to brute force to regain
control. Today, more than a decade later, the leading figures of the
movement, the opposition candidate Mir Hossein Mousavi and the
dissident cleric Mehdi Karroubi, still languish under house arrest.
The Green Movement may be a distant memory for the Western
commentariat, but it haunts the regime. In a speech he gave a few
months after the crackdown, Mohammad Ali Jafari, then the head of
the IRGC, conceded that the protests had brought the regime “to the
border of overthrow.” In 2013, Khamenei told an audience of univer-
sity students that the Green Movement had posed “a great challenge”
and brought the government to “the edge of the cliff.” After the upris-
ing, the regime decided that it could no longer tolerate reformers in
its midst. In a remarkable act of self-sabotage, the regime purged it-
self of some of the country’s most popular politicians.
In the past two years, Iran has been rocked by the most serious
demonstrations since the 1979 revolution, outstripping even the
Green Movement. Compared with earlier episodes of mass dissent,
today’s protests pose a far greater threat to the theocracy, because
they represent a revolt of the working classes and the poor, which
have accounted for the majority of demonstrators in recent years.
During earlier protests, the regime discounted the participation of
university students (whom the mullahs saw as the spoiled offspring of
the wealthy classes) and middle-class protesters (who the clerics be-
lieved were motivated less by ideological opposition than by a desire
May/June 2020 135
for Western-style material comforts). But the clerics saw the poor as
the regime’s backbone, tied to the theocracy by piety and patronage.
That bond has weakened, however, owing to Iran’s economic col-
lapse. Inflation and unemployment are skyrocketing. Oil exports,
which were at 2.5 million barrels a day
prior to the reimposition of U.S. sanc-
Marchers in major cities tions in 2018, have now fallen to as lit-
openly chanted “Death to tle as 248,000 barrels a day. This has
Khamenei!” and “The forced the regime to cut fuel subsidies,
and the loss of oil income has made it
clerics should get lost.” hard for the state to meet its pension
obligations and maintain its affordable-
housing programs. With the welfare state under pressure, appeals for
sacrifice from corrupt mullahs ring hollow. “Clerics with capital, give
us our money back!” was a popular chant at protests last year.
But working-class and poor demonstrators have gone beyond ex-
pressing economic grievances and have embraced political slogans
with an alacrity that has shocked the regime. In December 2017, for
example, protests engulfed Iran after the prices of basic goods soared.
Marchers in major cities openly chanted “Death to Khamenei!” and
“The clerics should get lost.” The demonstrations faded after the re-
gime unleashed its security forces. But last November, a sudden in-
crease in fuel prices provoked riots in hundreds of cities; some 1,500
people died at the hands of the police and security forces. This time,
the demonstrators did not just call for the death of their leaders; they
also decried Iran’s involvement in conflicts elsewhere. (“Not Gaza,
not Lebanon, my life for Iran!” “Leave Syria, think about us!”) Even
as the regime condemned American imperialism, Iran’s leaders always
assumed that their own imperial projects would burnish their legiti-
macy. But it appears that many Iranians no longer want to waste
their resources on Arab civil wars.
In January, after the U.S. drone strike that killed Soleimani, mas-
sive crowds of mourners flooded the streets of Iran’s cities, and many
believed that the attack had united Iranians behind their regime.
Just weeks later, however, the illusion of solidarity was shattered by
large-scale popular protests that erupted when the government ad-
mitted, after days of official denials, that Iranian air defenses—on
high alert for U.S. incursions—had accidentally shot down a Ukrai-
nian civilian airliner departing Tehran’s airport, killing 176 people.
POSTGRADUATE SCHOLARSHIPS IN PEACE
STUDIES AND INTERNATIONAL DEVELOPMENT
AUTOMATIC £5,000 SCHOLARSHIP FOR ALL SELF-FUNDED
INTERNATIONAL STUDENTS ON THE FOLLOWING COURSES:
MA Peace, Conflict MSc Economics and
and Development Finance for Development
MA Peace, Resilience MA International One of the world’s
Applications
and Social Justice Development first, and largest,
are also open for
Management university centres
MA Advanced Practice post-doctoral
in Peacebuilding and MSc Project Planning dedicated to the
Academic Visiting
Conflict Resolution and Management study of peace and
Fellowships
MA International MSc Sustainable development
Relations and Development
Security Studies
[email protected] www.bradford.ac.uk/psid
Far from rebounding to the mullahs’ advantage, the regime’s latest

confrontation with the United States reminded Iranians of the costs
of their government’s belligerence.
The government’s legitimacy took another hit with the outbreak of
COVID-19. As the novel coronavirus spread, the Islamic Republic not
only failed to protect the health and safety of its citizens but actively
impeded their ability to protect themselves by withholding informa-
tion and hiding the extent of the problem—a response that will di-
minish the regime’s credibility even further and add fuel to the outrage
and anger that have been building for years.
HOW CAN I HELP YOU?

Although Iran is brimming with dissidence, no coherent resistance
movement has emerged. Washington cannot create one, but by overtly
weakening the regime and covertly aiding forces inside Iran that can
foment popular demands for change, the United States can help the
currently disconnected strands of opposition to consolidate. Washing-
ton should seek to further drain Iran’s economy, invite defections from
the ranks of the regime’s enforcers, and surreptitiously enable those
who dare to challenge the regime. But it cannot go any further than
that: regime change itself—that is, the removal and replacement of
the theocracy—must be undertaken by the Iranians themselves.
Adopting the goal of regime change will not be terribly costly, but
it will require a stepped-up program of covert action to aid those
elements within Iranian civil society that are contesting the regime’s
legitimacy. Chief among those are professional syndicates, such as
labor unions and teachers’ unions, which have gone on strike to pro-
test government policies and actions, and student groups, which
have organized protests on college campuses. Purged reformers rou-
tinely write open letters protesting the regime’s abuses, and they
have continued to do so in the aftermath of the crackdown on dem-
onstrations. Last November, from under house arrest, the Green
Movement leader Mousavi published a statement on the website
Kaleme.com in which he compared the regime’s conduct to an infa-
mous massacre conducted by the shah’s troops in September 1978.
Also in November, the reformist former president Mohammad
Khatami, whom the regime has tried to silence, denounced the crack-
down, writing on Instagram that “no government has the right to
resort to force and oppression in confronting protests.” These pow-
erful messages were widely reported by international media outlets

and reposted on social media. But it is difficult to assess how many
Iranians were aware of them, since the government actively blocks
Internet access. That is why it is essential for the United States to
supply the regime’s critics and opponents with technology and soft-
ware that they can use to evade censorship, communicate with one
another, and get their messages out.
Such covert technical assistance is critical, but it is not the only
way that Washington can help foster opposition. Direct (but secret)
financial support must also play a role. Iranian trade unions should
be a particular focus of U.S. efforts. During the Iranian Revolution
of 1979, strikes carried out by oil and transportation workers were
essential to paralyzing the shah’s regime. In recent years, steelwork-
ers, truckers, bus drivers, railway workers, teachers, and sugarcane
workers have called strikes to challenge the current regime. By se-
cretly channeling funds to groups that could carry out similar strikes,
the United States can further cripple Iran’s economy.
In addition to taking such covert steps, Washington should make
adjustments to its public diplomacy regarding Iran. U.S. officials
should take every opportunity to highlight the regime’s human rights
abuses and to warn that violators—especially those involved in the
use of force to repress popular protests—will be held accountable by
the international community when there is a new order in Iran. At
the same time, Washington should stress that any member of the
Iranian regime who wishes to defect will be guaranteed sanctuary in
the United States. The CIA should establish a mechanism for contact-
ing and extracting all who wish to leave. Even a small number of
defectors can sow distrust in the system, forcing the security services
to constantly look for unreliable elements among its ranks and con-
duct periodic purges. This would hamper operational efficiency by
eliminating some cadres on whom the security services rely and cre-
ating distrust and suspicion in the state’s apparatus of repression.
Beyond such policies and official rhetoric, the United States must
do more to overcome the regime’s propaganda by making accurate
information and honest analysis available to the Iranian people. Cur-
rently, Washington spends $30 million a year on Farsi-language me-
dia outlets run by the U.S. Agency for Global Media, including
Radio Farda and Sedaye America, which offer news and entertain-
ment programming via radio, television, and the Internet. Accord-
May/June 2020 139
ing to the agency, this programming reaches nearly a quarter of all

Iranian adults. The U.S. government should augment that effort by
openly funding radio and television programming created by Iranian
exiles living in the United States. And although traditional forms of
media are important, the U.S. government could bring even more
attention to the regime’s corruption and economic mismanagement
by using Instagram, Telegram, Twitter, and other social media plat-
forms to highlight specific instances of graft and name the regime
insiders responsible for them.
UNDER PRESSURE
Aiding dissidents inside Iran is only half the battle, however. To
weaken the regime’s grip on the country and create an opening for
other forces to take power, the United States must also expand the
Trump administration’s highly successful campaign of “maximum
pressure” against the Iranian economy. Critics of the Trump adminis-
tration were quick to dismiss the plan, insisting that unilateral sanc-
tions would not do much to strain Iran’s finances. But they
overestimated the willingness of foreign corporations to risk their
ability to do business in the United States. Even though the govern-
ments of their home countries have not sanctioned Iran, firms such as
the French energy company Total, the German manufacturing con-
glomerate Siemens, and the Danish shipping giant Maersk have
stayed out of Iran in order to avoid Washington’s sanctions. Going
forward, the United States should blacklist Iran’s entire financial sec-
tor, pressure the global financial messaging platform SWIFT to expel
all remaining Iranian banks from its network, fully enforce all sanc-
tions on Iran’s non-oil exports (including petrochemicals), and require
auditors who certify the financial statements of any company doing
business with Iran to adopt stiffer due diligence measures.
The United States must also increase the price that Iran pays for
its military adventurism in the region. The strike against Soleimani
was an important first step toward directly imposing costs on Iran
rather than merely targeting its proxies. Iran’s meddling has already
made it vulnerable to blowback in places where its proxies have
wreaked havoc. In Iraq in recent months, people have taken to the
streets in huge numbers to protest Tehran’s overweening influence.
Outrage over Iran’s long reach has also driven recent protests in Leb-
anon, where many are fed up with Hezbollah, the militia and political
group that Iran backs. Washington should capitalize on Tehran’s fail-

ing fortunes in the region by aiding the forces that are standing up to
Iran—including by providing financial support via covert means, if
appropriate—and by using naval and air assets to interdict the flow of
Iranian military supplies to the regime’s proxies.
The need to intensify the pressure on Iran should also inform U.S.
military strategy and posture in the region. The United States should
maintain a small military presence in Syria to observe and obstruct
Iranian efforts to convert Syrian territory into a “land bridge” through
which to supply its proxies. And Washington should encourage Israel,
Saudi Arabia, and the United Arab Emirates to cooperate on develop-
ing shared early warning systems and defenses against the cruise mis-
siles and medium-range ballistic missiles that Iran would likely deploy
in any conflict with its neighbors. Steps such as these would further
weaken the Iranian regime by thwarting its bid for military domi-
nance in the region, neutralizing the value of some Iranian military
investments, and imposing additional costs on the country.
WHAT THE CRITICS MISS

There are many objections to a regime-change agenda. One is that
U.S. assistance to pro-democracy forces, human rights activists, and
regime critics in Iran would discredit them in the eyes of other Irani-
ans. But surely, Iranian dissidents themselves are the best judges of
that risk; Washington should identify the most promising recipients
of U.S. aid and let them decide for themselves whether to receive it.
And it is worth noting that in all the protests that Iran has witnessed
in the past decade, the United States has never been the subject of
condemnation. Indeed, in 2009, many Green Movement demonstra-
tors called on Obama, in vain, to publicly embrace their cause. Even
Trump didn’t become a target of any street protests last year. And
some of the most viral Internet content to emerge from those protests
were videos showing demonstrators going out of their way to avoid
walking on American flags that the authorities had painted on the
ground in public spaces in order to force people to disrespect the
United States by treading on its flag.
Other skeptics of regime change might object that the Algiers Ac-
cords of 1981, which ended the crisis over the U.S. hostages that Iran
seized in 1979, obligates Washington to refrain from interfering in
Tehran’s internal affairs. The United States should publicly make clear
May/June 2020 141
that it no longer believes itself to be bound by that agreement, which

was negotiated under duress and which Iran has repeatedly and egre-
giously violated by abducting and killing U.S. officials, sponsoring
proxy attacks on American forces, and supporting terrorist groups.
Some critics might contend that
openly pursuing regime change would
The era of arms control dash any hope of restricting Iran’s nu-
diplomacy between the clear program through negotiations.
United States and Iran has But that assumes that there is the pos-
essentially ended. sibility of a reliable arms control agree-
ment with the current regime; there is
not. The nuclear deal that Iran entered
into with the United States and other powers was fatally flawed: it
did not proscribe the domestic enrichment of uranium on Iran’s part
or the development of advanced centrifuges, and all its most impor-
tant terms were saddled with sunset clauses. And since the Trump
administration pulled out of the agreement, Iran’s leaders have made
it clear that they will not negotiate a new deal or extend the expiring
restrictions of the existing one.
The truth is that the era of arms control diplomacy between the
United States and Iran has essentially ended. Still, to maintain inter-
national pressure and congressional support for an aggressive policy,
the United States should remain open to negotiations even after it
embraces regime change as a goal. For their part, the Iranians might
see virtue in engaging in talks with a hawkish administration in the
hope that doing so might persuade the administration to abandon
regime change as a specific objective.
Another common objection to a U.S. strategy of regime change in
Iran is the notion that any government that followed the theocracy
would be even worse. Some advocates of this view insist that a suc-
cessful regime-change policy would lead only to the rise of unsavory
leaders from the ranks of the IRGC. In this account, Iran would go
from a belligerent theocracy to a fascist military dictatorship. This
argument wrongly assumes that the IRGC has carved out an identity
for itself separate from the cleric-led regime it serves. In reality, the
clerical oligarchs and the leaders of the Revolutionary Guards are
indivisible. They believe in the same ideology and confront different
facets of the same predicament: the mullahs anguish about why young
people pay no attention to their revolutionary exhortations; the IRGC’s
generals face the daunting task of sending conscripts drawn from the
lower classes to their old neighborhoods to beat up and shoot their
protesting peers.
Finally, critics of a policy of regime change sometimes warn that if
the Islamic Republic fell, Iran would become a failed state along the
lines of Iraq in the aftermath of the U.S. invasion of 2003 or Libya in
the years since the U.S.-led intervention in 2011. But there are sig-
nificant differences between Iran and those countries. An Iranian
state and polity have existed for thousands of years: unlike Iraq and
Libya, Iran is not an invention of European postcolonial cartography.
What is more, although ethnic tensions do exist in Iran and the re-
gime in Tehran does repress religious minorities, Iranian society is
overwhelmingly Shiite and not riven by the ethnic and sectarian divi-
sions that plague Iraq or the tribal factions that make Libya difficult
to govern. Finally, even under the theocracy, Iranian civil society has
flourished, and it has not been atomized as its counterparts were by
the dictators who long ruled Iraq and Libya.
Of course, those characteristics do not guarantee that Iran would
develop into a liberal democracy if the theocracy were to fall, and it is
impossible to predict with precision what would happen in the event of
a revolution. The unrealized hopes of the Arab Spring provide a strong
cautionary example. But compared with many Arab countries, Iran has
a deep history of vibrant politics, an informed civil society, a lively
press, a creative intellectual scene, and a large and literate middle class.
Indeed, the history of Iran since the beginning of the twentieth cen-
tury is the tale of a long struggle between people seeking freedom from
monarchs and mullahs determined to preserve the prerogatives of
power. The constitutional revolution of 1905 established the country’s
first parliament, and in the years that followed, feisty parliamentarians
boldly imposed restraints on monarchs. Reza Shah Pahlavi challenged
that system after he came to power, in 1925, and momentarily imposed
his will on it. But after his abdication, in 1941, Iran returned to a more
pluralistic path, with prime ministers and parliaments that once again
mattered. In 1953, Prime Minster Mohammad Mosaddeq sparked a
crisis by moving to nationalize the oil industry; the coup that removed
him from office is often seen as a U.S.-British plot to prevent Iranian
autonomy. In fact, Mosaddeq was himself trying to derail Iran’s demo-
cratic evolution with his own brand of autocracy, and his overthrow was
mostly an Iranian initiative. And then came a quarter of a century of
May/June 2020 143
dictatorship under the shah, Mohammad Reza Pahlavi, who was even-
tually overthrown in 1979 by a populist revolutionary movement that
contained many coalitions but whose main aim was to create a repre-
sentative government that was sensitive to Iran’s traditions.
Now it is the mullahs’ turn. In every decade of its existence, the
theocratic regime has faced a rebellion. The liberals were the first to
object to the mullahs’ power grab, in the 1980s. University students,
always a political vanguard in Iran, gave up on the theocracy with their
own uprising in 1999; ten years later, another wave of youthful rebel-
lion hit the regime. And in the past few years, Iranians have once more
pushed back. Students, workers, clerics, and merchants are agitating
against despotic rule, just as they have for much of the last century.
The people protesting in the streets today are the ones who will lead
Iran tomorrow, and their struggle is worthy of Washington’s embrace.
A CHANGE IS GONNA COME

The Iranian people want an accountable government and do not share
their leaders’ animus toward the West. But things don’t always hap-
pen just because they should. To avoid outcomes such as those in Iraq
and Libya, a U.S. policy of regime change must include plans for
steering a post-theocratic Iran in the right direction, since Washing-
ton would share a large degree of responsibility for the outcome. Af-
ter a collapse of the regime, the United States would have to
immediately lift all sanctions and set up an international donors’ con-
ference to inject money into Iran’s economy and bring its oil back to
the market. Even if the United States helped get rid of the old re-
gime, it would have influence over a new Iranian government only if
Washington were prepared to make a long-term commitment to the
rehabilitation of the country. Doing so would require an initial injec-
tion of U.S. financial assistance to stabilize the Iranian economy and
pave the way for further contributions by others. The U.S. president
and congressional leaders would have to make the case to the Ameri-
can public that such aid was critical to regional stability and U.S. na-
tional security. And Washington would have to make clear to Iran’s
new rulers that any aid would depend on their complete abandonment
of the country’s nuclear weapons program.
Governing Iran would be a difficult task for any new leaders. Al-
though there would inevitably be purges in the aftermath of the col-
lapse, Washington would have to press the new rulers of Iran to make
room for members of the old elite who wished to be part of the new
order. Iran’s nuclear program would leave behind dangerous detritus.
Ideally, a robust effort led by the International Atomic Energy Agency
would account for all of Iran’s nuclear technology and enriched ura-
nium. But failing that, the U.S. military would need to take unilat-
eral action to remove the more sensitive aspects of the program to
prevent them from falling into dangerous hands.
Regime change in Iran would not be pretty. It would not immedi-
ately solve all the problems between Washington and Tehran, much less
immediately stabilize the Middle East. But the United States should at
the very least attempt to empower the Iranian people to get the kind of
government they deserve. Otherwise, Washington is doomed to repeat
its past mistakes: pretending that it is possible to negotiate with the
mullahs and blindly expecting that a theocratic revolutionary move-
ment will somehow produce “moderates” willing to steer the regime
away from its recklessness—or naively hoping that a popular revolt will
succeed without any support from the outside. That approach has failed
for more than 40 years. It’s time to try something different.∂
May/June 2020 145
Making Cyberspace Safe
for Democracy
The New Landscape of Information
Competition
Laura Rosenberger
W
ith the 2020 U.S. presidential campaign underway, stories
of Russian interference are again in the headlines. In
2016, Russia’s hacking operations and use of social media
to manipulate public discourse in the United States caught U.S. poli-
cymakers off-guard. Four years later, officials have not yet fully under-
stood that those attacks reflected the changing landscape of
geopolitical competition. Viewing Russia’s attempts at interference in
2016 in isolation misses the larger context: rival states compete in the
twenty-first century as much over information as any other terrain.
Democratic countries view information as an empowering force in
the hands of people: the free and open flow of ideas, news, and opin-
ion fuels deliberative democracy. Authoritarian systems see this
model as a threat, viewing information as a danger to their regimes
and something the state must control and shape. Using surveillance,
censorship, and the manipulation of information, authoritarian re-
gimes shore up their power at home while weakening democratic
competitors abroad.
The United States and its democratic allies have not adjusted to
this reality. They have been reactive, focusing on what they are trying
to defeat; they have not developed a strategy for success. The struggle
over information has emerged at a time when democracies are under
increasing pressure from within and without and as authoritarianism
is gaining ground around the world. The new great-power competition
LAURA ROSENBERGER is Director of the Alliance for Securing Democracy and a
Senior Fellow at the German Marshall Fund of the United States. She formerly served on
the National Security Council and at the U.S. State Department.
Making Cyberspace Safe for Democracy
won’t necessarily take place on battlefields or in boardrooms; it will

happen on smartphones, computers, and other connected devices and
on the digital infrastructure that supports them. The typically hands-
off approach that many democratic governments take to information
will make it hard for them to compete.
Democracies face a dilemma. If they don’t take an active role in
the information contest, they will leave themselves vulnerable at
home and lose ground abroad. But if they are more proactive and
aggressive in the wrong ways, they will risk mimicking the heavy-
handed behavior of autocracies and creating the kind of rigidly con-
trolled environment autocrats seek.
The stakes of this contest are high. If authoritarian actors succeed,
states will increasingly control information and shape how their citi-
zens perceive reality. The global rules that govern information infra-
structure will favor authoritarian systems, not democracies, limiting
the United States’ ability to exert influence and project power, while
weakening its own system of government. The world will become
more authoritarian and less democratic.
Policymakers must protect a democratic information space in order
to preserve the ability of democracies to function and defend their
way of life. Understanding the nature of this contest, defining a vision
for success, and developing a new strategy to fulfill that vision are
critical to protecting U.S. national security in the information age.
WAGING THE INFORMATION WAR

Unlike the United States, China and Russia have made the informa-
tion contest a key part of their national security strategies. They have
prioritized activities both in cyberspace (the network infrastructure
underlying the Internet, such as servers and computer systems, which
can be vulnerable to intrusions) and in the information space (the
arena of data and public perception, where states can employ surveil-
lance, gather data, perform espionage, and distort information). Both
countries emphasize their sovereignty in cyberspace, aiming to mon-
itor or control the flow of information within their borders. At the
same time, although they use different tactics, both China and Russia
have developed methods of manipulating information abroad. China
and Russia are also striving to lead in the emerging technologies,
such as artificial intelligence (AI), that will shape this geopolitical
contest in the years to come.
May/June 2020 147
Laura Rosenberger
As with much of its foreign policy, Russia frames its approach to

cyberwarfare and information warfare in defensive terms, believing the
United States already uses information to support dissidents within its
borders. Its 2016 Doctrine of Information Security formalized “protect-
ing the information sovereignty of Russia” as central to maintaining the
stability of Russian society. Its election
interference makes up only part of a
Russian actors on social broader strategy of eroding the political
media amplify extreme and social systems of a targeted country,
views and doubts about attempting the psychological manipula-
tion of its population, and, in the words
democratic institutions. of the Russian Defense Ministry’s 2011
document Conceptual Views on the Activ-
ity of the Armed Forces of the Russian Federation in Information Space, coerc-
ing “the state to take decisions for the benefit of the opposing force.”
Russian actors typically manipulate information not to persuade oth-
ers or spread a view or an ideology but to sow confusion and disruption.
Their aim is to create the impression that truth does not exist, under-
mining trust and authority in democracies. Russian manipulators on
social media amplify extreme views, conspiracy theories, and doubts
about democratic institutions. State-backed media outlets also help
spread these narratives. For example, after Russian operatives were ac-
cused of poisoning the former Russian intelligence officer Sergei Skri-
pal and his daughter in the United Kingdom, Russian officials used
Twitter to spread alternative theories that other forces may have been
behind the attack, implying that identifying the culprit would be im-
possible. State media and covert online networks amplified these claims.
In China, authorities are similarly committed to tightly control-
ling the flow of information inside the country while harnessing in-
formation to influence societies abroad. The Chinese Communist
Party has called for close coordination across all organs of the state in
guarding cyberspace and the information space, seeking to create a
“harmonious Internet” by censoring dissent, limiting foreign suppli-
ers of technology to China, and promoting China’s model of cyber-
sovereignty, including elements of its Great Firewall, in other
countries. China has also built institutions to advance this strategy,
with organs such as the Cyberspace Administration of China and the
People’s Liberation Army playing roles in China’s integrated ap-
proach to cyberspace and the information space.
This concerted strategy comes from the top. Chinese President Xi

Jinping has emphasized the importance of “discourse power”: the
creation and dissemination of narratives that serve the state’s inter-
ests and the suppression of those that threaten the state. For example,
Chinese entities have purchased independent media outlets across
numerous African countries, incentivizing the publication of favor-
able narratives in Africa and the removal of unfavorable content. In
2019, actors linked to the Chinese government tried to manipulate
discussions of the Hong Kong protests on platforms such as Face-
book, Twitter, and YouTube. Chinese officials and media outlets also
sought to shape coverage of the outbreak of the novel coronavirus,
which began in late 2019, by suppressing reporting on China’s fail-
ings (including by ejecting three Wall Street Journal reporters from
the country in retaliation for an op-ed critical of China’s initial cover-
up), spreading the conspiracy theory that the virus resulted from a
U.S. bioweapons attack, and exploiting U.S. President Donald
Trump’s lack of transparency about the virus to portray the Chinese
response to the pandemic as superior.
China’s traditionally more cautious diplomats have recently taken
more strident postures online, with numerous Chinese officials using
Twitter (which is blocked in China) as a bully pulpit. The Foreign
Ministry spokesperson Zhao Lijian is a particularly aggressive diplo-
mat who gained notoriety for defending China’s human rights abuses
in Xinjiang by mocking American concerns; in several cases, he
pointed to examples of racism in the United States to argue that
Washington, not Beijing, had a problem with human rights. Mean-
while, China uses coercion to control speech outside its borders,
pressing companies to avoid “sensitive” topics if they want to con-
tinue to conduct business in the country. In 2019, Chinese companies
retaliated against the National Basketball Association by cutting off
partnerships, sponsorships, and broadcasts after the general manager
of the Houston Rockets tweeted in support of protests in Hong Kong.
The league quickly apologized, eager to protect its access to the Chi-
nese market. That incident followed similar cases involving Marriott,
Mercedes-Benz, and numerous airlines. Chinese officials have also
intimidated foreign media for coverage they considered unfavorable:
China’s ambassador to Sweden threatened a Swedish media outlet
over its reporting on the detention of a dissident bookseller. China’s
decision to expel all reporters from The New York Times, The Washington
May/June 2020 149
Laura Rosenberger
Post, and The Wall Street Journal in March, supposedly in retaliation

for the Trump administration’s decision to restrict the size of Chinese
state-backed media outlets in the United States, was another escalation
in this global war on the free press.
A TOTALIZING APPROACH
China and Russia treat cybersecurity and information security as two
sides of the same coin, an approach that enables the control and ma-
nipulation of information at multiple levels. In China, the govern-
ment and the private sector work more closely together to develop
and deploy new technologies. Both Beijing and Moscow have also
injected significant amounts of capital into emerging technologies,
guiding development in the state’s strategic interest.
Chinese and Russian firms have already begun to develop new
technologies and applications that have a global reach. In 2019, the
popularity of FaceApp—an application designed and distributed by a
Russian company that encouraged users to upload pictures of their
faces—raised questions about whether the Russian government could
use it to gather facial recognition data from around the world. Algo-
rithms can also be trained to privilege certain content or suppress
other content, a function China mandated domestically in its latest
content-regulation rules and appears to be using globally through
platforms such as the popular video-sharing app TikTok.
Beijing is developing AI-enabled surveillance technology for what
it calls “social governance,” exemplified in its treatment of the Muslim
minorities in the western province of Xinjiang, who are subject to all-
encompassing monitoring by such technology and forced into concen-
tration camps for perceived disloyalties. But it is also rolling out
surveillance technology across China, accompanied by a system of
assigning behavior-based “social credit” scores to individuals. And
Beijing is exporting surveillance technology to other countries, often
billed as “safe city” programs to supposedly provide high-tech public
safety systems. Although Russia lags behind China on AI develop-
ment, Russian President Vladimir Putin has sought to catch up, in-
vesting heavily in research and expanding AI partnerships with China.
To train algorithms and feed machine-learning processes, devel-
opers need more and more data from diverse sources. The export of
their technology allows China and Russia to shape the global infor-
mation architecture of platforms, applications, and surveillance systems.
The war room: at a Facebook office in Berlin, February 2018

And it allows them to collect more data in the interest of training AI
applications and more finely tuning methods of controlling and ma-
nipulating information. China’s so-called Digital Silk Road, a tech-
nological plank of its infrastructure- and investment-driven Belt
and Road Initiative, is one vehicle through which it exports network
and platform technologies and shapes the infrastructure and norms
that govern information in other countries. The installation of Chi-
nese 5G equipment around the world will enable the collection of
huge tranches of data by Chinese telecommunications companies.
This information could be shared with Chinese state or Communist
Party institutions. The Chinese government’s support for Huawei,
a Chinese technology company that sells telecommunications equip-
ment, smartphones, and other consumer electronics, has helped cre-
G O R D O N W E LT E R S / L A I F / R E D U X
ate a global behemoth. China also distributes its surveillance

technologies to Western democracies; the French city of Marseille
is working with the Chinese telecommunications company ZTE to
establish a public surveillance network. Although China is a bigger
exporter of global information infrastructure, Russian companies
also export lower-cost Internet monitoring technologies to many
countries, including Iraq and Mexico.
May/June 2020 151
Laura Rosenberger
Alongside digital infrastructure, China and Russia are building tra-

ditional media networks outside their borders, expanding the reach of
their state-backed channels to Africa, Latin America, and the Middle
East and developing partnerships with overseas outlets to spread con-
tent friendly to Chinese and Russian interests. For example, China has
invested in independent media in South Africa, and the Chinese-
owned StarTimes media group has operations in 30 African countries.
Many of these outlets have substantial online presences. Chinese state-
owned media companies control some of the fastest-growing Facebook
pages, and the English-language Russian channel RT maintains a ro-
bust following on YouTube. Chinese and Russian state media outlets
increasingly work together, echoing each other’s narratives, especially
criticism of the United States. For example, Russia’s news agency Sput-
nik, a propaganda outlet, has cooperation agreements with China’s
state-backed newspaper Global Times and its news agency Xinhua, in-
cluding for sharing content in Arabic and Spanish, and Russia’s RT and
China’s Xinhua have mirrored each other’s messages in blaming the
United States for fomenting protests in both Hong Kong and Russia.
ARCHITECTURE OF CONTROL
Government control of the digital network architecture also allows
authoritarians to restrict information flows within their own borders.
Under its 2019 “sovereign Internet” law, Russia is centralizing Inter-
net traffic in the country and creating chokepoints (akin to those of
China’s Great Firewall) that will enable Moscow to seal off the Inter-
net in Russia from the rest of the world. Other countries, from autoc-
racies such as Iran to democracies such as India, have used Internet
shutdowns to limit information in the face of unrest. China’s develop-
ment of a separate Internet root system, the digital mechanism that
directs online traffic, could be a key step toward a bifurcation of the
Internet. By developing control over part of the Internet, China could
turn connectivity into a geopolitical weapon, insisting that countries
submit to Chinese terms and conditions. The threat of disruptions on
5G networks that Chinese companies control could provide similar
leverage for geopolitical manipulation in the future.
China and Russia pose an alternative model to the free and open
Internet that the United States and its allies have championed for
decades. Their vision of multiple “sovereign” and controlled Internets
would hand significant control to national governments. Last fall,
Russia worked with China and others to secure UN General Assembly

support for the development of an international cybercrime treaty,
framed around national sovereignty and censorship, that would allow
greater government oversight of online content. Despite U.S. opposi-
tion, the resolution passed with the support of many African, Asian,
and Latin American countries. China and Russia have courted many
members of this large group—including Mongolia, Nigeria, and
South Africa—which scholars at the think tank New America have
dubbed “the Digital Deciders.” These states have not yet committed
to either the democratic Internet or the statist authoritarian model.
Beijing, in particular, is also working with other governments to
develop legal frameworks, often modeled on its own laws, for “sover-
eign Internets” that sanction greater government control over flows
of information. These laws frequently focus on censorship and the
removal of sensitive content, as well as issuing requirements for data
to be stored locally in a given country, a rule that erects protectionist
barriers and enables government scrutiny. The laws often accompany
the import of Chinese technologies and network infrastructure. Bei-
jing also frequently trains foreign officials on media and information
management and the use of data.
THE DEMOCRAT’S DILEMMA

The United States lags behind in many ways, including in the frame-
work it uses to understand the digital world. Washington views the
information contest in largely tactical terms and has failed to recog-
nize that these activities occur across three integrated dimensions:
information (the propagation, control, and manipulation of narra-
tives), architecture (the systems and platforms that transmit, order,
and collect information), and governance (the laws, norms, and, in
some cases, standards for content, data, and technology). And the
United States has not fully grasped what is already clear to China
and Russia, that the domains of cyberspace and the information
space increasingly converge.
Although Washington’s 2018 National Cyber Strategy notes the
threat of information operations and the authoritarian challenge to an
open Internet, most of the text focuses on a traditional view of cyber-
security that is more limited to the functioning of networks. The 2020
report of the Cyberspace Solarium Commission—a bipartisan inter-
governmental body tasked with devising a new strategy to defend
May/June 2020 153
Laura Rosenberger
U.S. cyberspace—goes a few steps further, recommending more con-

certed action on developing emerging technologies and countering
information operations, but doesn’t address questions on how infor-
mation and data should be governed. In 2017, then U.S. Secretary of
Defense James Mattis insisted that the military should recognize the
importance of information in twenty-first-century warfare and great-
power competition. But although civilian agencies are involved in
various strategies for managing cyberspace and information, the
United States lacks an integrated national strategy outside the mili-
tary domain for competition in the information space. Much of the
global information contest takes place on private networks aimed at
civilians—areas outside of traditional U.S. government jurisdiction,
where Washington has not yet figured out how to work systematically
with the private sector and civil society.
Officials in the United States and other democratic countries can-
not simply borrow from the Chinese and Russian playbooks. They
have to determine how best to engage in the information contest
without distorting information or compromising the fundamental
openness of their societies. When democracies regulate content and
increase control over the Internet’s architecture, they weaken demo-
cratic institutions. In the information contest, adhering to demo-
cratic values is not just the right thing to do—it is necessary to win
the competition with autocracies.
That’s because a fundamental asymmetry shapes this contest be-
tween democracies and authoritarian states. Authoritarian actors see
great advantages in controlling and manipulating information, but for
democracies, doing so would undermine their institutions and values.
At the same time, the dependence of democracies on free and open
political discourse provides opportunities for their rivals to intrude
into their information ecosystems. These dynamics constrain how de-
mocracies can respond to the malicious efforts of their adversaries.
Adopting the tactics of Beijing and Moscow, or accepting their fram-
ing of the contest as an information war, would mean surrendering to
authoritarian terms and creating a race to the bottom in which democ-
racies can only lose. The challenge for democracies is to thwart au-
thoritarians without playing into their hands.
Foreign actors aren’t the only threats to a free and open public
square. A polluted and chaotic information environment filled with
hate speech, extremism, and disinformation has weakened democracies
from within and eroded their claim to the moral high ground. From
the spread of white supremacist manifestoes and anti-vaccination con-
spiracies, to politicians disseminating deceptively manipulated videos,
to the online harassment of women, to elected leaders using social
media to share lies, the promotion on
online platforms of viral and extreme
content has encouraged behaviors at
The challenge for
odds with healthy democratic discourse. democracies is to not play
Without sufficient protections, the into the hands of
new digital economy pioneered in the authoritarians.
United States risks undermining tradi-
tional protections on privacy and indi-
vidual rights. What the scholar Shoshana Zuboff calls “surveillance
capitalism”—the way private technology firms have turned human
experience into the raw material of the new economy—actually nar-
rows the gulf between the application of digital technologies in de-
mocracies and their application in autocracies such as China.
Surveillance capitalism is motivated by profit, whereas China’s ex-
tensive surveillance systems are geared toward cementing govern-
ment control. But both forms of surveillance prioritize the mass
collection of data and have the power to shape how citizens perceive
their world. In the absence of action by democratic governments to
limit the use of surveillance technologies, such tools are eroding the
boundaries of privacy in many democracies, with the monitoring of
what students do in their dorms, for example, or the ability to iden-
tify individuals through images gathered from social media. Although
some cities have banned facial recognition technology, others, such as
London, are using that technology more concertedly. Washington’s
hands-off approach to the regulation of emerging technologies doesn’t
help; when democracies fail to present a clear alternative to their
authoritarian counterparts, they fuel the growing perception that the
digital technology being developed in the United States is no differ-
ent from that being developed in China.
European officials have begun to call for a new approach to address
these challenges. French President Emmanuel Macron has expressed
a desire for a “new path,” away from the “Californian form of Inter-
net,” in which the government allows companies to make decisions
that have huge social and economic implications, and from the “Chinese
Internet,” in which the government drives innovation and holds the
May/June 2020 155
Laura Rosenberger
reins. French and EU officials have separately begun articulating prin-

ciples for this third way, including many sound ideas. By framing
their visions in terms of protecting European “sovereignty,” however,
they have evoked Beijing’s and Moscow’s rhetoric, failing to clearly
differentiate the democratic model. Most troubling for U.S. officials
is that European officials are seeking a new model to distance their
countries from the United States, rather than working to build a
broader democratic framework. Refusing to address its own short-
comings while withdrawing from the world, the United States is dis-
engaged from these important deliberations.
FINDING STRENGTH IN HUMILITY

The United States should not continue to cede leadership to the pri-
vate sector. It must wrestle with tough issues, weighing the tradeoffs
among protecting democratic values, maintaining the country’s tech-
nological competitiveness, and keeping data flows relatively open
while preventing that information from falling into authoritarian
hands. And Washington must figure out how to gain greater coopera-
tion from the private sector without harming the ability of U.S. com-
panies to innovate or undermining the free market.
The United States should not simply focus on countering disinfor-
mation or techno-authoritarianism; it must take a more proactive stance
in building an information ecosystem that works in the interests of de-
mocracies. To do so, the United States needs to work with its democratic
partners to develop an updated information model that reflects demo-
cratic principles and puts individuals, not companies or governments, in
control of how their data are collected and used. Washington also needs
to structure and resource its government agencies for success in this
contest and develop new means of collaboration between the govern-
ment and the private sector, particularly around emerging technologies.
The United States needs to approach these tasks with humility,
conceding that its aloof approach to data privacy and the regulation of
technology has undermined the freedom and openness of its vision
for the Internet. With this admission, and through steps taken domes-
tically to better protect privacy and regulate technology companies,
Washington could more easily forge a multilateral coalition with its
democratic partners, particularly those in Europe. Continuing to sup-
port a free and open Internet is important in opposing the control that
authoritarian regimes seek through the spread of “sovereign Internets.”
But democracies also need to recognize and address the way bad actors
exploit democratic rights and freedoms to undermine them. A new
framework would prioritize data privacy and make transparent how
algorithms dictate what individuals see online. And it should better
balance power among governments, technology companies, and indi-
viduals. These measures would provide a clear contrast with the au-
thoritarian model and an attractive alternative for other countries
tempted by China’s side of a future bifurcated Internet.
Success in this endeavor will require restructuring the way the U.S.
government works on these issues. The United States should not imi-
tate Chinese or Russian structures, but no U.S. government entity
currently has the mandate, authority, or resources to tackle the full
scale of the information contest. The National Security Council should
organize an integrated, civilian-led interagency approach to network,
information, and emerging technologies. It should coordinate across
relevant government agencies and develop new cooperative mecha-
nisms with the private sector. The Department of Defense has begun
to prioritize the information contest, and Congress has given it new
authorities to conduct military operations in the information environ-
ment, such as when it sent warning messages to known Russian online
operatives ahead of the 2018 midterms, but its role should be limited.
Militarizing this contest would only play into the hands of authoritar-
ians by turning information into the weapon that they want it to be.
Much of today’s diplomacy happens not at private negotiating ta-
bles but in the public square, so the United States needs to free its
diplomats from traditionally slow bureaucratic forms of messaging so
they can be nimble in the modern information space by engaging in
public as a core part of their mission and by integrating technology
into their outreach. U.S. officials should expose through public re-
porting and funding of independent media the malign and coercive
information activities of authoritarians. U.S. leaders in the public and
private sectors need to push back against extraterritorial censorship
by standing with companies threatened by autocracies and exposing
technologies that automate censorship. Washington should try to curb
the expansion of the authoritarian model by advancing democratic
principles about cyberspace and the information space in multilateral
governance bodies. And the United States should invest in its own
civil society, protecting free and independent media and supporting
efforts to conduct research about the information space.
May/June 2020 157
Laura Rosenberger
The private sector has a major role to play, including through new
modes of public-private cooperation. Technology companies and tra-
ditional media need to grasp how malicious actors seek to turn their
businesses into geopolitical battlegrounds. At the same time, the gov-
ernment should not approach technological rivalry as a values-neutral
exercise in domination: for example,
thinking of competition over AI sys-
The United States risks tems as an arms race risks the develop-
falling behind in the ment of systems fundamentally at odds
development of new with democratic governance and val-
ues. Instead, the government and the
technologies. private sector should together drive in-
novation that advances the democratic
values of free speech and privacy, protects the free market, stops at-
tempts by bad actors to distort information, and presents a competi-
tive alternative to authoritarian-developed technologies. Both the
public and the private sectors, for instance, have started to develop
principles around the ethical use of facial recognition technology and
are collaborating on technologies to detect deepfakes: AI-concocted
audio or video of events that never happened.
Thanks to declining funding for basic research and China’s hands-on
role in stoking innovation, the United States risks falling behind in
the development of new technologies. The government should pri-
oritize emerging technologies such as AI and quantum computing
and raise funding for research and development in partnership with
private industry, redoubling efforts to train—and attract from over-
seas—top scientists and engineers. Policymakers should also restrict
technologies that can significantly hinder democratic governance and
human rights, starting with a moratorium on facial and gait recogni-
tion technology, which require oversight and clear rules to guard
against abuse, followed by a more rigorous consideration of how to
use and govern AI. There may also be technological solutions to prob-
lems of individual privacy: more sophisticated machine-learning
models, for instance, might depend less on large tranches of personal
data. The United States and its democratic allies should also priori-
tize a multilateral approach, in coordination with the private sector,
to greater influence international standards bodies such as the Inter-
national Telecommunication Union and how they guide the use of
emerging technology around the world.
The United States urgently needs to seize the initiative in the

information contest. The challenge will only grow as technologies
evolve and more countries adopt digital authoritarian strategies. As
the information space becomes more polluted, segmented, and rig-
idly controlled, it will become harder for the United States to build
resilience and respond to external threats. As more physical ob-
jects—from refrigerators to cars to coffee machines—go online as
part of the “Internet of Things,” digital technology will increasingly
order and govern life. Worse, the reliance on digital technologies
risks distorting perceptions of reality. Deepfakes may contribute to
the loss of any shared sense of reality. And as authoritarian models
of technology and information governance spread, the space for
democratic practices will shrink.
Yet the biggest barrier to successfully contesting the information
space may be the erosion of democracy at home. Democratic leaders
who weaponize information and disregard the principles of demo-
cratic governance will make their societies less resilient, fail to dem-
onstrate an alternative to the authoritarian model, and accelerate the
very degradation of the information space that authoritarians seek. In
the information contest, the United States cannot advance a demo-
cratic vision if its leaders do not embody it.∂
May/June 2020 159
The Right Way to Fix
the EU
Put Politics Before Economics
Matthias Matthijs
O
n January 30, 2020, representatives from the European Union’s
28 member states gathered at the European Parliament, in
Brussels, to approve the United Kingdom’s official exit from
the EU. After the vote was cast, the parliamentarians from the 27 re-
maining members waved their British counterparts goodbye while
singing “Auld Lang Syne,” the Scottish farewell song that celebrates
lasting friendship and the passing from old times to new. Among the
departing British, some wept tears of sorrow, others tears of joy.
On the continent, most consider the British decision to leave a
tragic mistake. Even so, the Brexiteers’ core contention—that the Eu-
ropean Economic Community they joined in 1973 has grown far be-
yond an international union of sovereign states and into something
far more ambitious and intrusive—is hard to deny. So is the claim that
the EU’s own missteps in handling the process of European integra-
tion played some part in driving the British out.
If the union wants to maintain its legitimacy and global influence
after Brexit, it should use this moment as an opportunity to rectify
those mistakes. Above all, the EU should stop putting economic logic
ahead of political reality when it should be the other way around—as
the original guiding principles of European integration held. The goal
of integration, as the British historian Alan Milward wrote, was not to
create a giant internal market or to eventually become a new global
superpower but to rescue Europe’s nation-states from the threat of col-
lapse, annexation, and forced occupation—threats that many European
MATTHIAS MATTHIJS is Associate Professor of International Political Economy at Johns
Hopkins University’s School of Advanced International Studies and Senior Fellow for
Europe at the Council on Foreign Relations.
The Right Way to Fix the EU
states had failed to resist in World War II. Those states had failed in
their primary task, to defend their national territory and protect their
citizens. For the sake of their own survival, European states needed
some degree of coordination to achieve the twin goals of political sta-
bility and economic prosperity. That would require some surrender of
national sovereignty to a supranational entity, but the underlying ob-
jective would be to buttress the legitimacy of member states.
European leaders today should recommit to that vision and develop
a new division of labor between Brussels and national capitals. That can
happen only if the most powerful remaining member states—France,
Germany, and Italy—reach a consensus over what went wrong and why.
If those states manage to find common ground, Brexit could yet turn
from a bruising debacle into a moment of promise and renewal.
ONE MARKET TO RULE THEM ALL

The roots of the EU’s multiple crises during the past ten years—over
the euro, migration, Brexit, and the rule of law—reach back to the
1980s and 1990s. For much of the postwar era, European integration
had followed a simple logic. States would gradually liberalize their
economies and foster trade and investment relations. Meanwhile, in
the interest of domestic political stability, they would maintain na-
tional control over important policy levers—monetary and fiscal af-
fairs, industrial policy, public procurement, labor-market policy, and
so forth. But starting in 1985, the new European Commission presi-
dent, Jacques Delors, turned that logic on its head.
Instead of policy discretion at the national level, Delors’s vision for
the bloc emphasized pan-European rules on matters of trade, regula-
tions, and public procurement. Over the following decade, the EU rap-
idly created a genuine common market by abolishing all nontariff
barriers to trade. Delors also laid the groundwork for a single currency,
which transferred control over monetary policy and exchange rates to
the eurozone level and severely limited member states’ discretion over
fiscal policy through a set of rules laid down in the Stability and Growth
Pact. By the mid-1990s, the one-time grand bargain between sovereign
states had given way to a radically new paradigm that put economic
and financial connectedness first and political sovereignty second.
Yet the new model was deeply flawed. True federations rely on fi-
nancial solidarity in times of crisis, but the EU failed to put in place the
supranational institutions that would have made such solidarity possible,
May/June 2020 161
Matthias Matthijs
leaving the single market and the euro vulnerable to inevitable shocks.
The single market enabled the free movement of capital but lacked the
shared institutions to regulate those flows through mechanisms of
joint financial supervision. The single currency meant a common
monetary policy but had no provision for common control over fiscal
matters to cushion the uneven effects of a potential crisis. At the same
time, the EU’s focus on strict economic and financial rules eclipsed its
political priorities, in particular the need to enforce basic democratic
principles and the rule of law, both of which were largely taken for
granted, even as enlargement to the East became a reality in 2004.
The milestone treaties of the Delors era, the 1987 Single European
Act and the 1992 Maastricht Treaty, radically altered European mar-
kets by enshrining specific economic policy choices in supranational
agreements that could be changed only by a unanimous vote. To some
extent, globalization was driving similar changes everywhere. But the
EU’s member states embraced the logic of international markets with
much greater enthusiasm than anyone else in the advanced industrial
world. And in the first decade of this century, when the EU expanded
to take in ten formerly communist states of central and eastern Eu-
rope, its leaders mostly worried about how the new members would
manage the transition from central planning to market principles.
They did not concern themselves much with the possibility of demo-
cratic backsliding, which has since emerged as the main threat in
newer EU members, such as Hungary and Poland, and has the poten-
tial to seriously erode the democratic integrity of the entire union.
THE RETURN OF POLITICS

If these oversights once seemed forgivable, the economic and political
tumult of the 2010s revealed that they were anything but inconsequen-
tial. First came the eurozone crisis. The lack of an EU-wide financial
and banking union was always going to lead to serious macroeconomic
imbalances between creditor countries and debtor states. But what
transmuted a relatively manageable Greek fiscal problem in 2010 into
a full-blown, contagious sovereign debt crisis was the EU’s obsession
with rigid fiscal rules and competitiveness at the expense of national-
level flexibility. When the Greek government struggled to pay its sov-
ereign debt, the so-called troika—made up of the European Central
Bank (ECB), the European Commission, and the International Mone-
tary Fund—arranged a bailout. But in return, it insisted that Greece
Was it something we said? At the G-7 summit in Biarritz, France, August 2019
build up a substantial budgetary surplus for the foreseeable future so
it could pay back its debt. The troika imposed crippling fiscal austerity
measures and sweeping structural reforms, mostly intended to deregu-
late the Greek economy. That intervention not only exacerbated the
Greek sovereign debt problem by slashing growth; it also left the
Greek government with very little say in its country’s economy. As far
as economic policy was concerned, the outcome of national elections—
including the 2015 victory of the far-left party Syriza, which promised
an end to austerity—was largely meaningless.
If national politics was powerless in the face of the European debt
crisis, it came back with a vengeance during the migration crisis that
followed in 2015. The EU’s response to the wave of refugees reaching
its southern shores was hampered by the so-called Dublin Regulation,
which required asylum seekers to register as refugees wherever they
A N D R EW PAR S O N S / R E U T E R S
first entered the EU, putting a disproportionate burden on the main

entry states, especially Greece and Italy. German Chancellor Angela
Merkel tried to redistribute the refugees more equally but failed. Sev-
eral central European states, in particular, refused to accept more than
a handful, arguing that Merkel’s redistribution scheme infringed on
their sovereignty. Before long, even the Schengen system of visa-free,
May/June 2020 163
Matthias Matthijs
open borders began to fray, with several EU states building fences or

temporarily introducing passport checks. It was an ugly reminder that
supranational solidarity in the EU had strict limits.
National politics continued its vengeful return in the 2016 Brexit
referendum. In the months leading up to the referendum, British Prime
Minister David Cameron toured European capitals to renegotiate the
terms of his country’s EU membership, hoping that the specter of Brexit
would allow him to secure even better
The EU should stop putting terms than those his country already en-
joyed. But although London had in the
economic logic ahead past managed to negotiate opt-outs
of political reality when it from the euro and the Schengen travel
should be the other way area, renegotiating any of the EU’s four
basic freedoms—the movement of
around. goods, services, capital, and, above all,
people—proved much harder. In the
end, Cameron had to admit that under the new membership terms,
London would still not be able to control the inflow of migrants from
the rest of the EU. Quick to exploit latent fears of immigrants, the
Brexit campaign, led by the conservative populists Boris Johnson and
Nigel Farage, pounced—and promised, successfully, to “take back con-
trol” over British laws, money, and borders.
In what is perhaps the bleakest reminder of the EU’s failure on the
political front, the bloc has impotently stood by as two of its member
states have gradually slid into authoritarianism. Hungary and Poland
still maintain formal democratic institutions, but both now tilt the
playing field so far that neither meets the minimal standards for lib-
eral democracy. Elections in Hungary and Poland are free but not fair,
ruling parties have eliminated checks and balances on executive power,
and after years of court stacking, the judiciary in both countries is no
longer independent. In both cases, the EU has triggered a sanctions
mechanism, the so-called Article 7 procedure, which can strip a mem-
ber state of its voting rights in the European Council, among other
sanctions. But the process requires unanimity among all EU member
states (excluding the offending country), and Hungary and Poland
have both promised to veto any sanctions against the other.
In past decades, European leaders might have agreed on enough to
find a way out of these various imbroglios. Each of the big innova-
tions that took shape in the 1980s and 1990s—the single market, the
FOX NEWS
“The world is watchi
Trump tweets support
protesters after Ukrain
CNN
Protesters call for Khamenei t
admits it mistakenly shot down
AP NEWS
Breaking News
Iran’s supreme lea
passenger plane sh
NY TIMES
for investigation..
Iran’s admission that it shot d

TIME
Should the U.S.

fanned growing fury at home
is a murderer!” protesters
time cha
The U.S. and I
year conflict is
BBC
pull out of the Syria air strikes kill 18 in
Middle East?
WASH POST
Def
evid
On the day U.S. forces killed S
another secret operation targe
official in Yemen.
CNBC
Don’t get overwhelmed. Get informed.
Defense Secretary
Compare the candidates on defense, the evidence
time on Iran th
economy, foreign aid, and more. NPR
More than 20 Saudis will be sent
probe of the attack on a Fla. nava
officials tell NPR.
WSJ
Breaking News
The U.S. warned Iraq that
its New York Fed account h
Baghdad expels American
NPR
The House vote
Congress’ appro
against Iran
CFR.org/2020 BI
Analysis: Tru
www.CSSExamPoint.com Soleimani is
Matthias Matthijs
euro, and eastward enlargement—found broad support among the

main national players, with the exception of the British opt-out on the
euro. The single market was an Anglo-French idea, the euro was a
Franco-German one, and Berlin and London both championed en-
largement, although each for its own reasons. Meanwhile, Italian
elites across the political spectrum were happy to go along with all
three of these projects, which they hoped would accelerate much-
needed domestic reform and lower Italy’s inflation and interest rates.
There is no trace of consensus today. The United Kingdom is out.
French President Emmanuel Macron has outlined an ambitious vision
for much more fiscal integration, in which member states would trans-
fer to the EU not only control of monetary policy but also some of the
power to tax and spend, so as to build a sizable eurozone budget. Ger-
many, arguably the country that has benefited the most from the EU’s
current institutional framework, is quite comfortable with the institu-
tional status quo and unwilling to make drastic changes. Many mem-
bers of Italy’s current political elite, meanwhile, dream of a return to
a distant, pre-EU past, when the state could use the tools of currency
devaluation and fiscal stimulus to spur national economic growth.
Overcoming the EU’s current malaise will require European leaders
to compromise on a broad set of political and economic principles.
And since Germany’s commitment to the current regime will be hard
to sustain given growing opposition in eastern and southern member
states, any such compromise would need to strike a balance between
the Italian desire for greater domestic policy flexibility and the French
dream of more intra-European solidarity.
A NEW CONSENSUS
What could such a new grand bargain look like in practice? On the
economic front, it would mean giving member states far more politi-
cal control over fiscal policy. National governments should be able to
decide for themselves how to use their tax revenues and make budget-
ary tradeoffs. They should be free to temporarily subsidize ailing sec-
tors, give preference to their own construction companies or law firms
in their public procurement (a common practice at the state level in
the United States), and bail out struggling banks and other systemi-
cally important companies, none of which they can easily do under
current EU rules. That flexibility would once again give electorates a
real say in economic policy, counteracting the so-called democratic
deficit that has beset the union since the start of the eurozone crisis.
Such a deal would require a fairly loose interpretation of the EU’s cur-
rent fiscal rules and some temporary deviations from a few sacred
single-market principles, such as the prohibition against favoring na-
tional service providers. The outcome
would be less economic efficiency at National governments
the European level but greater political
stability: national governments could should be able to decide for
afford to be more responsive to the le- themselves how to use
gitimate demands of their electorates, their tax revenues and make
taking the wind out of the sails of right-
wing populists such as Marine Le Pen budgetary tradeoffs.
in France and Matteo Salvini in Italy,
who consistently argue that the EU does not benefit ordinary people.
At the same time, the EU could follow France’s lead in developing
more supranational mechanisms for economic risk sharing, even if
doing so would run counter to economic orthodoxy. The eurozone
states took some steps in this direction in the years following the debt
crisis, creating a banking union that allows the ECB to monitor and, if
necessary, wind down ailing private banks (even though the rules gov-
erning this arrangement are, once again, needlessly strict and could
have allowed for more national discretion). Europe should add to this
banking union an additional pillar: a eurozone-wide deposit insurance
scheme, which would ease the burden on any individual member state
if one of its banks ran into trouble.
In the same vein, the EU should finally push its member states to
pool some of their sovereign debt through so-called eurobonds, which
would make a sudden return of high interest rates far less likely and
give individual governments more budgetary breathing room, reduc-
ing the risk of capital flight or bank runs in a future crisis. Clearly,
that step would carry some risk of moral hazard, since it would reduce
individual governments’ responsibility for the sovereign debt they ac-
cumulated. But even if pooling all present and future debt is not po-
litically viable or financially desirable, a big chunk of the existing debt
pile could be mutualized, as long as there are reasonable rules to pre-
vent governments from taking advantage. (The system could have a
debt ceiling, for instance, beyond which member states would need to
raise their own funds on the market at higher interest rates.) Finally,
EU leaders should revisit the ECB’s narrow mandate. At present, the
May/June 2020 167
Matthias Matthijs
central bank’s sole official responsibility is to ensure price stability—

an outmoded function in a world where the battle against inflation has
long been won. Instead, the ECB should be allowed to do as the U.S.
Federal Reserve does and also focus on other goals, including full
employment and overall economic prosperity.
On the political front, the EU must not compromise in its commitment
to liberal democratic principles, the separation of powers, and the rule
of law. The union’s existing legal framework to protect fundamental
democratic principles needs some extra bite—meaning much stricter
rules for potential offenders. The EU disburses substantial amounts of
funds to economically lagging member states, including Hungary and
Poland, which are among the largest net recipients. It could make those
funds conditional on good behavior. Additionally, the pan-European par-
ties in the European Parliament, especially the influential European
People’s Party, which is home to parliamentarians from Hungary’s ruling
Fidesz party, should work out clear rules for expelling any representatives
from national governments who undermine their country’s democracy.
Finally, one need not call into question the free movement of peo-
ple—one of the EU’s fundamental principles—to recognize the po-
litical risks that come with high levels of migration among EU
member states. Although EU immigrants make significant net finan-
cial contributions to their host countries at the national level, they
can also put pressure on local public services, such as schools, hous-
ing, and hospitals, especially if the inflow is large and sudden. That
fact offers ready fodder for populist exploitation.
What is more, the brain drain from eastern and southern European
states weakens those countries’ economies and can negatively affect
their citizens’ views of the benefits of European integration. As the
political scientist R. Daniel Kelemen has shown in the case of Hun-
gary, emigration can also have the perverse effect of strengthening
nascent illiberal regimes. Liberal elites and educated young people
leave the country in droves. Those who stay behind are either unwill-
ing or unable to resist the slide into authoritarianism. Of course,
counteracting that trend without imperiling free movement is diffi-
cult—all the more reason to fight democratic backsliding in Hungary
and elsewhere head-on, through a more forceful Article 7 mechanism.
As for immigration from outside the EU, the bloc could allocate more
funds to border patrol and move away from the outdated Dublin Reg-
ulation to a more equitable distribution mechanism for asylum seekers.
THE PATH TO GLOBAL POWER

Putting its own house in order will also allow the EU to be a more ef-
fective global power in an increasingly hostile world. With a U.S.
president who is loath to enter military conflicts and views the EU as
a geopolitical rival, Europe can no longer rely solely on the United
States to guarantee its security. Global trade and financial links have
created dependencies that powerful actors can easily exploit, espe-
cially in an era of intensifying great-power competition. In this more
multipolar and chaotic world, the EU is more relevant than ever for its
relatively small member states, a lesson the United Kingdom is
bound to learn the hard way in the not-too-distant future, as it at-
tempts to steer its own course.
One area of potential European strength is international monetary
relations. In the 1960s, the French finance minister—and future presi-
dent—Valéry Giscard d’Estaing referred to the U.S. dollar as the
United States’ “exorbitant privilege.” He was right—the United States
gains both economic and geopolitical advantages from printing the
world’s reserve currency of choice. It can export some of its inflation
and borrow from global markets in its own currency at much cheaper
rates than other states. Through its control over the international pay-
ment service SWIFT and the influence of the U.S. Federal Reserve
System, Washington has been able to pressure adversaries and impose
financial sanctions with global reach. The euro has the potential to ri-
val the power of the dollar, but for that to happen, the eurozone needs
a much more liquid currency market. Adding a eurozone-wide deposit
insurance system and eurobonds would go a long way toward that goal.
A bigger international role for the euro would, in turn, allow the EU to
give financial weight to its demands and squeeze rival powers such as
Russia more effectively, just as the United States has done with Iran.
Trade is another source of European leverage. The trade wars initi-
ated by U.S. President Donald Trump may have diminished his coun-
try’s overall welfare, but they offer an important reminder: states can
use market access as a geopolitical tool. When it comes to using protec-
tionist policies, actors that run a large trade deficit, as the United States
does, have a significant advantage over those that depend entirely on
export-led growth. But there is no reason why the EU, despite its current
trade surplus, could not use access to its formidable internal market as a
bargaining chip to force other states to advance core European interests,
such as reducing carbon emissions and protecting human rights. The
May/June 2020 169
Matthias Matthijs
EU’s market power makes trade one of the few domains in which the
bloc can negotiate on equal terms with great powers such as the United
States and China. The EU’s commitment to multilateralism (through
institutions such as the World Trade Organization) means it will also
have many smaller states on its side in any new global trade disputes.
Finally, if the EU is to compete on equal terms with U.S. and Chinese
industrial and digital services giants such as Apple, Google, Alibaba, and
Huawei, it will need to create its own rival champions. Europe already
has at least one such company: Airbus, the French-German-Spanish
multinational aerospace conglomerate that dominates the world market
for commercial aircraft in a duopoly with the American firm Boeing. But
with only five EU companies among the global top 40 (by annual reve-
nue), much work remains, and the EU’s current strict antitrust rules are
hopelessly out of date for this type of endeavor. Fortunately, some na-
tional leaders—especially France’s economy and finance minister, Bruno
Le Maire, and his German counterparts, Peter Altmaier and Olaf
Scholz—understand the new realities of global competition and are
pushing for changes, including an overhaul of the EU’s merger rules.
WAITING FOR BERLIN

None of these steps will be easy. The biggest obstacle of all may be
political resistance from Germany—the country that stands to lose
the most in the short term from moving away from an institutional
settlement that has served it well. But Merkel, who is in the twilight
of her long tenure as chancellor, has admitted that Brexit should serve
as a wake-up call to the EU. She should use her remaining political
capital to make the case that more power at the bottom of the EU will
mean more economic robustness at the top, just as more solidarity at
the top will mean less political instability at the bottom.
The European Commission’s new president, former German De-
fense Minister Ursula von der Leyen, is perhaps uniquely placed,
alongside Merkel, to convince her fellow Germans of the need for
fundamental reform. Von der Leyen has also promised that hers will
be a “geopolitical” European Commission, in a sign that Brussels is at
last beginning to take seriously the need for a globally assertive EU.
Now national governments—especially in Paris, Berlin, and Rome,
but also in Budapest and Warsaw—need to follow her lead. The guid-
ing EU principle should once again be the primacy of politics rather
than economics—not for old times’ sake but for the future.∂
REVIEWS & RESPONSES
TLTKTKKTT
–TKTKT
The past three years have shown how
easily a power-hungry president can
ride roughshod over norms in ways that
harm the country’s institutions.
—Max Boot
AL D R AG O / T H E N EW YO R K T I M ES / R E DU X
A Few Good Men The Two-State Devolution

Max Boot 172 Tarek Osman; Michael S. Doran 190
The Myanmar Mirage Recent Books 194

Sebastian Strangio 179
Trials and Tribulations

Jeffrey D. Sachs 186
were, to be sure, some warning signs of
A Few Good Men trouble to come, such as when he attacked
the war hero John McCain, a Republican
senator from Arizona (“I like people who
Trump, the Generals, and the weren’t captured”), and belittled the
Corrosion of Civil-Military parents of a soldier who had died in
Relations combat after they dared to criticize him.
But initially, at least from the mili-
tary’s perspective, the good seemed to
Max Boot far outweigh the bad. Trump pushed for
higher defense spending; sent more
U.S. forces and firepower to Afghani-
Trump and His Generals: The Cost of Chaos stan, Iraq, and Syria; and liberalized the
BY PETER BERG EN. Penguin Press, military’s rules of engagement, giving
2019, 400 pp. commanders on the ground more
freedom of maneuver. Even more eye-
A Very Stable Genius: Donald J. Trump’s catching was his appointment of generals
Testing of America to senior civilian positions: the retired
BY PHILIP RUCKER AND CAROL Marine Corps general James Mattis
LEONNIG. Penguin Press, 2020, 480 pp. became the secretary of defense, the
retired Marine general John Kelly became
Holding the Line: Inside Trump’s Pentagon the secretary of homeland security and
With Secretary Mattis then the White House chief of staff, the
BY GUY SNODG RASS. Sentinel, 2019, retired army lieutenant general Michael
252 pp. Flynn became Trump’s national security
adviser—and, when he flamed out after
Call Sign Chaos: Learning to Lead just 24 days, was replaced by the then
BY JIM MAT TIS AND BING WEST. active-duty army lieutenant general H. R.
Random House, 2019, 320 pp. McMaster. Trump, for his part, reveled in
the generals’ aura of manliness, hailing
W
hen Donald Trump was “Mad Dog” Mattis (a nickname Mattis
elected president of the hated) as “a true General’s General!”
United States, there was good Some critics worried that the overrep-
cause to think that he would be popular resentation of generals in the adminis-
with the armed forces. He was, for a tration would impinge on civilian control
start, a Republican, and the military of the military. But many others cel-
leans heavily conservative. He had also ebrated the appointment of these gener-
run an ostentatiously pro-military als, hoping that their presence in the
campaign, promising to “rebuild the administration would provide the reality
military, take care of vets and make the TV star turned president with much-
world respect the U.S. again!” There needed “adult” supervision.
Things went wrong almost immedi-
MAX BOOT is Jeane J. Kirkpatrick Senior
Fellow for National Security Studies at the ately. How that happened—how the
Council on Foreign Relations. promise of smooth civil-military relations
A Few Good Men
devolved into acrimony, backbiting, and Rucker and Leonnig (who offer the
bewilderment—is documented in four juiciest details). Mattis had summoned
new books. Two are journalistic ac- the president and his senior advisers to
counts: Trump and His Generals, a fair explain why the U.S.-led system of
and comprehensive overview of Trump’s security alliances and trade relationships
foreign policy by the journalist and still benefited the United States. It did
think tanker Peter Bergen, and A Very not go well. All the accounts agree that
Stable Genius, a work of first-rate news Trump, who has a notoriously short
coverage and valuable insight by Philip attention span and a hair-trigger tem-
Rucker and Carol Leonnig, reporters at per, openly fumed during Mattis’s
The Washington Post (where I am a colum- presentation. According to Rucker and
nist). The other two books are memoirs. Leonnig, the president lashed out at
Holding the Line, by Guy Snodgrass, a U.S. allies, telling his generals, “We are
retired U.S. Navy officer who served as owed money you haven’t been collect-
Mattis’s Pentagon speechwriter, gives the ing!” Mattis interjected, “This is what
impression of being hastily cobbled keeps us safe,” but Trump predictably
together and includes more interoffice wasn’t buying it. “You’re all losers,” he
politics than most readers will want to spat. “You don’t know how to win
know. But it provides a few nuggets that anymore.” A few minutes later, the
have not been reported elsewhere—such president—who had cited bone spurs to
as the claim that Trump told Mattis to evade service in the Vietnam War—told
“screw Amazon” on a major contract a roomful of decorated generals, “I
because he was so unhappy with The wouldn’t go to war with you people.
Washington Post (which is owned by You’re a bunch of dopes and babies.”
Amazon’s founder, Jeff Bezos). The other The generals, conditioned not to
memoir—Call Sign Chaos, by Mattis and question the commander in chief’s
Bing West—doesn’t deal with the contro- authority, sat in stunned silence. It was
versies of the Trump administration at left to then Secretary of State Rex
all. “I’m old fashioned: I don’t write about Tillerson to speak up. “No, that’s just
sitting Presidents,” Mattis explains. But wrong,” he retorted. “Mr. President,
the book does provide an expertly crafted you’re totally wrong. None of that is
account of Mattis’s career, which helps true.” After the meeting, standing with a
explain why the marriage between Trump few people he trusted, Tillerson called the
and his generals was destined for divorce. president “a fucking moron.” When that
comment was reported by NBC News a
ANOTHER ONE BITES THE DUST few months later, it sealed Tillerson’s fate.
A key turning point in the relationship Tillerson’s firing in the middle of
was a July 2017 briefing for Trump held March 2018 had an unintended conse-
in what’s known as “the Tank,” a secure quence: it left the secretary of defense
Pentagon conference room used by the without backup. Until then, Tillerson and
Joint Chiefs of Staff. Accounts of the Mattis had formed a tag team to stop
meeting are provided by Bergen (who Trump’s more reckless impulses. They
begins his book with it), Snodgrass had succeeded in preventing the presi-
(who organized it and was present), and dent from pulling out of the Iran nuclear
May/June 2020 173
Max Boot
deal and from abandoning NATO’s Syria’s tiny oil fields, and he has agreed
mutual-defense provision. Mattis had to withdraw all U.S. troops from
also worked with Kelly to delay the Afghanistan by May 2020 as part of a
implementation of Trump’s more deal with the Taliban.
provocative requests, Bergen writes,
such as an order in early 2018 to READING COMPREHENSION
evacuate American civilians from South Although Call Sign Chaos does not
Korea in preparation for a possible detail Mattis’s tenure at the Defense
military strike on North Korea. Department, it reveals why he and the
With Tillerson gone, it was only a other generals so often clashed with
matter of time before Mattis was out the Trump. Mattis writes that from an
door, too. Snodgrass writes that he early age, the Marine Corps instilled in
found out as early as the summer of him the fundamentals of leadership,
2018 that Mattis was planning to serve which he sums up as “the three Cs”:
only until the end of the year. The final competence (“Don’t dabble in your job;
break came in December, when Mattis you must master it”), caring (“A marine
objected to Trump’s initial decision to knows when you are invested in his
pull U.S. forces out of northern Syria. character, his dreams, and his develop-
Kelly, who was close to Mattis after ment. Men like that don’t quit on
years of Marine Corps service together, you”), and conviction (“State your
left shortly after Mattis. McMaster had flat-ass rules and stick to them. . . . At
already been fired in March of that year the same time, leaven your professional
after clashing with Trump, as well as passion with personal humility and
with Mattis. (Bergen writes that compassion for your troops”). It is hard
Mattis “pointedly referred” to the to imagine an ethos further removed
national security adviser as “Lieuten- from Trump’s relentless self-promotion,
ant General McMaster” to make clear contempt for underlings, and disdain
that he outranked him.) for expertise. The term “self-sacrifice”
The only high-ranking officer who isn’t part of Trump’s vocabulary, and he
has maintained consistent influence views loyalty as a one-way street: he
with Trump since the start of the wants subordinates to be loyal to
administration is the retired general Jack him—even at the cost of breaking the
Keane, a former army vice chief of staff law—but he will be disloyal to them
who was instrumental in advocating the whenever it is advantageous to do so,
Iraq “surge” in 2006–7. Keane has never often claiming to barely know them
accepted an official appointment, when they get in trouble.
however, preferring to provide informal The only thing more alien to Trump
advice. Bergen writes that at various than Mattis’s military ethos is the
points, Keane helped talk Trump out of former secretary of defense’s love of
his desire to pull troops out of northern reading. Call Sign Chaos was largely
Syria and Afghanistan—but not even finished before Mattis joined the
Keane could ultimately stop Trump. administration, but it reads as if Mattis
Trump has since abandoned the Syrian is covertly addressing the president
Kurds by relocating U.S. troops to when he writes, “If you haven’t read
A Few Good Men
hundreds of books, you are functionally adviser was too professorial, trying to
illiterate, and you will be incompetent, cram him with too much information.
because your personal experiences “Trump would ridicule McMaster,”
alone aren’t broad enough to sustain Rucker and Leonnig write, “by describ-
you. Any commander who claims he is ing the topic of the day and deploying a
‘too busy to read’ is going to fill body series of large, complex phrases to
bags with his troops as he learns the indicate how boring McMaster’s brief-
hard way.” Trump is, of course, notorious ing was going to be.” They add that “the
for not reading long briefing papers, National Security Council staff were
much less books. deeply disturbed by Trump’s treatment
By contrast, all the generals who of their boss”—and rightfully so.
served at the top of the Trump adminis- Because many of those staffers were
tration were voracious readers, and it military officers, word spread through
came as a shock to them to deal with a the tight-knit military community
president so intellectually incurious and about how poorly Trump treated the
certain that he already knew every- decorated veteran of the Gulf War,
TH E PROJ ECT TWINS
thing—even though, Rucker and Leonnig Iraq, and Afghanistan.

report, Trump didn’t even know that
India shares a 2,000-mile border with EVERYBODY TALKS
China. Trump became disenchanted by The hostility between Trump and the
McMaster because the national security generals has since broken into public view.
May/June 2020 175
Max Boot
After Mattis wrote a blistering resignation veteran who had testified about Trump’s
letter, Trump called him “the world’s attempts to pressure Ukraine into
most overrated general.” Kelly waited helping his reelection campaign. Trump
more than a year after his departure to had Vindman and his twin brother, also
publicly criticize Trump, and when he a lieutenant colonel serving on the
did, in February of this year, Trump National Security Council staff, escorted
attacked him on Twitter: “When I from the White House grounds and
terminated John Kelly, which I couldn’t then suggested that the military launch
do fast enough, he knew full well that he disciplinary proceedings against Vind-
was way over his head. Being Chief of man—something that the army refused
Staff just wasn’t for him.” That critique, to do. Kelly praised Vindman after his
of course, only raises the question of firing for doing “exactly what we teach
why Trump appointed Kelly—and so them to do” by refusing to obey an
many other officials he now disparages— “illegal order” and criticized Trump’s
in the first place. support of Gallagher as “exactly the
Beyond his very public break with wrong thing to do.” Officers such as
his generals, Trump’s relationship with Kelly know how hard it is to maintain
the military deteriorated owing to a discipline and good order when the
series of decisions that did not sit well commander in chief is signaling that
with the armed forces. My conversa- war crimes are acceptable but telling
tions with current and former officers the truth is not.
indicated that they approved of Trump’s Many military personnel clearly still
killing of Qasem Soleimani, the Iranian support Trump and approve of his
general who was responsible for hundreds swagger, but the president’s assaults on
of U.S. deaths in Iraq, and Abu Bakr the military’s hallowed traditions of
al-Baghdadi, the head of the Islamic “duty, honor, country” have grated on
State (or ISIS). But many I talked to many others. The Military Times’
were furious when Trump decided last surveys of military personnel reflect
October to abandon Syrian Kurdish this disenchantment: when Trump was
forces by moving U.S. military person- first elected, in November 2016, 46
nel who had long served as a buffer percent of respondents had a positive
between the Kurds and hostile Turkish view of him, and 37 percent had a
forces, despite the fact that the Kurds negative one. By November 2019, a stark
had fought alongside the United States change had taken place: 42 percent
to defeat ISIS and had lost 11,000 positive, 50 percent negative. That same
soldiers in the process. That decision, month, a number of generals unloaded
many felt, ran counter to the military’s on Trump, albeit from behind the cloak
commitment to comrades on the of anonymity, in an article in The
battlefield. Many in the U.S. military Atlantic by Mark Bowden. Some have
were unhappy that Trump restored the criticized the now departed generals for
rank of the Navy SEAL Edward Galla- not speaking out more in public, but their
gher—who was accused of war crimes in reticence is understandable given that
Iraq—and fired Lieutenant Colonel they have been taught from the start of
Alexander Vindman, an Iraq war their careers to steer clear of politics and
A Few Good Men
that opposition to Trump could create a made compromises, such as sending the
presidential backlash against colleagues National Guard to the border in a
still on active duty. At the same time, by pointless deployment designed to score
not coming to Trump’s defense, the political points for Trump. And al-
retired generals have made clear that they though Mattis’s decision to avoid
are no fans of the president. criticizing the serving president makes
sense from his perspective as a retired
KISS THE RING general, he should realize that he was
The Trump presidency has been an serving in a civilian capacity and that
education for both the commander in he owes the American people a full
chief and the troops he leads. Trump, explanation before the 2020 election of
who knew little of government at first, whether Trump is fit to be president,
learned about how much power he can based on his personal experience.
wield. He doesn’t seem to have learned Precisely because Mattis is such a
why previous presidents restrained well-known and well-respected figure,
themselves, by, for example, not telling his judgment would carry weight,
the Justice Department whom to especially with Republican voters. His
prosecute or what prison sentences to successor, Mark Esper, lacks Mattis’s
recommend. Trump has been embold- public standing (and obvious allies at
ened because he feels that his contro- the top echelon of the government) and
versial decisions—such as moving the thus is more readily susceptible to
U.S. embassy in Israel to Jerusalem and political influence.
killing Soleimani—have worked out Trump has now surrounded himself
better than naysayers predicted. He has with partisans, such as Mike Pompeo,
become more obstinate and less willing his secretary of state, and Robert
to listen to advice the longer he has O’Brien, his national security adviser,
been in office. who see themselves as the president’s
The generals, for their part, learned enablers, not his restrainers. (O’Brien
that they could not simply proceed reportedly distributes printouts of
with business as usual. Trump dispelled Trump’s tweets to his staff to guide
that hope by surprising the Pentagon their decision-making and priorities.)
leadership with out-of-the-blue orders The agencies they oversee have suffered
to stop military exercises with South lasting damage: at the National Secu-
Korea and to kick out transgender troops; rity Council, O’Brien has cut staffing by
the latter decision, Snodgrass writes, a third, and at the State Department,
“created chaos in the Pentagon.” Mattis morale plummeted after Pompeo
tried to humor Trump as much as he refused to defend diplomats such as
could but block him as much as pos- William Taylor and Marie Yovanovitch
sible. Snodgrass recalls Mattis saying against the criticism of the president
that he’d “rather swallow acid” than and his political allies.
hold Trump’s military parade in Wash- By contrast, the Department of
ington and notes that Mattis alone Defense, because it is so much larger
among the cabinet refused to praise than any other government agency and
Trump on command. But even Mattis so suffused with the military ethos, is
May/June 2020 177
Max Boot
more resistant to outside influence. But long as Trump is in the White House
it is hardly immune. Witness, for and Mitch McConnell, Republican of
example, Trump’s decision in February Kentucky, is in control of the Senate.
to fire John Rood, an undersecretary of But limits on the president’s authority
defense who had clashed with the will always be hardest to enforce in the
president by pushing to release aid to realm of national security, where there
Ukraine and by opposing the designa- is good reason to give the commander
tion of Iran’s Islamic Revolutionary in chief considerable discretion to
Guard Corps as a terrorist organization. defend the nation. Ultimately, the
Trump’s attempts to bend the greatest safeguard against the misuse of
Defense Department to his will, employ the military is to inculcate a strong
it for political purposes, and purge it of devotion to the rule of law among the
all dissenting viewpoints will only officer corps so that future military
accelerate if he wins another term. The leaders will fight back against illegal or
generals who were hailed as the “axis of unethical commands—as Mattis, Kelly,
adults” are long gone, and their succes- and McMaster have recently done in
sors, military and civilian alike, have many (but not all) instances.∂
gotten the message about what happens
to any official who dares to stand up to a
mercurial and wrathful chief executive.
The longer Trump stays in office, the
harder it will be to safeguard the apoliti-
cal traditions of service to the nation,
dedication to the rule of law, and loyalty
to the Constitution, which are the
hallmarks of the American armed forces.
If Trump loses in November, the
process of repairing the damage can
begin, but the past three years have shown
how easily a power-hungry president
can ride roughshod over norms in ways
that harm the country’s institutions.
Trump is surely not the last populist
demagogue to win office. Going forward,
Congress must impose greater limits
on the president’s authority to prevent
abuses such as political interference at the
Department of Justice and troop deploy-
ments for political purposes. Congress is
already taking action to limit the
president’s war-making authority—for
example, by repealing authorizations
for the use of military force—although
such legislation will not be enacted as
projects, and it moved to improve rela-
The Myanmar tions with the United States and the
West. In late 2011, U.S. Secretary of State
Mirage Hillary Clinton visited Yangon. Shortly
after, Barack Obama made the first-ever
visit to Myanmar by a sitting U.S.
Why the West Got Burma president, touting “the power of a new
Wrong beginning.” As liberalization proceeded,
Western countries lifted sanctions, and
Sebastian Strangio Myanmar rejoined the world. Aid and
investment flooded into the country,
along with a parade of luminaries—from
the financier and philanthropist George
The Hidden History of Burma: Race, Soros to former British Prime Minister
Capitalism, and the Crisis of Democracy in Tony Blair—eager to participate in a
the Twenty-first Century seemingly historic transformation.
BY THANT MYINT-U. Norton, 2019, Myanmar’s democratic transition
304 pp. reached its apex on November 8, 2015,
when Aung San Suu Kyi led her party, the
J
ust a few years ago, Myanmar (also National League for Democracy, to a
called Burma) was widely seen as an staggering victory in national elections.
international success story. In March The following March, Thein Sein
2011, after half a century of military rule, handed over power to the new adminis-
a quasi-civilian government led by the tration. It was the first peaceful transfer
former general Thein Sein came to power of power in Myanmar since 1960. A
and embarked on a remarkable campaign country once mentioned in the same
of political and economic reforms. Over breath as North Korea had seemingly
the next year and a half, the government flipped onto the right side of history.
released dissidents, lifted press censorship, Then the story darkened. On
let the democratic icon Aung San Suu Kyi August 25, 2017, a militant group calling
reenter politics after spending years under itself the Arakan Rohingya Salvation
house arrest, and opened peace talks with Army launched a string of attacks on
more than a dozen rebel groups. President military outposts across the northern
Thein Sein’s administration also took reaches of Rakhine State. The Burmese
important steps to rationalize an economy army responded with a merciless series
distorted by decades of autarkic socialist of military operations—a campaign of
policies and harsh Western sanctions. ethnic cleansing that emptied villages of
On the foreign policy front, Myanmar Rohingya Muslims. By the end of the
spurned China, its overbearing patron, year, some 700,000 Rohingya had fled
by suspending unpopular infrastructure into neighboring Bangladesh. Terrified
refugees told of rape, torture, arson, and
SEBASTIAN STRANGIO is a journalist extrajudicial killings by Burmese soldiers
covering Southeast Asia and the author of the
forthcoming book In the Dragon’s Shadow: and Buddhist vigilantes. Two Burmese
Southeast Asia in the Chinese Century. Reuters journalists who reported on the
May/June 2020 179
Sebastian Strangio
atrocities were arrested and charged with open politics did little to heal long-
breaching Myanmar’s Official Secrets Act. standing ethnic and sectarian cleavages.
A UN fact-finding commission later Myanmar’s recent story is as much about
concluded that the military’s campaign continuity as it is about change.
amounted to possible war crimes, crimes
against humanity, and genocide. THE END OF HISTORY
As this humanitarian crisis unfolded, With its maroon-robed monks, golden-
many outside Myanmar looked to Aung spired pagodas and mist-shrouded hills,
San Suu Kyi, a Nobel laureate who had Myanmar has always been an easy
won praise for her years of opposition country to romanticize. In the nine-
to Myanmar’s military dictatorship, for teenth century, British writers depicted
a solution. But she declined to condemn it as a land of innocents slumbering
the military’s actions, displaying an under the yoke of incompetent Oriental
indifference that seemed to border on despotism. This image was peddled for
complicity. Aung San Suu Kyi’s moral political gain, including by the British
stock plummeted. By the end of 2017, press to justify the overthrow of Burma’s
pundits and journalists were calling for last king, Thibaw, in 1885.
her Nobel Peace Prize to be revoked. The In more recent times, a different
undergraduate college at Oxford Univer- kind of reductionism has skewed Western
sity where Aung San Suu Kyi had understanding. In 1988, the Burmese
studied took down a portrait of her that army brutally repressed nationwide
had hung by its main entrance for pro-democracy protests, killing thousands
almost 20 years. Amnesty International of demonstrators. In the aftermath,
stripped her of its highest honor. For her Aung San Suu Kyi emerged as a figure
former admirers, the low point came in of heroic opposition to military rule,
December 2019, when she appeared at the and in Western eyes, the country’s
International Court of Justice, in The struggles coalesced into a morality play:
Hague, to defend Myanmar against on one side was a clique of wicked
accusations of genocide. Here was a generals and their cronies; on the other, a
world-famous icon of peaceful democratic beloved icon leading her people in their
struggle speaking up for the very generals struggle for human rights and democracy.
she had battled since the late 1980s. One reason that this narrative was
For outside observers, this lurching powerful is that it reaffirmed the prevail-
trajectory is hard to comprehend. But ing ideological assumptions of analysts and
as the historian Thant Myint-U writes politicians in the West: that the world was
in his incisive new book, The Hidden moving inexorably, if sometimes haltingly,
History of Burma, the vacillating interna- in the direction of liberal values. Amid the
tional perceptions of Myanmar—from disappointments of the Arab Spring,
pariah state to democratic success story Thant Myint-U observes, Myanmar’s
and back again—say more about West- apparently frictionless progress offered a
ern hopes than they do about Burmese much-needed tonic, a reassurance that
realities. In fact, Thant Myint-U argues, history was still moving in its preor-
for all the positive changes that swept dained direction. But this view of
the country between 2011 and 2015, more Myanmar failed to consider its tortured
The Myanmar Mirage
Aung San Suu Kyi

political, social, and economic conditions. this story. His grandfather U Thant was
It disregarded the endemic civil wars a leading figure in Burmese politics in
that had raged for seven decades along the years after the country won its
the country’s mountainous periphery, as independence from the United King-
well as the racial and religious tensions dom, in 1948, and later served as
that underpinned them. It also overlooked secretary-general of the United Nations.
the challenges posed by the country’s An author of three previous books on
gaping economic inequalities, the result Myanmar who taught for several years
of rapacious crony capitalism layered at Cambridge University, Thant Myint-U
on top of the failed economic policies also enjoyed a ringside seat to the
of an earlier age. events he describes, acting as an unofficial
R. VECCHIO IMPRINTS
Thant Myint-U, a writer, historian, intermediary between Western officials

and conservationist, offers perhaps the and Myanmar’s junta during the early
definitive account of Myanmar’s halting years of reform and later as an adviser
transformation over the past decade. to Thein Sein. These experiences have
Thant Myint-U is well placed to tell allowed him to piece together a detailed
May/June 2020 181
Sebastian Strangio
narrative of a crucial period in Myanmar’s the Irrawaddy Delta in late April and early
history, enriched with anecdotes and May 2008. It left more than 100,000
interviews with key players. people dead in Myanmar and devastated
In Thant Myint-U’s telling, there was large parts of the delta. By exposing the
more to Myanmar’s opening in 2011 fragility, paranoia, and dire capacity of the
than a simple liberal conversion. Thein Burmese state, Nargis created the condi-
Sein’s reforms had many interconnected tions in which Myanmar could begin to
motivations, but the one common pursue a new path. Thant Myint-U points
denominator was Burmese officials’ out that this progress relied on individuals
growing shame and embarrassment at within the government and civil society
the extent of their country’s dysfunction. bravely pressing their advantage at key
By the early years of this century, junctures. One such moment came in
Myanmar was the poorest country in September 2011, when the government
Asia. Its estimated GDP per capita was suspended the Chinese-backed Myitsone
little more than half those of Bangladesh Dam project in northern Myanmar, which
and Cambodia and less than half those had become the subject of fierce public
of Laos and Vietnam. Harsh sanctions opposition. In Thant Myint-U’s analy-
imposed by the George W. Bush admin- sis, the ebullient public reaction to the
istration strangled aid flows and stamped dam’s suspension catalyzed the reform
out most legitimate business enterprises, process by giving Thein Sein the political
concentrating economic power in the capital necessary to move ahead with
hands of corrupt tycoons and meth- further liberalization.
peddling warlords. Shut out from much
of the global economy, the Burmese junta NATURE VS. NURTURE
became heavily reliant on trade with and The apparent ease with which the reforms
investment from China, whose suffocat- unfolded led many outside observers to
ing economic presence and flows of overlook the depth and complexity of
migrants into northern Myanmar stoked Myanmar’s challenges. Thant Myint-U
popular anxiety. By pursuing a carefully argues that these challenges, including the
graduated political opening, the junta sectarian tensions in Rakhine State, have
hoped to institutionalize the military’s roots in the colonial era, when the United
legacy and accomplishments and restore Kingdom, after seizing Burma in a series
a semblance of balance to Myanmar’s of conquests between 1824 and 1885,
domestic and foreign policies. rearranged the nation’s ethnic and racial
What emerges from The Hidden History hierarchies in order to best extract
of Burma is a sense of just how contingent profit. In 1929, George Orwell wrote that
and uncertain that reform process was. the British were “robbing and pilfering
Although the most dramatic changes took Burma quite shamelessly.”
place after Thein Sein took office, moves Importing institutions and methods
toward reform had begun much earlier, from their Indian colony, the British put
although few outside the country gave different parts of the country under
them much credit. In particular, Thant separate forms of administration and
Myint-U emphasizes the importance of favored certain ethnic minorities over the
Cyclone Nargis, which slashed through ethnic Burman majority. They also
The Myanmar Mirage
imported hundreds of thousands of Indian control was simply one solution—how-

immigrants from the British Raj, who, ever baneful and self-defeating—to a
arriving with little more than the rags on centuries-old challenge of building a state
their backs, squeezed the livelihoods of the in outlying regions that had rarely, if ever,
Burmans. “Burma was born as a military been under effective central control.
occupation,” Thant Myint-U writes, “and
grew up as a racial hierarchy.” This ineq- FEAR AND LOATHING IN RAKHINE
uity of colonial rule created the fault lines By 2011, then, Myanmar’s problems
of race and identity that would over- went far deeper than a simple absence
whelm the country after independence. of democratic elections. During the
This is the “hidden history” of the reform period, many Western observers
book’s title: Thant Myint-U describes how and policymakers seemed to believe
modern Burmese nationalism was bent that all good things go together—that
on righting colonial imbalances, restoring free elections and markets would push
a lost martial tradition, and establishing Myanmar’s remaining challenges
the country’s own ethnic and religious toward resolution. But as Thant Myint-U
identity as the organizing principle of the writes, “There was also little thought
new nation. The problem was that before given to what landscape could best
its independence in 1948, Burma had no prepare the country for democratic
precedent as a unified state. The British change and make change sustainable if
anthropologist Edmund Leach described and when it ever came. . . . And there
the country as a “map maker’s fiction”: was no thinking about whether democ-
“Burma as represented on a modern racy itself was really the best initial exit
political map is not a natural geographi- from military dictatorship.”
cal or historical entity,” he wrote in 1963. In practice, the sudden appearance of
“It is a creation of the armed diplomacy freedom of expression and competitive
and administrative convenience of late politics stoked “older anxieties around race,
nineteenth-century British Imperialism.” religion, and national identity.” These
Almost from the moment of inde- anxieties were particularly anguished in
pendence, Burma collapsed into a raft Rakhine State, where the Buddhist
of civil conflicts pitting the military and Rakhines nurtured grievances against the
the central state—dominated by ethnic Burmese state dating back to the Burmese
Burmans—against ethnic rebels and conquest of the Rakhine kingdom of
communist insurgent groups holding Mrauk U in the late eighteenth century.
territory along the country’s periphery. Rakhine nationalists also pitted them-
This chronic instability provided the selves against the Rohingya, many of
justification for the military coup in whose ancestors had emigrated from
1962, which further inflamed the insur- Bengal under the British and who were
gents’ desire for autonomy. The fighting widely seen as illegal immigrants erod-
has never stopped. ing Buddhist culture and identity. Many
Seen in this light, military rule was ethnic Burmans shared Rakhine fears of
as much a symptom of Myanmar’s the Rohingya as part of a wider paranoia
problems as a cause. As the political that Myanmar was on the verge of being
scientist Mary Callahan has argued, army overrun by Muslims. These concerns
May/June 2020 183
Sebastian Strangio
were amplified by Facebook, which rose 2018, it was apparent that Western
to prominence in Myanmar in 2014, observers didn’t know Aung San Suu Kyi
functioning as a potent multiplier of racial as well as they once might have imagined.
and religious tropes. In March 2018, the Myanmar’s failure to resolve its
United Nations reported that Facebook ethnic and religious tensions has
posts “substantively contributed to the international implications. As the United
level of acrimony and dissension and States and other Western countries
conflict” in Rakhine. have reimposed sanctions, Aung San
From the beginning of the crisis in Suu Kyi and her government have
Rakhine State, Aung San Suu Kyi’s turned, just as the old military junta
response was muted. On September 19, did, to China. Since 2017, Beijing has
2017, she broke her silence in a speech, used its veto power in the UN Security
insisting there had been “no clearance Council to shield Myanmar from inter-
operations” against the country’s Muslim national scrutiny over the Rohingya
minority. Addressing the tribunal in The crisis, while offering support in economic
Hague in late 2019, she said that the development and peace negotiations. In
crackdown had been a necessary response January, Chinese President Xi Jinping
to the threat posed by Rohingya paid the first state visit to Myanmar by a
militants. Although Aung San Suu Kyi Chinese leader in 19 years, promising
admitted that some soldiers may have infrastructure financing through the Belt
used excessive force or violated interna- and Road Initiative. China has taken
tional humanitarian law, she argued that advantage of Myanmar’s growing alien-
this was an issue for Myanmar’s justice ation from the West to push forward
system, not the international court, to projects that serve its own interests, such
handle. Amnesty International later as creating a land corridor from China to
referred to Aung San Suu Kyi’s comments the Indian Ocean that will reduce
as “deliberate, deceitful and dangerous.” Chinese dependence on oil imports that
The Rohingya crisis revealed a side of come through the Strait of Malacca.
Aung San Suu Kyi’s character that had To be sure, China’s gains in Myanmar
long been concealed from view. As the remain fragile. Popular resentment of its
journalist Peter Popham has argued, investment and migrants is widespread
Aung San Suu Kyi’s mystique had among the public and within the political
originated from her absence. Confined establishment. Yet with no immediate
for years by the junta to her family’s end in sight to Myanmar’s structural
crumbling home on Yangon’s Inya Lake, problems, relations with the West are
with only fleeting connections to the likely to remain difficult—and China is
outside world, she became a blank only too happy to play the role of the
screen on which people abroad could deep-pocketed, sympathetic partner.
project their hopes. Hidden from view
were the prejudices and proclivities that UNFINISHED NATION
Aung San Suu Kyi shared with many of Have the hopes raised by the reform
her fellow ethnic Burmans, as well as a period been entirely dashed? For Thant
character that tended toward apparent Myint-U, any future progress will
rigidity and intolerance of criticism. By depend on structural change in both
The Myanmar Mirage
institutions and perceptions. He argues This prescription also suggests that

that “the core strategy of the state since Myanmar will continue to confound the
independence—of seeing Burma as a West. Thant Myint-U’s conclusion implies
collection of peoples with the Burmese that Washington and other Western
language and culture at the core—has governments need to jettison any hope of
failed, and will continue to fail.” a sudden liberal transformation, while
Thant Myint-U argues that instead eschewing the temptation to revert to the
of immediate political liberalization, demonization and isolating policies of the
Myanmar should have focused on past. Thant Myint-U is right to emphasize
introducing “radical measures” to fight the need to encourage policies designed to
discrimination, such as creating a address the issues of race and identity that
robust media, building inclusive state lie at the root of Myanmar’s crises. But
institutions, and setting up a welfare the problem with such a recommendation
state. Going forward, he concludes that is that patient engagement will be all the
Myanmar needs “a new story that more difficult to sustain with a country
embraces its diversity, celebrates its that is once again a byword for oppression
natural environment, and aspires to a and human rights violations. Until Myan-
new way of life.” If this recommenda- mar can transcend the racial and national
tion seems nebulous, it is because it myths that predate the nation’s indepen-
speaks to the depth and intractability dence, its identity crisis will continue to
of so many of Myanmar’s challenges. exact a harrowing human cost.∂
S TA N F O R D U N I V E R S I T Y P R E S S
Political Fallout These Islands
Oilcraft
Nuclear Weapons Are Ours
The Myths of
Testing and the The Social
Scarcity and
Making of a Global Construction of
Security That
Environmental Territorial
Haunt U.S.
Crisis Disputes in
Energy Policy
Northeast Asia
Robert Vitalis Toshihiro Higuchi
Alexander Bukh
Defense Overcoming
Management Learning the Isolationism
Reform Lessons of Japan’s
How to Make Modern War Leadership in
the Pentagon Edited by East Asian
Work Better and Thomas G. Security
Cost Less Mahnken Multilateralism
Peter Levine Paul Midford
sup.org STUDIES IN
ASIAN SECURITY
stanfordpress.typepad.com
May/June 2020 185
progress in ending extreme poverty, I
Trials and argued, would come mainly through
long-term economic growth that would
Tribulations result from good governance, invest-
ments in health and education, and the
global spread of technological advances.
A Response to “How Poverty Development aid would, however, be
Ends” necessary to break poverty traps or
accelerate progress in certain disadvan-
taged regions, especially in the deserts,
tropical drylands, and distant inland
Jeffrey D. Sachs regions of sub-Saharan Africa and Asia. I
argued that if the world’s rich countries
converted 0.7 percent of their respective
I
n “How Poverty Ends” (January/ GDPs into well-targeted development
February 2020), Abhijit Banerjee and assistance, extreme poverty could be
Esther Duflo, two of last year’s three ended by 2025. (This recommendation
Nobel laureates in economics, contend was and is well within the realm of the
that “the true ingredients of persistent feasible. Rich countries have promised
economic growth”—development of the 0.7 percent of GDP in aid on several
sort that pulls people out of poverty and occasions—for example, at the Interna-
raises living standards across the board— tional Conference on Financing for
“remain mysterious.” They understand Development in Monterrey, Mexico, in
poverty as a big puzzle to be solved 2002.) I also noted that most seasoned
mainly through experiments, notably development practitioners—including
randomized controlled trials. I have epidemiologists, agronomists, engineers,
admired and supported Banerjee and sociologists, educators, and others—be-
Duflo from the early days of their lieved that they already had the tech-
economics training. But I believe theirs nologies and tools for success but needed
is not the right way to understand the incremental financing to bring those
challenge of ending poverty. There are technologies to impoverished regions.
not huge mysteries about what is needed Few donor governments have fol-
to end extreme poverty. Practical solu- lowed the course that they promised and
tions are largely known and within reach; that I proposed. Today, rich countries
what poor countries need is not more are giving an average of just 0.31 per-
economists performing randomized trials cent of their GDPs per year in develop-
to confirm what experts already know but ment aid—an annual shortfall of about
good governance and development $200 billion from my recommendation
assistance to cover financing gaps. in 2005. As a result of this global
I stated my basic position 15 years ago shortfall, around five million children
in The End of Poverty. Most of the under the age of five will die from
preventable causes in 2020, and around
JEFFREY D. SACHS is University Professor at
Columbia University and Director of Columbia’s 260 million school-age children will be
Center for Sustainable Development. unable to go to school. Moreover, if the
Trials and Tribulations
dearth of funds continues, the poorest millions of lives will be lost unnecessar-
countries will be unable to achieve the ily to disease and hundreds of millions
UN’s Sustainable Development Goals, of lives will be hindered by illiteracy
which call for ending extreme poverty and other extreme privations unless the
and hunger by 2030, among other things. developed world supplies these coun-
The International Monetary Fund has tries with increased assistance to ensure
found that the “fiscal gap” for reaching investment and vital public services.
the Sustainable Development Goals Ultimately, development experts know
comes to around $350 billion per year, a lot more about how to stimulate
or roughly 0.7 percent of the income economic growth than Banerjee and
of the rich world. Duflo seem to suggest. Poor countries
On a global scale, however, extreme can catch up by exporting labor- and
poverty is clearly on the wane, largely resource-intensive products and using the
because of the market-based diffusion of proceeds to build human capital (skills
technologies, as I predicted in The End and health) and infrastructure (roads,
of Poverty. According to the World Bank, railways, and ports). This approach works
35.9 percent of the global population well when countries are at peace, reason-
was living in extreme poverty in 1990; ably well governed, and close enough to
this proportion declined to 10.0 percent sea-lanes and major markets to generate
in 2015, the last year for which the profitable business investments. Scholars
World Bank has published data. China of economic growth call this process
has made the greatest strides, with “conditional convergence,” and evidence
extreme poverty falling from 66.2 for it abounds around the world. As an
percent in 1990 to 0.7 percent in 2015. economic adviser to the Polish govern-
And since 2000—supported by such ment in 1989, following the end of Soviet
organizations as the Global Fund to dominance, I listened to Poland’s demo-
Fight AIDS, Tuberculosis, and Malaria, cratic leaders bemoan the inevitability of
which I helped create—sub-Saharan chronic economic crises and even hunger
Africa, too, has made meaningful prog- and civil war. Yet this pessimism made
ress, with poverty in the region declining little sense because Poland’s economic
from the World Bank’s estimate of 54.7 links with nearby western Europe could
percent in 1990 to 41.4 percent in 2015. readily be restored. In Poland’s case, the
But the challenges remain daunting. country’s proximity to wealthier coun-
The need for more aid is particularly tries and ability to maintain open trade,
urgent in sub-Saharan Africa, where property rights, social services, and a
governments do not possess the domes- convertible currency—steps I recom-
tic revenue bases needed to build infra- mended to the government—could
structure or provide vital public services promote convergent economic growth.
such as health care and education. According to data from the Interna-
Although sub-Saharan countries may tional Monetary Fund, Poland’s GDP
emerge from this morass on the basis of per capita in 1990 (as measured in
their own financing, such a process international prices) stood at 32 percent
would be too slow and accompanied by of Germany’s. By 2019, it had risen to
much avoidable suffering: tens of 63 percent of Germany’s.
May/June 2020 187
Jeffrey D. Sachs
PUT THE TESTERS TO THE TEST new experiments, especially when

One does not need to carry out an millions of lives are at stake. Economists
experiment to test the efficacy of the typically underestimate what is already
approach that has worked in East Asia, known because they are not in direct
eastern Europe, and elsewhere. But contact with the real subject experts, such
Banerjee and Duflo suggest that only as the epidemiologists, parasitologists,
randomized trials can yield genuine agronomists, and civil engineers. Devel-
insight into how to end poverty. Tell- opment-focused institutions urgently
ingly, they contend that it was only after need cross-disciplinary teams, not experi-
a series of randomized trials, whose ments to test the known or the obvious.
results were published in 2010, “found Randomized trials are also often
that charging people for bed nets, which inappropriate when the issue is not the
was once thought to make the nets efficacy of a specific intervention (such
more likely to be used, in fact decreased as a medicine) but how to deliver a
their use” that “major development proven intervention in a local context.
organizations [decided] to abandon fees” Management practices that work in one
for the nets. This description is simply cultural or geographic environment
wrong. As the director of the World might not work well in others. In such
Health Organization’s Commission on circumstances, the most effective ways
Macroeconomics and Health, I began to deliver proven interventions are
advocating the mass free distribution of often best identified through “learning
bed nets to the poor in 2000 based on by doing,” work that takes into account
the already voluminous evidence from the practitioner expertise and the local
world’s top malaria experts that the bed context. This is also true when the policy
nets were highly effective and could challenge is to manage several proven
save vast numbers of lives. In 2008, my interventions simultaneously. What’s
advice on the mass free distribution of more, randomized trials should not delay
bed nets became official UN policy. The the implementation of proven life-saving
bed net study that Banerjee and Duflo interventions. Speedy, forceful execution
reference was published two years later, is undeniably important when lives are at
after many breakthroughs in public risk. An overreliance on trials would
policy and funding that were a decade ultimately leave development institutions
in the making and after the distribution paralyzed, exhausted, and stumbling.
of around 400 million free nets be- History and geography have provided
tween 2004 and 2010. a vast wealth of development experience.
Randomized trials can, of course, be Practitioners and policymakers know, or
useful in certain situations. They are a should know, how to tap into this knowl-
potent method of evaluating new edge. Cross-disciplinary research projects
medical treatments and have helped and teams are vital for harvesting and
prove the efficacy of many interventions, utilizing existing information. Before
including insecticide-treated bed nets. taking on an investigation, researchers
Yet once practitioners and policymakers have an obligation to canvass existing
have enough information, they can and knowledge and to ensure that any pro-
should move forward without endless posed trial would truly be useful. To end
extreme poverty, governments, public and
private organizations, and individuals
must do much better in deploying the
vast and remarkable information they
already have within reach if they look
diligently and skillfully.
Poor countries are today limited
primarily by a lack of education, skills,
and infrastructure; these need to be
addressed through more development Bring the
financing rather than randomized trials.
The United States and many of the REAL WORLD
other rich countries remain unwilling to
extend adequate help to the world’s
to your classroom
poor despite their vast wealth, extensive
knowledge, and powerful tools. U.S.
President Donald Trump’s new budget Case Studies
calls for further cuts to development aid
and for security spending roughly 25
times as great as the aid he proposes.
This rejection of development aid, American foreign policy
combined with a disdain for existing Global institutions
development knowledge, is the real
cause of the continuing crisis of extreme
poverty in the midst of great global Terrorism & security
wealth. It also accounts for the instabil- International trade
ity confronting U.S. interests in many
parts of the impoverished world—insta- Women, peace and security
bility that can be solved by decent jobs, Health and science
schools, health-care workers, and full and more...
stomachs, not by U.S. troops or drones.
To fight extreme poverty, we need to
tap into the world’s stores of practical Join our Faculty Lounge for
wisdom and our own moral compasses. premier access to this unique
We have the knowledge and financial online library of nearly 250
means to end extreme poverty by 2030, case studies and simulations
as called for in the Sustainable Devel-
opment Goals, if we try. ∂ — and make diplomacy part
of your course
https://casestudies.isd.georgetown.edu/
May/June 2020 189
At the heart of these withdrawals
The Two-State were a series of assessments by Israel that
shifts in the relative power of its rivals
Devolution required a change in strategy. In the 1973
Yom Kippur War, Egypt crossed the
Suez Canal and rapidly moved into the
Will Power Shifts in the Sinai Peninsula, demonstrating that it
Middle East Revive “Land commanded modern military technologies
for Peace”? and was able to innovatively deploy
them in a time frame shorter than most
Israeli experts had expected. Egypt’s
aggression challenged Israel’s security
doctrine, which since the 1967 war had
Nothing Lasts Forever been premised on military dominance,
Tarek Osman and proved that Israeli superiority was
far from guaranteed. This major shift in
I
n “The Dream Palace of the Ameri- the Middle East’s strategic landscape
cans” (November/December 2019), paved the way for the 1978 Camp David
Michael Doran reviews the past peace accords and the Egyptian-Israeli
70 years of Arab-Israeli conflict and “land for peace” deal, which has proved
concludes that Israel will not “give back durable for over 40 years.
at the negotiating table what it has Today, Israel’s technological, military,
taken on the battlefield” because power and economic power are significantly
dynamics in the Middle East favor greater than those of its opponents
Israel over its rivals. This realpolitik combined. But what happened in the
view, he says, should guide the United mid-1970s could happen again. Iran,
States’ policy in the region, which Syria, and Hezbollah have built up
should proceed from the premise that serious offensive capabilities on Israel’s
there will be no two-state solution to northern borders. Hamas, taking notes
the Israeli-Palestinian conflict. from Hezbollah’s experience, has been
But this conclusion ignores an incon- able to disrupt life in southern Israel. If
venient reality: power dynamics change. those actors were to enhance their coop-
That is precisely why Israel has some- eration and use increasingly accessible
times handed back territories that it took technologies, such as missiles with
on the battlefield. In 1979, it returned the cyber-capabilities, they could bridge the
Sinai Peninsula to Egypt after a long power differential with Israel. Such an
negotiation process. In 2000, it withdrew alliance would not aim to defeat Israel
from southern Lebanon after judging but instead strive to increase the cost it
that the benefits of staying were not would bear in any confrontation with
worth the costs that the Lebanese the coalition’s members. These changes
militant group Hezbollah could inflict. could alter Israel’s security calculus.
And in 2005, similar calculations, Even if this possibility seems remote,
along with demographic pressures, led the fact remains that successful societies
Israel to withdraw from Gaza. should not base their security doctrines
The Two-State Devolution
on their presumed perpetual ability to Arabs’ position was based on the

control others. In Israel, it took an French version of the resolution, which
experienced soldier with a strategic clearly demands that Israel withdraw
vision, Yitzhak Rabin, to see this. His from all the territories it occupied
insight was that Israel cannot—and during the war. According to the UN
does not want to—permanently control Charter, both versions have equal legal
a large population that seeks indepen- weight; the French text is no less
dence. By the time he became Israel’s official than the English one.
prime minister for a second term, in Doran lauds the Trump administration
1992, Rabin saw that Israel’s long-term for “playing power politics rather than
security required a viable Palestinian trying to move the world beyond them”
state, albeit one that would pose no and for “challenging people’s illusions”
threat to Israel. And he understood about the Middle East. But if the admin-
that “land for peace” was the only istration’s ideas about the region resemble
workable formula. (Rabin was attacked Doran’s, then it will merely be acting on
on several fronts for the talks that another set of illusions.
emerged from that insight, but ulti-
mately, it was an ultranationalist Israeli TAREK OSMAN is the author of Islamism: A
History of Political Islam From the Fall of the
who killed Rabin in 1995.) Ottoman Empire to the Rise of ISIS.
Doran’s essay also includes several
mischaracterizations. For example, he
presents the 1967 Six-Day War as a Doran Replies
struggle between Soviet-backed Arab
I
states and Israel, with the United States argued that the two-state solution to
as a mere observer. In fact, the United the Israeli-Palestinian conflict, as
States had previously decided to sup- traditionally envisioned, is unrealis-
port Israel, particularly against the Arab tic and that the Trump administration
nationalist movements gaining force at is wise to adjust U.S. policy accord-
the time, and Washington was inti- ingly. Tarek Osman responds by assert-
mately involved in Israel’s preparation ing that, although it may seem unrealis-
for and execution of the war. Doran also tic today, “power dynamics change.”
errs in accusing the Arab states of The question, however, is not
distorting the meaning of UN Security whether power dynamics might change
Council Resolution 242. The resolution in the future but whether they are
called on Israel to withdraw “from likely to do so. In this case, they are
territories occupied” in the 1967 war— not. For the two-state solution to
using a phrase that Doran claims was become viable, Hamas must collapse,
“deliberately ambiguous.” The Arab Palestinians in Gaza and the West
states, he writes, later insisted that the Bank must craft a shared vision of the
resolution required Israel to withdraw future, and then they must march in
from all those territories, even though lockstep toward a compromise with
the Americans made sure that the words Israel. The number of stars that must
“all of the” did not appear in what align for this vision to become reality
Doran calls “the official text.” But the is too great to count.
May/June 2020 191
Doran and His Critic
Yet for a quarter century, U.S. leaders the century—the peace plan that the
have stubbornly insisted on treating Trump administration recently an-
the Israeli-Palestinian conflict as if it nounced. And President Donald Trump’s
were ripe for settlement. Between 1993 proposal reflects a broad consensus in
and 2017, three presidents and dozens Israeli politics: both Prime Minister
of their senior aides invested thousands Benjamin Netanyahu and his rival Benny
of hours in pursuit of a permanent Gantz have applauded the deal.
peace agreement. No other diplomatic Osman also devotes much effort to
goal has received this level of sustained validating the Arab interpretation of
attention across administrations. The Resolution 242, namely, that Israel must
meager fruits of this work do not justify withdraw from all the territory it occu-
the massive investment. pied after the 1967 war. Osman’s points on
In support of his belief that the this subject are entirely academic. No
two-state solution is within reach, U.S. administration has ever accepted
Osman invokes the memory of Yitzhak that interpretation of the resolution. The
Rabin. A seasoned military man and American and British drafters of it
political leader, Rabin was no starry- regarded the English-language text as the
eyed peacemaker, and yet he was still definitive version, and they took pains
ready to make painful compromises. to ensure that it supported their preferred
Osman’s depiction of Rabin echoes that outcome—a withdrawal of Israeli forces
presented by former U.S. President from only some of the occupied territo-
Bill Clinton, who often laments that ries, and only after Israel’s neighbors
were it not for Rabin’s assassination, recognized its new borders. The American
the Israelis and the Palestinians would architects saw “land for peace” as a way of
have signed a peace agreement. compelling Israel’s enemies to compro-
This is a saccharine myth that ignores mise. President Richard Nixon and his
the chasm between Rabin’s and Clinton’s adviser Henry Kissinger developed “land
positions. The vision Rabin pursued was for peace” into a coherent doctrine, but
not compatible with the parameters President Jimmy Carter subsequently
Clinton presented to negotiators in 2000, turned it on its head, fashioning it into a
which proposed a Palestinian state in 94 tool for forcing concessions from Israel
to 96 percent of the West Bank and rather than from its neighbors.
Palestinian sovereignty over the Jordan The Oslo accords used Carter’s
Valley and East Jerusalem. In a speech approach as a template. But Oslo was
made before the Knesset a month before born at a unique point in time—the end
his assassination, Rabin described the of the Cold War and the collapse of the
Palestinian entity that he expected to Soviet Union—when the laws of power
emerge from the Oslo accords. It would politics seemed suspended and miracles
be, he explained, “less than a state.” It seemed possible. No one would claim that
would accept Israeli control over the we are living in such a moment now.
Jordan Valley and a unified Jerusalem Nevertheless, what became known as the
under Israeli sovereignty. Rabin’s vision Clinton Parameters continued to drive
was, on the other hand, far more American policy until the advent of the
compatible with the so-called deal of Trump administration.
2020-May-June-FA-3books-Vtl-FNL_Foreign Affairs 3/19/20 2:33 PM P
Osman is right that power dynamics

change, but in the last 25 years in the
Middle East, they have changed mostly Celebrating 36 Years of Independent Publishing
for the worse. Washington has seen the
rise of Iran, the disintegration of Arab
states, the advent of jihadism, the ESSENTIAL READING
reemergence of Russia as a spoiler, and
the deterioration of U.S.-Turkish
relations. In the face of these troubling “In this illuminating
history, Kocs traces
developments, the United States has how international
become increasingly ambivalent about order has risen
its leadership role in the region. and fallen over
But not all changes have been negative. the centuries.”
Israel has emerged as an economic —G. John Ikenberry,
Foreign Affairs
powerhouse, especially in its high-tech pb $27.50
sector, and it has developed an unprec-
edented closeness with the Gulf states.
More than ever before, Washington’s “Ambassador Cohen’s work fills a
interests lie in building Israeli power to void … and it is hard
shore up the battered U.S. regional to think of anyone
security structure, not in tearing it down as qualified as he is
in the pursuit of a peace fantasy. to undertake such a
In this context, it is the responsibility work.... Scholars
and commentators
of Palestinian leaders, whose politics
on Africa will want
remain riddled with irredentism, to prove
to keep his book
that their nationalism can promote close at hand.”
international peace and stability. Trump’s —John Campbell,
plan reflects this new reality. It returns Council on Foreign
Relations • pb $35
to the original understanding of “land
for peace” and to the Nixonian idea of
how to fashion a successful Middle East
strategy. If they desire American “The book that
terrorism experts
partnership and assistance, the onus is once have been waiting
again on Israel’s rivals to demonstrate for—one that
that their aspirations serve the United debunks popular
States’ interests.∂ misconceptions
about international
terrorism!”
—Christine Sixta Rinehart,
University of South Carolina
Union • pb $25
T EL : 303-444-6684 • www.r ienner.com
May/June 2020 193
hegemony. Beyond the illiberal order
Recent Books building of China and Russia, the exit
from U.S. hegemony occurs primarily
through “bottom-up” processes in
Political and Legal which nongovernmental organizations,
transnational political movements, and
G. John Ikenberry non-Western international organiza-
tions create geopolitical “niches” in
which countries can escape the domi-
Exit From Hegemony: The Unraveling of nance of the United States.
the American Global Order
BY ALEXANDER COOLEY AND The Return of Great Power Rivalry
DANIEL NEXON. Oxford University BY MAT THEW KROENIG. Oxford
Press, 2020, 304 pp. University Press, 2020, 304 pp.
I
n the aftermath of World War II, Alexis de Tocqueville famously argued
the United States built and presided that democracies were “decidedly
over a liberal hegemonic order, inferior” to autocratic states in the
which now seems to be unraveling. In conduct of foreign affairs. Other
this important book, Cooley and Nexon thinkers, including Herodotus, Machia-
provide one of the best guides to velli, Montesquieu, and some modern
understanding how global orders rise liberal theorists, have insisted that, on
and fall. The United States’ postwar the contrary, democracies have an
effort to create an international order— advantage over nondemocracies. In this
what the authors describe as an “ecosys- timely return to an old debate, Kroenig
tem”—that was friendly to liberal makes the case that democratic states
democracies led Washington to empha- tend to “do better” than other types of
size open markets, multilateral coopera- states in great-power rivalries. Democra-
tion, and liberal values, giving its cies have greater capacities for generating
hegemony a “liberal internationalist” long-term economic growth, borrowing
cast. When the Soviet Union collapsed, capital, building alliances, making
the United States gained “patronage international agreements, and sustaining
monopoly”: it was left as the only state stable and legitimate rule. Kroenig
with an existing framework for ordering bundles these familiar arguments to-
international relations. Other states gether and sets out on a fast-paced histor-
had few options but to integrate into ical journey through the classic cases of
Washington’s grand liberal ecosystem. competition between democratic great
The authors’ key insight is that all of this powers and autocratic ones: from Athens
has now changed. With the rise of and Sparta, to medieval Venice and its
China and Russia, countries around the rivals, to the United Kingdom and
world have alternative suppliers of Germany in the twentieth century, and
development assistance, military security, finally to the United States and the
and public goods—in effect, countries Soviet Union during the Cold War.
now have “exit options” from U.S. Kroenig does not claim that democracies
Recent Books
always prevail in war or succeed in delicate balancing act will fall apart if
building hegemony, but he does insist that the United States acts erratically and
democratic states can “punch above their disrupts relations.
weight.” The value of the book lies in
framing an important question for today: Toward a Theory of Peace: The Role of
In the United States’ growing competi- Moral Beliefs
tion with China, will its democracy be an BY RANDALL CAROLINE WATSON
advantage or a hindrance? FORSBERG. EDITED BY MAT THEW
EVANGELISTA AND NETA C.
Reluctant Warriors: Germany, Japan, and CRAWFORD. Cornell University Press,
Their U.S. Alliance Dilemma 2019, 270 pp.
BY ALEXANDRA SAKAKI, HANNS W.
MAULL, KERSTIN LUKNER, ELLIS S. Forsberg, an antinuclear activist and
KRAUSS, AND THOMAS U. BERGER. defense policy expert who died in 2007,
Brookings Institution Press, 2019, 314 pp. is most famous as a leader of the “nuclear
freeze” campaign of the 1980s. As
Germany and Japan have benefited revealed by this remarkable book, the
from the U.S.-led postwar order, rising text of which comes from her 1997
to the top of the developed world as doctoral dissertation, Forsberg was also
what the authors of this book call a thoughtful theorist of peace studies
“civilian great powers” within the U.S.- and political change. War in world
led alliance system. The United States, history, Forsberg claims, can be seen as
too, has been lucky to have Germany “socially sanctioned large scale group
and Japan as stable and cooperative violence,” a class of human behavior
partners, anchoring its global leadership akin to human sacrifice, cannibalism,
position in Europe and Asia. Since the slavery, and lethal punishment. She
end of the Cold War, both countries observes that most people are revolted
have moved closer to involvement in by these forms of violence, and so she
U.S. military interventions despite delves deeply into psychology, anthro-
their postwar antimilitaristic legal and pology, and history to see how and under
cultural norms. But as the authors what conditions societies reach moral
cogently detail, these mutually benefi- judgments about certain kinds of violence.
cial ties have long been laced with She believed that popular movements
frustrations. As early as the 1970s, could transform people’s moral beliefs
Washington began criticizing Germany about war and weapons. Her thesis is a
and Japan for free-riding and urging dazzling intellectual tour de force with a
them to expand their defense spending sobering conclusion: moral revolutions
and international military roles. The take many lifetimes to unfold, requiring
Trump administration now reiterates centuries of dedication and struggle.
these demands, in blunter terms. The
authors argue that Germany and Japan
will continue to manage these tensions,
inching just enough toward meeting
U.S. demands to maintain ties. But that
May/June 2020 195
Recent Books
Culture and Order in World Politics Economic, Social, and

EDITED BY ANDREW PHILLIPS
AND CHRISTIAN REUS-SMIT. Environmental
Cambridge University Press, 2020, 440 pp.
Richard N. Cooper
This persuasive collection of essays
makes the case that constructing order in
international relations is in large part a Paying for Pollution: Why a Carbon Tax Is
matter of managing cultural diversity. In Good for America
recent centuries, building international BY GILBERT E. METCALF. Oxford
or regional orders over sets of fluid, University Press, 2019, 200 pp.
shifting cultures has entailed establishing
I
various regimes, from imperial realms f governments hope to slow global
(such as the Chinese and Ottoman empires) warming and rising sea levels, they
to the more familiar liberal hegemony of must reduce the emission of green-
the United States after World War II. house gases, especially carbon dioxide.
Problems arise when these overarching Metcalf, an economist and former U.S.
orders favor some cultural identities over Treasury official, argues that the best
others, which can generate new cultural way to do that is to levy a tax on carbon
movements that aim to overthrow the emissions. Such a tax would be far
order, from Uighur resistance to Han superior, in his view, to both strenuous
Chinese hegemony in Xinjiang to popu- new regulations on carbon emissions
list reactions to liberal internationalism (although some additional regulations will
in Western countries. The authors be needed) and cap and trade, a program
generally agree that a legitimate interna- in which companies are given emission
tional order must tolerate cultural allowances and permitted to sell what
diversity, but they disagree over the they do not use to companies that exceed
extent to which the current international their limits. Any new tax produces
order—based on Western liberal distributional concerns. Metcalf would
norms—actually does so. This stimulat- prefer to return the substantial revenues
ing volume reveals an important tension generated by a carbon tax to the tax-
in world politics today: even as the paying public, perhaps by reducing other
institutions that uphold the current one taxes. The book doubles as a primer on
express respect for cultural difference, public taxation. Metcalf draws the major-
fractious cultural forces—including ity of his examples from the United
within the West—threaten to topple it. States, but his argument applies to most
JOHN M. OWEN IV other countries, as well.
Recent Books
More: A History of the World Economy former Australian trade official, provides
From the Iron Age to the Information Age a useful description and analysis of the
BY PHILIP COGGAN. PublicAffairs, predicament of the WTO, delving into
2020, 496 pp. how countries have had to negotiate trade
agreements outside the multilateral
framework of the organization. Heydon
Coggan, a columnist at The Economist, analyzes 21 case studies drawn from
ably covers the history of the world many countries that explain how the
economy in under 500 pages. Much of world trade system has worked (or
the book charts the evolution of agricul- failed). The book serves as a well-written
ture—after all, most human beings in introduction to the world trading
recent millennia have been farmers— system as it actually exists today and is
tracing the development of new and also a good reference for readers who
better edible plants, as well as pivotal want to pursue more granular topics,
inventions such as the stirrup, the iron such as trade in intellectual property or
plow, and the horse collar. With the national support for agriculture.
emergence of energy from fossil fuels
such as coal and oil, the industrializing Golden Rice: The Imperiled Birth of a
West greatly improved production and GMO Superfood
raised standards of living (albeit at the BY ED REGIS. Johns Hopkins
cost of tremendous pollution). The rest University Press, 2019, 256 pp.
of the world eventually followed suit.
As a result, the human population Millions of people are blinded or die
exploded in the nineteenth and twenti- every year from diets low in nutrition.
eth centuries, because of better nutri- This fine and informative book explores
tion and health care. But Malthusian one effort to find a remedy for vitamin
predictions of overpopulation have not deficiency. With private financing from
been borne out: fertility rates gradually the United States, European scientists
declined in many parts of the world began three decades ago to try to breed a
even as living standards improved. strain of genetically modified rice that
Coggan also pays due attention to the contains beta carotene, a precursor to
historical importance of economies vitamin A. By 2002, they had succeeded,
outside the West—China, India, and creating a variety known as “golden rice”
Islamic empires—and their many thanks to its color. But nearly 20 years
contributions to Europe after the fall of later, only Australia, Canada, New
the Roman Empire. Zealand, and the United States—whose
populations already have adequate
The Political Economy of International Trade levels of vitamin A in their diets—have
BY KEN HEYDON. Polity Press, 2019, allowed the release of this rice. Many
240 pp. official obstacles sit in the way of the
spread of golden rice, with even ap-
In recent years, the Trump administra- proval for field trials difficult to secure.
tion has attacked and hobbled the Regis shows that although nongovern-
World Trade Organization. Heydon, a mental organizations and activist
May/June 2020 197
Recent Books
groups such as Greenpeace have gener-

ated much emotional opposition to Military, Scientific, and
genetically modified organisms, it is Technological
government regulations and the glacial
pace of plant breeding that have Lawrence D. Freedman
delayed the introduction of golden rice
to the parts of the world where it would
be most beneficial.
On Obedience: Contrasting Philosophies for
Finance and Security: Global the Military, Citizenry, and Community
Vulnerabilities, Threats, and Responses BY PAULINE SHANKS KAURIN.
BY MARTIN S. NAVIAS. Hurst, 2019, Naval Institute Press, 2020, 288 pp.
310 pp.
A
s commander in chief, U.S.
Globalization has encouraged the move- President Donald Trump has
ment of capital across borders in both disrupted civil-military relations,
legal and illicit ways. This detailed showing total indifference to established
work by a London-based lawyer studies chains of command and emphasizing
the growth of illegal financial activities personal loyalty over constitutional duty.
across borders, including the money In this timely and thoughtful book,
laundering of drug dealers, human Kaurin doesn’t address Trump directly
traffickers, and terrorist financers. but provides an invaluable guide for
Governments, separately and in coop- situations in which demands for obedi-
eration, have tried to clamp down on ence conflict with the imperatives of
these cross-border financial transfers in conscience. How should military person-
(sometimes reluctant) private partner- nel and ordinary citizens respond to
ship with the major global banks. In troubling orders or manage the compet-
other cases, governments—acting both ing claims of loyalty to the group and
unilaterally and multilaterally—have belonging in a broader society? Through
imposed sanctions on foreign individu- chapters considering the virtue of
als, organizations, and even other obedience, discipline and loyalty, and the
governments. The United States, for use of judgment and discretion, she
instance, maintained financial sanctions argues that individuals faced with
on entities in 12 countries and territo- demands to obey should adopt a “criti-
ries at the time of this writing. Navias cal” stance that keeps the wider context
parses the thicket of laws and regula- in view while allowing them to act in
tions in the United States, the United morally and practically sustainable ways.
Kingdom, and the European Union She concludes by testing her approach in
that regulate financial transactions, a number of hypothetical scenarios,
showing the tensions and even conflicts including receiving orders to launch a
between these legal regimes. This is a nuclear strike, dealing with a toxic
necessary handbook for anyone doing company commander, and coping with
international business who wants to the tensions between a mission’s goals
stay within the law. and a senior commander’s orders.
Recent Books
Conspiring With the Enemy: The Ethic of once stated. But it may well now stand
Cooperation in Warfare as one of the best-established conten-
BY Y VONNE CHIU. Columbia tions in the field, supported not only by
University Press, 2019, 360 pp. Lyall’s carefully constructed statistical
analysis but also by his series of fasci-
In a book full of insight and provocation, nating case studies that cover a range of
Chiu explores the ways that enemies at encounters, some long forgotten, to show
war can cooperate. These moments of how the proposition works in practice.
collaboration between foes have included For instance, Lyall dips into the nine-
upholding standards of fairness in combat; teenth-century wars between Russia and
establishing protections for noncombat- Kokand (now part of Uzbekistan) and
ants and prisoners, as required by the between Spain and Morocco to demon-
Geneva Conventions; and working strate that schisms within Kokand’s and
together to bring fighting to an end. Such Morocco’s armies led to their defeat.
actions relate to the broader moral com- Lyall’s book represents a welcome min-
plexity of combat: for example, doctors at gling of the traditions of quantitative and
a field hospital may try but fail to save one qualitative political science. He sets a
of their own and then successfully treat rigorous and imaginative methodological
the enemy solider responsible for their standard that others will struggle to
colleague’s death. And even as the killing match, in the process raising questions,
proceeds—and despite rhetorical claims perhaps unintentionally, about the value
that victory depends on uncompromising of prior quantitative research that has
ruthlessness—enemies can still set bound- drawn from inferior databases.
aries that preserve mutual respect and a
shared sense of humanity. When unsure Active Measures: The Secret History of
of a war’s purpose and strategic ration- Disinformation and Political Warfare
ale, those on the frontlines make their BY THOMAS RID. Farrar, Straus and
own accommodations. In the trenches Giroux, 2020, 528 pp.
of World War I, soldiers often saw their
own overzealous superior officers as Soon after the 1917 Russian Revolution,
more of a menace than the enemy. the Bolshevik regime used misinforma-
tion to confuse its opponents. With word
Divided Armies: Inequality and Battlefield of a faux anti-Bolshevik conspiracy within
Performance in Modern War Russia, the Soviets forged links with real
BY JASON LYALL. Princeton anti-Bolsheviks abroad, persuading them
University Press, 2020, 528 pp. that encouraging developments in Russia
would dampen the need for outside
Like all good political science proposi- intervention. Although the United States
tions, Lyall’s claim that armed forces was not above using such “active meas-
whose composition reflects severe ures” during the Cold War, the Soviet
inequalities between ethnic groups will Union and its satellite states, such as
fare far worse in battle than those whose Czechoslovakia and East Germany, were
composition reflects more inclusive social more accomplished in their design of
and political structures seems obvious them: they planted stories to convince the
May/June 2020 199
Recent Books
United States’ European allies of the

threat posed by Washington’s imperialist The United States
warmongering and reckless preparations
for nuclear war. By the time the Cold Jessica T. Mathews
War ended, such measures had become
almost routine. Moscow has revived them
in recent years as Russian relations with
the West have become more hostile, with How to Make Love to a Despot: An
the added impetus and reach of social Alternative Foreign Policy for the Twenty-
media. Rid concludes this fascinating first Century
and well-researched history by warning BY STEPHEN D. KRASNER. Liveright,
of the need to take the challenge of 2020, 336 pp.
misinformation seriously while being
careful to not exaggerate its effects. The Inevitability of Tragedy: Henry
Kissinger and His World
Stealth: The Secret Contest to Invent BY BARRY GEWEN. Norton, 2020, 480 pp.
Invisible Aircraft
T
BY PETER WESTWICK. Oxford hese two volumes are among a
University Press, 2020, 272 pp. coming tidal wave of books that
debate what the United States’
In 1974, the Pentagon held a competition to strategic posture should be now that its
see if aerospace companies could develop global primacy seems to have run its
an aircraft that could not be detected by course. Krasner argues that because
radar. Creating stealth aircraft required prosperous, democratic nations are excep-
reducing the likelihood that a plane would tions in international politics, the United
be detected by radar by a factor of 10,000. States would protect itself better and make
Two companies competed successfully, and the world safer if it adopted policies
each ended up with a major stealth “acceptable to despotic rulers,” coming to
program. Lockheed got the F-117 fighter, terms with the “good-enough governance”
and Northrop, the B-2 bomber. Westwick of nondemocratic governments instead of
does a good job of explaining the engi- trying to consolidate democracy around
neering principles at work, the competitive the world. His detailed list of what counts
instinct of the engineers—which motivated as good enough leaves no doubt that he is
them more than did a patriotic desire to calling for a dramatic departure from
gain the upper hand over the Soviet current policy. Good-enough governments
Union—and the advantages of a close are those that are able to maintain order
partnership between the private sector and and a moderate level of economic growth
the state. This narrative presents a positive and uphold rule by law (if not necessarily
story of technological advance and the the rule of law). Washington would accept
people who made it possible, although that elections in many countries are a
Westwick does raise questions about the sham and that it is hard to protect human
expense of the programs, given that so few rights from abroad. Because weak states
B-2 bombers were built, such as, “What can cause such great harm to others (from
targets were worth risking $2 billion to hit?” terrorism, pandemics, proliferation,
Recent Books
refugee flows, and other transnational chilling exploration of an American politi-

threats), their capacity to govern is more cal movement that she dubs “Christian
important than the finer points of nationalism” because of its claim of
democracy. Good enough, it seems, is a returning to the founders’ core belief—a
very low bar. Krasner’s call for greater false claim, of course—that the United
humility in U.S. foreign policy is States was a Christian nation. The move-
welcome, but many will find it hard to ment began in the late 1970s, latching on
discern how such a policy is compatible to abortion as a useful hot-button issue.
with American values. But contrary to its conventional portrayal
Gewen, an editor of The New York as a social or cultural phenomenon,
Times Book Review, has written a ster- Stewart insists that the movement is an
ling, highly readable intellectual biogra- ambitious political effort to take over
phy of Henry Kissinger. Although the every element of government with the
former U.S. secretary of state has been aim of elevating the Bible (in cherry-
out of office for more than 40 years, picked form) over the Constitution as the
Gewen convincingly argues that a full chief source of governmental legitimacy.
appreciation of Kissinger’s realist philos- Christian nationalism represents a radical
ophy is now more important than ever, rejection of the founders’ core belief in
as the United States rethinks its role in the separation of church and state. Made
the world. The main topics are familiar: up of a coalition of pastoral, advocacy, and
the centrality of the national interest activist groups, the movement also has
and the balance of power and the impor- international ambitions. Its adherents are
tance of a deep understanding of and particularly fond of autocrats, such as
respect for others’ national interests and Russian President Vladimir Putin, who
therefore of diplomatic compromise. But are able to fuse church and state. Much of
the profound pessimism of Kissinger’s what Stewart recounts would seem
view of history and his deep ambivalence incredible were it not presented through
about democracy—forged by a childhood extensive quotations from speeches by,
under Nazism—will be new to many documents of, and conversations with
readers. The book does not attempt to movement leaders.
render a judgment on Kissinger’s policies
in government and his abiding influence The Abandonment of the West: The History
thereafter. Gewen is obviously an ad- of an Idea in American Foreign Policy
mirer, but he is also unflinching in BY MICHAEL KIMMAGE. Basic
portraying Kissinger’s deviousness, thin Books, 2020, 384 pp.
skin, and overweening ambition.
The fall of the Berlin Wall exposed the
The Power Worshippers: Inside the failures of Soviet communism. Now,
Dangerous Rise of Religious Nationalism writes Kimmage, “it is a wavering West
BY KATHERINE STEWART. that is on trial.” Defending the West—
Bloomsbury, 2020, 352 pp. which he defines as a geopolitical and
cultural concept rather than a geo-
Based on more than a decade of investi- graphic place—has been the animating
gative reporting, Stewart conducts a core of U.S. foreign policy since the
May/June 2020 201
Recent Books
beginning of the twentieth century. he can use against them (including

Kimmage traces the rise of the concept in socialism, reparations for slavery, and
the first half of the century and then its the Green New Deal). Instead, Demo-
gradual decline under criticism from both crats should engage in “shallow, con-
the left (which saw the paradigm as too tent-free campaigning,” concentrating
white and too imperial) and the right on a unifying message of common
(which saw it as too multinational), purpose and traditional values. Trump
through to its evaporation after the end will stop at nothing to avoid a loss, so
of the Cold War. Presidents once rou- Democrats must be prepared to respond
tinely touted the West in their speeches, to the worst attacks they can imagine. A
and universities required introductory brisk read, the book delivers sobering
courses in Western civilization. No insights that must be heeded before the
more. Kimmage outlines the costs of this Democrats choose their nominee.
loss: the idea had provided a reason for
international engagement, a compass for
dealing with authoritarian challenges
from states such as China and Russia, Western Europe
and a broader guiding principle for U.S.
foreign policy. Andrew Moravcsik
Running Against the Devil: A Plot to Save
America From Trump—and Democrats
From Themselves Germany: A Nation in Its Time—Before,
BY RICK WILSON. Crown Forum, During, and After Nationalism, 1500–
2020, 352 pp. 2000
BY HELMUT WALSER SMITH.
Snappy, breezy, entertaining, passion- Liveright, 2020, 608 pp.
ate, and full of unnecessary obscenity,
T
this book implores Democrats not to his magisterial study addresses
throw away the 2020 presidential the central question in modern
election, telling them exactly what to do German history: How and why
and what not to. Wilson, a former did the country embrace a racial and
Republican political consultant, has the cultural nationalism that ultimately led to
zeal of a convert. Some of his advice is war and genocide? Smith denies that
elementary: for example, only 15 swing German nationalism is, as some historians
states will matter in the general elec- argue, a single doctrine, let alone an
tion. Other admonitions are more intrinsically aggressive one. To support
compelling. With Donald Trump as the this thesis, Smith provides a sweeping
incumbent, the election will be a referen- history beginning in 1500, when Germany
dum on his presidency. But because was an amalgam of regions, cities, and
Trump practices “pure, unadulterated principalities. For most of the next four
opportunistic politics,” Democrats will centuries, as Germany’s sense of cultural
have to beat him at his own game. They coherence grew, it remained a relatively
should refuse to feed Trump issues that peaceful region with a benign sense of
Recent Books
national identity that neither excluded those items’ location—a first hint that
domestic minorities nor threatened he is actually stuck in a Kafkaesque
external neighbors. Even in the nine- world of seemingly arbitrary legalistic
teenth century, as a nationalist project procedures, in which truth is subject to
to unite Germany took hold, the bureaucratic whimsy. Day to day, he is
country remained relatively peaceful, treated much like a Victorian schoolboy,
with a few brief, if notable, exceptions, subject to petty humiliations and
such as the Franco-Prussian War. And punishments. Some asylum seekers in
for the last 75 years, Germans have Europe wait for decades for legal status,
developed what Smith describes as a enduring a series of determinations
“compassionate, empathetic realism designed to make asylum more difficult
about belonging.” The “nationalist age,” to obtain. No other book I have read
from 1914 to 1945, when the politics of makes the soul-destroying effects of
identity turned horribly violent, is thus European asylum procedures more vividly
an exception. Smith describes its clear than this one.
excesses—from the slaughter on the
eastern front to the Holocaust—in Europe’s Burden: Promoting Good
moving detail, but he seems, like many Governance Across Borders
historians before him, somewhat BY ALINA MUNGIU-PIPPIDI.
baffled by their ultimate cause. Cambridge University Press, 2019, 344 pp.
Two Blankets, Three Sheets European countries are unparalleled in

BY RODAAN AL GALIDI. World their use of economic, cultural, legal,
Editions, 2020, 400 pp. and other tools to peacefully project
influence abroad. But critics often
The author of this best-selling novel, charge that Europeans do not do
translated from the Dutch, emigrated enough to raise standards of gover-
in 1998 from Iraq to the Netherlands to nance elsewhere—particularly in their
avoid military service. He then spent own neighborhood. In this wide-rang-
nine years in a Dutch government-run ing book, a political scientist argues
housing center as an undocumented that European efforts to use nonmili-
asylum seeker. He was denied citizen- tary means to promote the rule of law
ship but taught himself Dutch and and good governance outside the EU—
published a book in 2009 that was in particular, to quash corruption—
awarded the EU Prize for Literature. have not been hugely successful. She
His newest novel is an account, by cites examples from a dozen countries
turns comic and heart-rending, of an from Egypt to Moldova. Yet one
applicant’s interaction with the asylum wonders if such criticism, backed by
apparatus in the Netherlands. The calls for a more “comprehensive”
asylum seeker arrives a trusting person, anticorruption policy, hold the EU to an
assuming that acceptance is just around unrealistic standard. After all, few
the corner. Officials welcome him with efforts to promote democracy and good
two blankets and three sheets and tell government are successful. It seems
him that he must constantly report incontrovertible that EU investment,
May/June 2020 203
Recent Books
trade, and diplomatic support made all A Twentieth-Century Crusade: The

the difference in at least three recent Vatican’s Battle to Remake Christian
cases. Without such aid, Ukraine would Europe
almost certainly have collapsed, Kosovo BY GIULIANA CHAMEDES. Harvard
would be dysfunctional, and Tunisia University Press, 2019, 440 pp.
would have made less progress than it
has. Perhaps Europeans should be more
modest, as many development analysts This pathbreaking book offers the first
counsel, and learn to accept “good serious historical account of the modern
enough” governance. diplomacy of the Catholic Church—an
organization that for the first three-
Island Stories: An Unconventional History quarters of the twentieth century was
of Britain more powerful than any other nonstate
BY DAVID REYNOLDS. Basic Books, actor. The church, which viewed democ-
2020, 304 pp. racy with suspicion, began its interna-
tional activities in 1917 with systematic
One of the more amusing aspects of opposition to Wilsonian liberalism and
Brexit has been the tendency of Con- Soviet communism. In the interwar
servative Party leaders in the United period, it signed “concordats” with any
Kingdom to analogize leaving the EU to government—including fascist ones in
heroic past triumphs, comparing Brexit Germany, Italy, and Spain, and also the
to the waging of World War II, for newly independent Baltic states—that
instance, or to the famous British victories promised to deepen Catholic influence
at Agincourt in 1415 and Waterloo in in family law (opposing divorce and,
1815. Many non-Britons (and many later, abortion), education (creating
Britons, as well) find such comparisons space for religious teaching), and civil
risible. Reynolds, a historian, seeks to society (where religious symbols would
explain why some of his compatriots remain part of civic life) and to provide
view the United Kingdom in this grandi- state support for the church. Famously,
ose way. Although he has written a the church remained silent on the
number of weighty books on twentieth- persecution and extermination of the
century history, this volume—lively, Jews during World War II. After the
slender, and timely—is more reminis- war, the church became a consistent
cent of his historical documentaries for bulwark against communism. This
BBC television. His pithy summaries of became particularly important after the
British experiences of and beliefs war, when the church reconciled with
about empire and decline demonstrate democrats and promoted Christian
why the fanciful Brexit analogies are democratic parties in Europe in order
misguided. The reader is left to to bolster resistance to the influence of
wonder, however, why these narratives the Soviet Union. The church took a
remain persuasive to Britons in a way more conciliatory stance on decoloniza-
that has no parallel in the rest of Europe. tion, rightly sensing that the develop-
ing world might be fertile ground for
future expansion.
Recent Books
Is Europe Christian? Western Hemisphere

BY OLIVIER ROY. TRANSLATED BY
CYNTHIA SCHOCH. Oxford
University Press, 2020, 112 pp. Richard Feinberg
This book, widely discussed when it first U.S. Hegemony and the Americas: Power
appeared in French, critiques the notion and Economic Statecraft in International
that Europe is fundamentally Christian, Relations
an idea in vogue in far-right populist BY ARTURO SANTA- CRUZ .
rhetoric. The author is a specialist in Routledge, 2019, 238 pp.
Islamic culture but also—tellingly, given
S
the book’s short length, thin documenta- anta-Cruz argues that since the
tion, and occasional factual lapses—a 1970s, the United States has suc-
celebrated French public intellectual. cessfully preserved its core interests
He grabbed headlines in the past for in Latin America through “thick” eco-
arguing, convincingly, that Islamist nomic statecraft, a sophisticated approach
terrorism has little to do with Islam. Here, that embeds liberal values, mutual gains,
he effortlessly skewers the pieties sur- and strategic restraint in commercial
rounding the idea of a Christian Europe, diplomacy. With some regrettable
insisting that the continent today is exceptions—including supporting the
extremely secular and multicultural and brutal overthrow of a progressive govern-
that most right-wing nationalists ignore ment in Chile in 1973 and fruitlessly
or reject Christian teachings on sex, twisting arms to corral support for the
abortion, and the role of women. Why 2003 invasion of Iraq—the United States
have calls for a Christian Europe gained has eschewed heavy-handed unilateral-
such traction? His provocative answer is ism in the Americas. In separate chapters
that since the 1960s, a “totalitarian” left on Canada, Mexico, and Central and
has foisted on European countries a South America, Santa-Cruz pushes back
political correctness comprised of liber- against the notion that U.S. influence
tarianism, hedonism, and the marginal- has steadily declined in the Western
ization of the church. Right-wing popu- Hemisphere but declines to pin down
lists appeal to Christianity to rebel the indicators or key measurements of
against this discourse. But since they are Washington’s sway. Santa-Cruz de-
not actually religious, they wind up nounces U.S. President Donald Trump’s
simply reinforcing the “dechristianiza- raw exercise of coercive power as
tion” of Europe by draining meaning counterproductive and badly, perhaps
from the symbols of Christianity. irreparably, damaging to the United
Unfortunately, the book ends with just a States’ reputation and legitimacy.
single paragraph on how to rebalance Integrating international relations theory
secular and religious values. and detailed histories, this book is an
ambitious, landmark contribution
against which future studies of inter-
American relations will be judged.
May/June 2020 205
Recent Books
El Norte: The Epic and Forgotten Story of Nearly the New World: The British West
Hispanic North America Indies and the Flight From Nazism,
BY CARRIE GIBSON. Grove Atlantic, 1933–1945
2019, 576 pp. BY JOANNA NEWMAN. Berghahn
Books, 2019, 320 pp.
A scholar and journalist, Gibson As global migration flows surge, there is

traversed the United States in search of renewed interest in the histories of
monuments and other traces of His- previously displaced populations. When
panic influence on U.S. history and the Nazis tightened their grip on
culture. The sweeping journey of the Europe, and the United Kingdom and
book stretches from the arrival of the United States slammed shut their
Columbus to the election of U.S. doors, desperate refugees turned to less
President Donald Trump, and it in- common destinations, including the
tends to reinsert the Hispanic past into British and French colonies of the
the memories and imaginations of Caribbean. Two highly competent
contemporary Americans. The trag- studies recount the harrowing journeys
edies and injustices are countless. of those European refugees lucky
Gibson unearths the deep roots of enough to secure safe havens in distant
white supremacy, which was critical to tropical destinations.
justifying the demolition of indigenous For a brief period during the early
communities, the enslavement of 1940s, Vichy France allowed refugees—
Africans, the conquest of Mexico, the mostly German Jews, anti-Nazi activists,
land grabs from the Spanish in Califor- and defeated Spanish Republicans—
nia, and a succession of U.S. military passage on cargo ships sailing from
interventions in the Caribbean. But Marseille via Casablanca to the French
Gibson avoids dogma, celebrating the colony of Martinique. They still had to
enduring contributions of Hispanic overcome Kafkaesque hurdles in the
peoples to American life in her visits to Vichy bureaucracy and anti-immigrant
Los Angeles, Miami, New York, Tuc- attitudes among the authorities in
son, and her hometown of Dalton, Martinique. Expertly analyzing archives
Georgia. “In a shared Anglo-Hispanic and illustrative case studies, Jennings
popular culture, who or what is ‘His- finds that success required good luck,
panic’ remains unresolved,” she observes. financial resources, personal connec-
The story she tells “is not a separate tions, courage, and determination. For
history of outsiders or interlopers, but most of these refugees, Martinique was a
one that is central to how the United transit point for eventual resettlement
States has developed and will continue in the United States or elsewhere in the
to develop.” Americas. Particularly fascinating is
Jennings’s sketch of a constellation of
Escape From Vichy: The Refugee Exodus to celebrity refugees that included the
the French Caribbean anthropologist Claude Lévi-Strauss, the
BY ERIC T. JENNINGS. Harvard surrealist André Breton, the Russian
University Press, 2018, 320 pp. revolutionary Victor Serge, and the
Recent Books
Afro-Cuban cubist painter Wifredo generate power for those vehicles from
Lam. Once in Martinique, these figures potentially abundant renewables such as
encountered Aimé and Suzanne Cé- energy from wind, the sun, and biomass.
saire, early advocates of black pride, For too long, dependence on imported
opening new horizons that, Jennings oil has contributed to crippling external
suggests, “built a stepping-stone of debt levels, price inflation, and weak
postwar liberation ideology.” currencies in the region. Pairing electric
Newman’s father was a child refugee vehicle deployment with an expansion
from Germany, arriving in the United of renewable energy could make Carib-
Kingdom in 1937. She seeks “to explain bean nations less vulnerable to the
rather than cast blame” as she describes fluctuating price of oil, reduce transport
the conflicting priorities of the rulers and electricity costs, and drastically cut
of the British Empire during the greenhouse gas emissions. Electric
tumultuous 1930s. The plight of asylum vehicles could also bolster resilience by
seekers barely registered in a time of storing energy that might otherwise be
economic depression, xenophobia, fears cut off during natural disasters. The
of instability in the colonies, and, authors of this snappy policy brief pro-
eventually, the overwhelming impera- duce case studies of Barbados, Bermuda,
tives of waging war. Nevertheless, the the Cayman Islands, the Dominican
British West Indies offered temporary Republic, and Jamaica, arguing that these
sanctuary to some 5,000 European islands’ relatively small fleets of vehicles
refugees. These refugees often met with could be quickly electrified and that
a “reluctant welcome” in the Caribbean; charging networks will not need to be
the West Indies was not a mythical as extensive in Caribbean nations as
haven of tolerance. Some Jewish immi- they would have to be in larger countries.
grants prospered in their new island The authors urge governments in the
communities; most chose to move on Caribbean to transform nature’s poten-
when political conditions allowed. tial into national progress.
Electrified Islands: The Road to E-Mobility

in the Caribbean
BY LISA VISCIDI, NATE G RAHAM,
MARCELINO MADRIGAL, MALAIKA
MASSON, VERONICA R. PRADO,
AND JUAN CRUZ MONTICELLI.
Inter-American Dialogue, Inter-American
Development Bank, and the Organization
of American States, 2019, 28 pp.
Finally, a good news story for the long-

suffering islands of the Caribbean. The
relatively small size of these islands
makes them practical places to convert
vehicles to run on batteries and to
May/June 2020 207
Recent Books
marveling at how easy it was to get a tan

Eastern Europe and Former that day, all while the radiation readings
Soviet Republics on the (very scarce) dosimeters were off
the scale and terror-stricken nuclear
Maria Lipman experts feared the possibility of a true
Armageddon of radioactive contamina-
tion reaching the Dnieper River and the
oceans of the world. Both Higginbotham
Midnight in Chernobyl: The Untold Story and Plokhy show how the communist
of the World’s Greatest Nuclear Disaster leadership mobilized hundreds of
BY ADAM HIGGINBOTHAM. Simon thousands of “expendable” people to
& Schuster, 2019, 560 pp. clear the damage caused by the catastro-
phe. They explain how the Soviet Union’s
Chernobyl: The History of a Nuclear enormous appetite for nuclear energy
Catastrophe encouraged thrift over safety; the state
BY SERHII PLOKHY. Basic Books, ignored warnings about flaws in the
2018, 432 pp. reactor design and covered up informa-
tion about preceding accidents.
Manual for Survival: A Chernobyl Guide The two books are, of course, not
to the Future entirely identical. Readers interested in
BY KATE BROWN. Norton, 2019, 432 pp. technology will appreciate Higgin-
botham’s fascinating descriptions of
T
hree recent books examine the how Soviet specialists solved the formi-
origins and fallout of the dable technological challenges involved
Chernobyl nuclear reactor in the cleanup of the contaminated
explosion in 1986. At the center of both territory. He calls the sarcophagus
Higginbotham’s and Plokhy’s books are installed over Unit 4 a “medieval fantasy
minute-by-minute reconstructions of of a prison to hold Satan himself,” whose
the world’s worst nuclear accident and construction was a technical triumph in
its immediate aftermath. The more the face of horrifying conditions: Soviet
detailed their accounts become, the officials had to measure each job not
more the two histories overlap. The two only in terms of the time it would
narratives feature many of the same require but also in terms of the number
protagonists: scientists, managers, of individuals who would be “burnt.”
engineers, firefighters, doctors, Commu- Plokhy’s book focuses more on politi-
nist Party functionaries, and govern- cal history. Its closing chapters explain
ment officials. They even use some of how the antinuclear movement started by
the same quotes. Both works begin with Ukrainian writers soon broke the bounds
the preparation for the fatal test of of the Soviet leader Mikhail Gorbachev’s
Chernobyl’s Unit 4 reactor, which led to timid policy of openness and evolved as a
the explosion. In both books, one Ukraine-wide eco-nationalist movement.
encounters the initial obliviousness of In December 1991, five years after the
local residents, with children playing Chernobyl catastrophe, Ukrainians over-
outdoors, men fishing, and sunbathers whelmingly voted for independence.
Recent Books
The Soviet Union ceased to exist that radiation syndrome. Experts claim that
month, but it took many more years they still know little about the effects of
before the Chernobyl nuclear plant was low doses of radiation, but Brown is
finally decommissioned. convinced that they simply do not want
Brown explores the legacy of the to see the facts.
disaster, arguing convincingly that
experts have underestimated the damage Nikita Khrushchev’s Journey Into America
it inflicted in the following years on BY LAWRENCE J. NELSON AND
people in Ukraine and neighboring MAT THEW G. SCHOENBACHLER.
Belarus and Russia. International organi- University Press of Kansas, 2019, 296 pp.
zations, and especially the International
Atomic Energy Agency, she contends, In 1959, U.S. President Dwight Eisen-
have consistently ignored evidence hower controversially welcomed the
pointing to the deleterious effects on Soviet leader Nikita Khrushchev for a
human health of chronic exposure to jaunt around the United States—just
low-dose radiation. She rests her convic- three years earlier, the Soviet government
tion that healthy people in the territories had brutally crushed a revolution in
well beyond the “alienation zone” Hungary. Khrushchev’s improbable
became ill soon after the disaster on the two-week visit did not change the course
vast material collected by doctors in of the Cold War, nor do Nelson and
Belarus and Ukraine and on years of her Schoenbachler change the general
own dogged research, including pains- understanding of the U.S.-Soviet rivalry.
taking studies of those countries’ health Instead, the book presents a colorful
registry records. Working in national chronicle of Khrushchev’s tour and a
and provincial archives, she was often the lively portrait of the Soviet leader. A
first researcher to sign out long-neglected firm Marxist, Khrushchev never missed
files. Traveling in the contaminated an opportunity to remind his hosts,
rural regions, she discovered that although whether on Wall Street or in Holly-
government officials gave residents safety wood, that communism was on the
recommendations, they could not follow right side of history and that capitalism
them for lack of appropriate resources. was doomed. He bragged incessantly
Residents were chronically exposed to about Soviet triumphs in space and
low-dose radiation as they continued reacted rudely, sometimes exploding in
eating contaminated food and using anger, whenever he detected conde-
water from wells, wood for cooking, and scension or disrespect. When not
ashes and manure as fertilizer. Experts provoked, he could be open and genial,
are fixated on the sheer levels of radia- charming and funny, and always anxious
tion that spread from the plant, but to connect with “ordinary Americans.”
Brown argues that they too easily dismiss Unwilling to admit the United States’
factors that encouraged the absorption of economic or technological superiority,
low doses of radiation, such as rural he showed curiosity and admiration for
lifestyles, the types of soil in the area, and things that were new to him, from
local food chains, all of which contrib- Eisenhower’s helicopter (he ordered
uted to the development of chronic several for his own use in the Soviet
May/June 2020 209
Recent Books
Union) to self-service at the IBM cafeteria

(he began to introduce this technology in Middle East
the Soviet Union on his return).
John Waterbury
The Icon and the Square: Russian Modernism
and the Russo-Byzantine Revival
BY MARIA TAROUTINA. Penn State
University Press, 2018, 288 pp. The Arab Winter: A Tragedy
BY NOAH F ELDMAN. Princeton
In her lavishly illustrated book, Taroutina University Press, 2020, 216 pp.
revises the time period during which
F
art historians generally locate the origins eldman, a legal scholar, analyzes
of modernism in Russian art from the the events of the 2010–11 Arab
beginning of the twentieth century to the Spring and its aftermath at a high
closing decades of the nineteenth. level of abstraction. In his view, the
During that earlier time period, Tarou- revolts represented the first time Arabs
tina points out, Russian artists had rose up against their leaders, replacing
moved away from imitating contempo- the unity of Arab states with the unity of
rary European styles and toward develop- Arab peoples. But it’s not entirely clear
ing a local “Russo-Byzantine” tradition whom he’s referring to when he writes
that drew from older sources. This shift, about “the Arab people.” In one brief
although seemingly conservative in aside, Feldman describes “the people” as
nature, in fact produced innovative art. the intelligentsia and “the ordinary
The new fascination with Byzantine middle class” who led the protests in
roots generated an interest in cleaning Tunisia, Egypt, and elsewhere. But many
the dust off old icons that suddenly other groups were involved in the
struck Russian viewers as looking rather movements that toppled governments in
modern. These pictures likely served as a 2011. Feldman misconstrues the dynamics
source of inspiration for many modern- of the social contract in Arab autocracies,
ist artists. Mikhail Vrubel began his claims that the Syrian uprising was
artistic career working in the Byzantine inherently violent even though it was
manner. Wassily Kandinsky in his youth initially peaceful, and insists that the
copied Byzantine miniatures, his artistic Egyptian people invited the armed forces
theory informed by his church atten- to topple the democratically elected
dance; according to Taroutina, even his government of the Muslim Brotherhood
mature paintings bear some resem- in June 2013. But the book is still worth-
blance to old Russian icons. Kazimir while because Feldman challenges readers
Malevich’s “quasi-cubism,” Taroutina to rethink what happened in 2011.
writes, also owes more to the Russo-
Byzantine tradition than to contemporary
European cubism.
Recent Books
Black Wave: Saudi Arabia, Iran, and the Trump and Iran: From Containment to
Forty-Year Rivalry That Unraveled Confrontation
Culture, Religion, and Collective Memory BY NADER ENTESSAR AND KAVEH L.
in the Middle East AF RASIABI. Lexington Books, 2019,
BY KIM GHAT TAS. Henry Holt, 2020, 288 pp.
400 pp.
Written before the assassination of the
A number of pivotal events in the years Iranian commander Qasem Soleimani,
around 1979 transformed the Middle this book assesses the change in the
East: the triumph of the Islamic Revolu- United States’ approach to Iran from the
tion in Iran, the Soviet invasion of Obama administration to the Trump
Afghanistan, the seizure of the Grand administration. Under Barack Obama,
Mosque in Mecca by Islamist insurgents, the United States and other major
and the assassination of Egyptian powers negotiated the Joint Comprehen-
President Anwar al-Sadat. Ghattas sive Plan of Action to contain Iran’s
describes how waves of extremism and presumed nuclear ambitions. That deal,
bigotry flowed out from Iran and Saudi however, did little to curb the role of
Arabia, reshaping a region that had Iranian proxies in the wider region.
been generally pluralistic and fundamen- Under Donald Trump—and especially
tally tolerant. After 1979, “the dictatorship following the appointments of John
of the closed mind” took hold in many Bolton as national security adviser and
societies in the Middle East. Ghattas Mike Pompeo as secretary of state—
paints a big picture through a number of Washington shifted from containment to
small portraits. Many of her protagonists a more hostile posture, with the goal of
tried to resist the rising tide of extrem- regime change and the possibility of
ism, including the late Saudi Arabian military confrontation very much on the
journalist Jamal Khashoggi, whose killing table. The Trump administration has
at the hands of Saudi operatives Ghattas also promoted joint Israeli and Saudi
narrates in the conclusion of the book. regional hegemony to counter Tehran’s
She is unsparing in her critique of influence. Entessar and Afrasiabi do a
regional leadership through the decades, fine job of parsing the technical aspects of
from Iran’s revolutionary leader Ayatollah the nuclear deal, as well as the recent
Ruhollah Khomeini to Crown Prince efforts of China, Russia, and European
Mohammed bin Salman in modern Saudi powers to dilute the effects of new U.S.
Arabia. Ghattas eschews despair and sanctions on Iran. Although the authors
finds heroes among her own millennial underline the limitations of Obama’s
generation, men and women who refuse approach to Iran, they clearly prefer it to
to buckle under the inherited calamities Trump’s more coercive policy. They
of an earlier era. suggest that Iran is too big and well rooted
in the region to succumb to Trump’s
campaign of “maximum pressure.”
May/June 2020 211
Recent Books
The Universal Enemy: Jihad, Empire, and How the West Stole Democracy From the
the Challenge of Solidarity Arabs: The Syrian Arab Congress of 1920
BY DARRYL LI. Stanford University and the Destruction of Its Liberal-Islamic
Press, 2019, 384 pp. Alliance
BY ELIZABETH F. THOMPSON.
Li sees the global “war on terror” as a Atlantic Monthly Press, 2020, 496 pp.
clash of competing universalist visions. In
this provocative book, he explores how This accessible historical narrative
jihadis and other Islamists develop their focuses on the thwarted Syrian drive for
projects. He draws from his fieldwork in independence following World War I.
Bosnia with Muslim Bosniaks and with Thompson traces how a coalition of
foreign, mainly Arab fighters who came to liberals and religious leaders sought to
the Balkans during the disintegration of create a democratic constitutional
Yugoslavia in the early 1990s and re- monarchy in what was known as Greater
mained beyond 9/11. Li is a gifted writer Syria (an area that comprised parts of
and storyteller, and his research has present-day Israel, Lebanon, and Syria).
amazing breadth. Jihadi universalism They drew inspiration from Woodrow
jostled with other belief systems in Wilson’s Fourteen Points and the grow-
Bosnia, including those promulgated by ing clamor for self-determination around
international peacekeeping missions, the the world. But British and French
“war on terror,” and the Non-Aligned leaders and bureaucrats, especially the
Movement (which was headquartered French diplomat and imperialist Robert
during the Cold War in Yugoslavia). But de Caix, conspired to squash this Arab
universalism is an awkward framework for bid for independence. Thompson
understanding what drove holy warriors imagines what would have happened had
to Bosnia in the first place. Li’s analysis Syria gained independence in 1920 and
leaves unexamined the overwhelmingly suggests that the resulting state could
Sunni composition of the foreign Arab have offered a model for the marriage of
fighters. He doesn’t delve into the par- Islam and liberal democracy in the region.
ticularities of Bosniak Islam or consider This counterfactual is both sweeping and
the role of the Ottoman Empire in unprovable. In reality, European powers
shaping religious practices and belief in strangled Syrian independence in its crib,
the region. Despite these omissions, Li and by the late 1930s, an intolerant form
should be commended for a finely crafted of Islam and autocratic Arab nationalism
plunge into international jihad. came to prevail in the Middle East.
Recent Books
Extraordinary Justice: Law, Politics, and

Asia and Pacific the Khmer Rouge Tribunals
BY CRAIG ETCHESON. Columbia
Andrew J. Nathan University Press, 2019, 488 pp.
Etcheson served for six years as chief of

The Caste of Merit: Engineering Education investigations in the mixed interna-
in India tional and Cambodian tribunal that was
BY AJANTHA SUBRAMANIAN. set up to try the leaders of the geno-
Harvard University Press, 2019, 384 pp. cidal Khmer Rouge regime, which ruled
Cambodia from 1975 to 1979. He
T
hroughout Indian history, castes recounts in dispiriting detail the ma-
have jostled with one another in neuvers by Cambodian Prime Minister
the economic and political Hun Sen first to delay the tribunal’s
spheres, with those lower in the hierarchy creation and then to undermine its
seeking to raise their social standing and effectiveness. Negotiations over the
those above seeking to defend theirs. formation and operation of the tribunal
Subramanian observes how these contests did not even start until 1997—18 years
play out in the context of the Indian after the defeat of the Khmer Rouge.
Institutes of Technology, 23 schools Nine more years were spent negotiating
around the country that have trained an the tribunal’s structure and getting it
engineering elite not only for Indian funded, set up, and staffed. The court
firms but also for many U.S. companies then got bogged down in legal and
and universities. Admission is strictly procedural debates between the interna-
exam-based, yet IIT students overwhelm- tional and the Cambodian prosecutors
ingly come from high-caste backgrounds. and judges. The Cambodian side tried to
In India—as in the United States and prevent the court from going after anyone
elsewhere—academic advancement with influence in or connections to the
rarely occurs without a foundation of Hun Sen government. To add to the
family privilege. Focusing on the IIT in mess, zealous defense lawyers recruited
Madras, Subramanian shows how from overseas did their best to stymie the
upper-caste Tamil graduates have con- few active prosecutions. Despite ample
verted their caste privilege into profes- funding from foreign donors, in 14 years
sional prestige and resisted attempts to of operation, the tribunal has convicted
increase the enrollment of lower-caste only three people and opened investiga-
groups. The fetishization of exams has tions into just four others.
rendered caste invisible in the engineering
profession but, she argues, lets it func- The Art of Political Control in China
tion behind the scenes. In India as BY DANIEL C. MAT TINGLY.
elsewhere, the myth of meritocracy Cambridge University Press, 2019, 244 pp.
justifies the reproduction of long-standing
social hierarchies. Scholars increasingly find that state-
society relations in modern China are too
May/June 2020 213
Recent Books
complex to be captured by concepts such these sites. Another report from 2019,
as authoritarianism, totalitarianism, or, as Detained and Disappeared: Intellectuals
some propose, partial democracy. Looking Under Assault in the Uyghur Homeland,
at the state’s relationship with rural profiles seven of what were at the time
society, Mattingly finds a dynamic system 386 known cases of detained Uighur
in which the state recruits low-level intellectuals. The organization maintains
officials from within local kinship and an updated list online and believes that
religious networks. These officials try to the known cases are only a fraction of
serve both their superiors and their the total. The UHRP report Repression
communities—and sometimes themselves. Across Borders: The CCP’s Illegal Harass-
Mattingly’s sharply observed examples ment and Coercion of Uyghur Americans
show how local officials help get villagers gives chilling examples of the way the
to give up land (usually for unfairly low Chinese government uses threatening
compensation and often to be used by phone calls and text messages—as well as
crony capitalists), comply with unpopular arrests of relatives still in China—to put
family-planning regulations, and stay pressure on Uighur Americans to stay
silent in the face of corruption. But the silent and to inform on others.
system is delicately balanced. Where
social networks are weak, local cadres are Fateful Triangle: How China Shaped
unable to exert control, and where those U.S.-India Relations During the Cold War
networks are strong, local leaders may try BY TANVI MADAN. Brookings
to protect their communities against the Institution Press, 2020, 380 pp.
state. When that happens, the central
government sends in the police. Madan argues that the main factor
shaping U.S.-Indian relations during the
Demolishing Faith: The Destruction and Cold War—even more than relations
Desecration of Uyghur Mosques and Shrines with Pakistan and the Soviet Union,
BY BAHRAM K. SINTASH. nuclear proliferation, or shared demo-
Uyghurism.com and the Uyghur cratic values—was China. Both New
Human Rights Project, 2019, 55 pp. Delhi and Washington were worried
about the rise of China, but they seldom
The Washington-based Uyghur Human agreed on how to respond to it. In the
Rights Project uses its networks among early 1950s, New Delhi wanted to
Uighurs in exile and in Xinjiang to engage with Beijing, whereas Washing-
produce informative reports on the ton sought confrontation; in the 1970s,
human rights disaster unfolding in that the United States engaged, whereas
region. (I served for nine years on the India grew more hostile. Even when the
board of the National Endowment for Indian and U.S. positions aligned—as
Democracy, which supports the UHRP.) they did on confronting China in the
Demolishing Faith details a couple of dozen late 1950s and early 1960s—the two
of what may be thousands of destroyed countries did not agree on how to do it.
mosques, shrines, and Muslim cemeteries In Madan’s account, Chinese thinking
in the region, using satellite photos and about the triangular relationship appears
interviews of Uighurs who cared about only occasionally, through the eyes of
Recent Books
Indian and U.S. policymakers who to adopt development policies that are
believed that Beijing was anxious about both more socially sensitive and con-
the threat of U.S.-Indian collusion. cerned with protecting historical sites.
Since the end of the Cold War, the basic
calculations of the three sides have not The Scientist and the Spy: A True Story of
fundamentally changed, which makes this China, the FBI, and Industrial Espionage
work a useful guide to the likely limits of BY MARA HVISTENDAHL. Riverhead
future U.S.-Indian collaboration in Books, 2020, 336 pp.
dealing with China.
The theft of intellectual property is not
The Shenzhen Experiment: The Story of just about computer chips and pharma-
China’s Instant City ceutical formulas: some of the most
BY JUAN DU. Harvard University valuable targets are seeds. To feed a
Press, 2020, 384 pp. growing population with shrinking arable
land, China needs hardy, high-yield
Shenzhen was a fishing village that seeds but cannot afford to spend the
turned into a megalopolis through the many years it takes to develop them.
alchemy of China’s reforms of the last That’s why a police officer in Iowa in 2011
40 years. But Du, an architect and found a Chinese businessman named
urban planner, complicates the simple Robert Mo wandering around in a
narrative of the city’s ascent. The city cornfield where he didn’t belong. The
sprawls over an area more than twice as book offers a fly-on-the-wall procedural
large as that of the five boroughs of of the resulting case that involves spies,
New York City. It has swallowed up informants, FBI agents, customs offi-
land originally occupied by more than cials, and bugged phones and cars.
2,000 long-established rural villages, Along the way, Hvistendahl delves into
which had flourished for centuries seed breeding, the antitrust investiga-
through farming, fishing, oyster cultivation of the agribusiness giant Monsanto,
tion, and, more recently, simple food the differences between security espio-
processing and small-scale manufactur- nage and intellectual property theft,
ing. Some 300 “urban villages” survive and the problem of racial profiling in
inside the modern city, their roughly U.S. investigations in these areas.
built tenements filled with cheap Although most ethnic Chinese scientists
apartments that house migrants from all and businesspeople in the United States
over the country. The most expensive are not spies—and most who are spies
gated community backs onto the biggest are not amateur collectors such as
slum, which the city has targeted for Mo—in this case, the suspect was
redevelopment, a plan that in turn has indeed guilty. But he was the only person
spawned a resistance movement of convicted in a case that involved many
preservationists. Throughout China, bad actors, and while he sat in prison,
breakneck urbanization has required the the Chinese company ChemChina
seizure of land from communities in legally acquired a huge amount of seed
rural areas. Du hopes that the Shenzhen technology by purchasing the Swiss
experiment can teach the rest of China agriculture firm Syngenta.
May/June 2020 215
Recent Books
that shaped elite politics during this

Africa period, to the detriment of assessing the
consequences of military rule.
Nicolas van de Walle
Understanding South Africa
BY CARIEN DU PLESSIS AND
Nigeria’s Soldiers of Fortune: The Abacha MARTIN PLAUT . Hurst, 2019, 316 pp.
and Obasanjo Years
BY MAX SIOLLUN. Hurst, 2019, 325 pp. This breezy introduction to contempo-
rary South Africa by two of its veteran
S
iollun, a Nigerian journalist and journalists is perfect for anyone wanting
historian, is the premier expert on a quick survey of the main issues cur-
the role of the military in Nigeria rently facing the country. Chapters cover
since the country won independence, in the reasons for South Africa’s disap-
1960. This sharply written and well- pointing economic performance over
informed book is the third in his series the last three decades, the lamentable
on military rule in the country and state of the educational system, the
focuses on the period between the end failure of the opposition to wrest power
of General Ibrahim Babangida’s presi- from the African National Congress,
dency, in 1993, and the return to power the divisive politics around land, and
of General Olusegun Obasanjo, in 1999, other contentious subjects. In each
through relatively free and fair elec- case, Du Plessis and Plaut smartly start
tions. Those six years saw the rise of a with the historical context before tracing
particularly toxic politics, in which continuities with and departures from
senior military officers constantly the apartheid years. The authors don’t
maneuvered and conspired to maintain present precise prescriptions for a way
their power. Siollun ably steers the out of the stagnation in which the
reader through the events surrounding country finds itself. Nonetheless, one of
the businessman Mashood Abiola’s the book’s strengths is its nuanced
election to the presidency in 1993, the recognition of the many interests and
military’s refusal to allow him to viewpoints that inform the country’s
assume office, and his subsequent arrest major political issues, a complexity that
and death in custody; General Sani stems directly from South Africa’s
Abacha’s paranoid and violent presi- divided past.
dency, from 1993 to 1998; and the trial
and execution of the activist Ken Land of Tears: The Exploration and
Saro-Wiwa in 1995. Siollun argues that Exploitation of Equatorial Africa
by the end of the twentieth century, the BY ROBERT HARMS. Basic Books,
military had ruled Nigeria so badly that 2019, 544 pp.
citizens were finally convinced of the
superiority of civilian rule. This kind of Many writers have documented the
judgment is rare in a narrative that is abuses of the Belgian king Leopold II,
studiously dispassionate and entirely who ruled the Congo Free State as a
focused on the personalities and networks private fiefdom around the turn of the
Recent Books
twentieth century. In search of ivory and devise a productive industrial policy in

rubber, Leopold’s agents committed the region. Less successful is the au-
unspeakable atrocities and violence that thor’s claim that these case studies can
persisted even after Belgium nationalized provide a general template for the
the Congo Free State in 1908 to make it a overall reform of foreign aid. Chorev is
more conventional colony. Harms’s a fan of state-led industrial policy and
deeply rewarding account of this history argues that aid would be more effective
breaks new ground by broadening the if it directly promoted local production
context of Leopold’s depredations. His efforts. Unfortunately, the record of
book places Leopold’s excesses alongside donors attempting this approach is
two other deeply exploitative state- extremely uneven. Many areas of economic
building ventures in central Africa: development and poverty alleviation,
France’s pillaging of its own neighboring including the provision of public goods,
Congo colony and the handiwork of the rarely lend themselves to the sort of
slave and ivory trader Tippu Tib, who public-private partnerships she encourages.
operated on behalf of the sultan of
Zanzibar and carved out an Arab zone of Whose Agency: The Politics and Practice of
influence in the eastern half of the vast Kenya’s HIV-Prevention NGOs
Congo River basin. Harms’s focus on BY MEGAN HERSHEY. University of
economic and material factors reveals Wisconsin Press, 2019, 224 pp.
how the global demand for ivory and
rubber shaped all three ventures. The proliferation of nongovernmental
organizations (NGOs) in the last three
Give and Take: Developmental Foreign decades has constituted one of the signal
Aid and the Pharmaceutical Industry in changes in the landscape of develop-
East Africa ment policy in Africa. Countries such as
BY NITSAN CHOREV . Princeton Kenya, which saw just a handful of
University Press, 2019, 320 pp. foreign or religious groups in the 1980s,
now host several thousand NGOs, includ-
Chorev examines the role that foreign aid ing a growing number of local organiza-
played in helping build the pharmaceuti- tions. Often dependent on foreign aid,
cal industry in Kenya, Tanzania, and not always boasting the highest ethical
Uganda over the course of the last three standards, and prone to instability,
decades. She argues convincingly that aid these NGOs have drawn criticism for the
helped generate a market for local way they affect policymaking in Afri-
companies, mostly thanks to the demand can countries, specifically how they
for HIV drugs. Foreign donors then sometimes erode the capacity and
offered technical assistance and suggested legitimacy of the state. This detailed
quality-control measures. Chorev con- ethnographic study of the grassroots
ducted thorough research on the ground activities of four Kenyan NGOs involved
in East Africa and in the headquarters of in HIV prevention argues persuasively
international agencies such as the World that even the smallest and least well-
Health Organization and presents a funded organizations can have a signifi-
perceptive analysis of what it takes to cant and positive policy impact. Hershey
May/June 2020 217
Recent Books
finds that these small NGOs have proved those interested in contemporary
surprisingly resilient and able to adapt to Africa, the role of religion in politics, or
the vagaries of donor funding by shifting the ongoing rise of evangelical and
objectives and tactics. Pentecostal Christianity across the
developing world.∂
From Pews to Politics: Religious Sermons NOAH NATHAN
and Political Participation in Africa
BY GWYNETH H. M C CLENDON
AND RACHEL BEAT TY RIEDL.
Cambridge University Press, 2019, 286 pp.
Every week, hundreds of millions of

Africans listen to religious sermons
about how best to live their lives. In this
powerfully argued and creative book,
McClendon and Riedl unpack how
Christian sermons shape political life in
contemporary Africa. Drawing on an
impressive toolkit of modern social
science methods—including surveys,
randomized experiments, case studies,
and the close reading of sermons
themselves—the authors argue that
religious messages shape their audi-
ences’ political activity even when those
messages are not explicitly political.
Even if mainly about personal or family
topics, sermons give parishioners
analytic frameworks for understanding
events in the world and how change is
possible. Mainline Protestant and
Catholic churches focus more on
institutions and structural conditions;
Pentecostals concentrate instead on
individual causes and solutions. These
different worldviews carry over into
how their parishioners seek political
change. The book is a must-read for
Foreign Affairs (ISSN 00157120), May/June 2020, Volume 99, Number 3. Published six times annually (January, March, May, July,
September, November) at 58 East 68th Street, New York, NY 10065. Print subscriptions: U.S., $54.95; Canada, $66.95; other
countries via air, $89.95 per year. Canadian Publication Mail–Mail # 1572121. Periodicals postage paid in New York, NY, and at
additional mailing offices. POSTMASTER: Send address changes to Foreign Affairs, P.O. Box 324, Congers, NY 10920. From time to
time, we permit certain carefully screened companies to send our subscribers information about products or services that we believe
will be of interest. If you prefer not to receive such information, please contact us at the Congers, NY, address indicated above.
SPONSORED CONTENT
A WORLD OF READING
Enjoy these titles on pressing topics in current events, history, politics, and economics.
Please use the information under each listing for details on how to order.
The Human Factor Oilcraft

Gorbachev, Reagan, and The Myths of Scarcity and
Thatcher, and the end of Security That Haunt U.S.
the Cold War Energy Policy
ARCHIE BROWN ROBERT VITALIS
“Another tour de force from Oilcraft is a bracing corrective

Archie Brown” to the myths that have shaped
— Bridget Kendall MBE economic, military, and
diplomatic policy, dispelling our
The first book to forensically oil-soaked fantasies of
examine how the relationships dependence. Robert Vitalis
between Mikhail Gorbachev, debunks the myths to reveal
Ronald Reagan, and Margaret “oilcraft,” a line of magical
Thatcher were critical in bring- thinking closer to witchcraft
ing the Cold War to an end. than statecraft.
fam.ag/humanfactor fam.ag/oilcraft
Oxford University Press Stanford University Press
The Iranian Revolution at Debt and Entanglements

Forty Between the Wars
EDITED BY SUZANNE EDITED BY ERA

MALONEY DABLA-NORRIS
Four decades after the Iranian World War I unleashed forces

Revolution reconfigured the that affected all countries
strategic landscape of the involved in the conflict. This
Middle East, we are still compelling book shows how the
addressing the challenges lack of effective collaboration
created in the revolution’s and resolution mechanisms
aftermath. This volume is hurt the global economy, with
Brookings’s contribution to disastrous consequences.
better inform the persistent
policy conundrum of Iran.
fam.ag/iranianrevolut ion fam.ag/ent anglements

Brookings Institution Press IMF Publications
A Peacekeeper in Africa The World

Learning from UN A Brief Introduction
Interventions in Other
People’s Wars RICHARD HAASS
ALAN DOSS The book that explains how the

world really works, how we got
“A must read for policymakers, here, how it is changing, and why
scholars, or the just curious it matters. What every citizen
seeking to understand the and student needs to read.
success and setbacks of UN
peacekeeping... over the last Available on May 12, 2020.
twenty years and what its future
might be.”
—Alex Vines, Chatham House
fam.ag/peacekeeperinafrica fam.ag/theworld
Lynne Rienner Publishers Penguin Press

Foreign Affairs (May & June 2020)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Foreign Affairs (May & June 2020)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Foreign Affairs (May & June 2020)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

THE COMING UPHEAVAL IN CHINA

The Fire Next Time

THE FIRE NEXT TIME

The Paths to Net Zero 18

The Strategic Case for U.S. Climate Leadership 28

A Foreign Policy for the Climate 39

The Unlikely Environmentalists 47

Building a Resilient Planet 54

Kathy Baughman McLeod

The Climate Debt 60

China’s Coming Upheaval 82

What Kim Wants 96

The End of Grand Strategy 107

Britain Adrift 118

The Next Iranian Revolution 131

Making Cyberspace Safe for Democracy 146

The Right Way to Fix the EU 160

H uman survival is predicated on our ability to create long-term

Experts predicted in 2018 that a major global city—Cape Town,

Just, Peaceful and

The Myanmar Mirage 179

Trials and Tribulations 186

The Two-State Devolution 190

Recent Books 194

STEPHANIE SOLOMON Chief Revenue Officer

LISA SHIELDS, IVA ZORIC, MEGAN GILLILAND Media Relations

SUBSCRIP TION SERVICES: Foreign Affairs

MOHAMED ADOW has spent almost two decades fighting

Ever since RUCHIR SHARMA graduated college in New

As a doctoral student at Columbia, JUNG PAK set out to

The Climate Club A Foreign Policy for the Climate

The Paths to Net Zero The Unlikely Environmentalists

COP23, which followed COP22, all the

WILLIAM NORDHAUS is Sterling Professor of

policies of different countries. Because world to limit warming to the two-de-

incentives and what distinguishes it from production structure but to provide

TOWARD EFFECTIVE POLICIES

organize. And the profound uncertainty

opportunity to increase value and as transportation and heating. Overall,

and both continue to drop. rises—they must also create incentives

areas—and to offshore wind parks in does now in carrying energy from

longer. When it comes to electric buses 1900, to completely replace horses on

THE LONG HAUL

a competitive disadvantage with its

industrialization in other emerging carbon-intensive competitors. Unfortu-

Democrats and Republicans alike hopefully in the current Congress. This

technological innovation, and targeted A NEW CLIMATE ALLIANCE

THE FIRE NEXT TIME

Global Leadership for the #1 master’s

Of course, the existing money is not designed to push companies to disclose

THE FIRE NEXT TIME

mining companies, ArcelorMittal and RISKY BUSINESS

governmental organization that tracks According to the 2019 Edelman Trust

Online M.A. in International Relations

Serving national interests since 1819

Norwich is an equal opportunity employer.

world already made vastly more hostile

Sheet—which contains enough ice to hot days, according to a study published

Through the program, fellows:

hardier, which is why I keep some in my